Combo_Users_Manual_P5000LJ_173952D P5000LJ Combo Users Manual 173952D

P5000LJ to the manual 27191e5a-57de-4f15-94b4-f838499a0ccb

User Manual: P5000LJ

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 336 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

User’s Manual
P5000LJ Series Printers
®
User’s Manual
P5000LJ Series Printers
®
READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE
USING THIS PRINTER
Software License Agreement
CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS
BEFORE USING THIS PRINTER. USING THIS PRINTER INDICATES
YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO
NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS, PROMPTLY RETURN
THE PRINTER AND ALL ACCOMPANYING HARDWARE AND WRITTEN
MATERIALS TO THE PLACE YOU OBTAINED THEM, AND YOUR MONEY
WILL BE REFUNDED.
Definitions.
“Software” shall mean the digitally encoded, machine-readable data and
program. The term “Software Product” includes the Software resident in the
printer and its documentation. The Software Product is licensed (not sold) to
you, and Printronix either owns or licenses from other vendors who own, all
copyright, trade secret, patent and other proprietary rights in the Software
Product.
License.
1. Authorized Use. You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the
Software resident in the printer solely for your own customary business or
personal purposes.
2. Restrictions.
a. To protect the proprietary rights of Printronix, you agree to maintain
the Software Product and other proprietary information concerning
the typefaces in strict confidence.
b. You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software Product.
c. You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer all or any
portion of the Software Product separate from the printer, without the
prior written consent of Printronix.
d. You may not modify or prepare derivative works of the Software
Product.
e. You may not transmit the Software Product over a network, by
telephone, or electronically using any means; or reverse engineer,
decompile or disassemble the Software.
f. You agree to keep confidential and use your best efforts to prevent
and protect the contents of the Software Product from unauthorized
disclosure or use.
3. Transfer. You may transfer the Software Product with the printer, but only
if the recipient agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Your license is automatically terminated if you transfer the
Software Product and printer.
Limited Software Product Warranty
Printronix warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will
perform in accordance with specifications published by Printronix. Printronix
does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions.
Remedy
Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Printronix in connection with
the Software is replacement of defective software with a copy of the same
version and revision level.
Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Remedies
1. THE PARTIES AGREE THAT ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND MERCHANTABILITY ARE EXCLUDED.
Printronix does not warrant that the functions contained in the Software
will meet your requirements or that the operation of the Software will be
uninterrupted or error free.
Printronix reserves the right to make changes and/or improvements in the
Software without notice at any time.
2. IN NO EVENT WILL PRINTRONIX BE LIABLE FOR LOST PROFITS,
LOST DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTIONS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT, EVEN
IF PRINTRONIX HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE ABUSE OR
MANIPULATION OF THE SOFTWARE. SOME STATES DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE
LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
3. Printronix will not be liable for any loss or damage caused by delay in
furnishing a Software Product or any other performance under this
Agreement.
4. Our entire liability and your exclusive remedies for our liability of any kind
(including liability for negligence except liability for personal injury caused
solely by our negligence) for the Software Product covered by this
Agreement and all other performance or nonperformance by us under or
related to this Agreement are limited to the remedies specified by this
Agreement.
5. California law governs this Agreement.
Termination of License Agreement
This License shall continue until terminated. This license may be terminated
by agreement between you and Printronix or by Printronix. If you fail to
comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not corrected within
thirty (30) days after notice. When this License is terminated, you shall return
to the place you obtained them, the printer and all copies of the Software and
documentation.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights
Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as
set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at
FAR 242.227-7013, subdivision (b) (3) (ii) or subparagraph (c) (1) (ii), as
appropriate. Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions
applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 (c) (2).
Acknowledgment of Terms and Conditions
YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT,
UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND
CONDITIONS. NEITHER PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY STATEMENT
OR REPRESENTATION NOT CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT. NO
CHANGE IN THIS AGREEMENT IS EFFECTIVE UNLESS WRITTEN AND
SIGNED BY PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH
PARTY. BY USING THIS PRINTER, YOU AGREE TO ACCEPT THE TERMS
AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.
Printronix makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding this
material, including, but not limited to, implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose. Printronix shall not be held responsible
for errors contained herein or any omissions from this material or for any
damages, whether direct, indirect, incidental or consequential, in connection
with the furnishing, distribution, performance or use of this material. The
information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright. No
part of this document may be reproduced, copied, translated or incorporated
in any other material in any form or by any means, whether manual, graphic,
electronic, mechanical or otherwise, without the prior written consent of
Printronix.
COPYRIGHT © 2000, 2003 PRINTRONIX, INC.
All rights reserved.
Trademark Acknowledgments
Hewlett-Packard, HP, HP-UX, Bi-Tronics, HP in a circle, Hewlett Packard,
PCL and HP rounded rectangle are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard
Company.
AIX, AS/400, IBM, NetView, Proprinter and OS/2 are registered trademarks,
and AFP, Intelligent Printer Data Stream, IPDS, Print Services Facility, and
PSF are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
IBM and Proprinter are registered trademarks, and PC-DOS is a trademark of
International Business Machines Corporation.
Portions of this manual used by permission of Wyndham Technologies, Inc.
Copyright © 1991-1999 Wyndham Technologies Inc.
ANSI is a registered trademark of American National Standards Institute, Inc.
Centronics is a registered trademark of Genicom Corporation.
DEC is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation.
DG/UX is a registered trademark of Data General Corporation.
EIA is a registered trademark of the Electronic Industries Association.
ENERGY STAR is a registered trademark of the United States
Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Hewlett-
Packard has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR®
guidelines for energy efficiency.
Epson is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.
Frontier Technologies and SuperTCP are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Frontier Technologies Corporation.
FTP Software and OnNet are trademarks or registered trademarks of FTP
Software, Inc.
IGP, PGL, LinePrinter Plus, Network Interface Card (NIC) and Printronix are
registered trademarks, and RibbonMinder is a trademark of Printronix, Inc.
IRIX is a registered trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc.
LINUX is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
Magnum and QMS are registered trademarks, and Code V is a trademark of
Quality Micro Systems, Inc.
Microsoft, MS, MS-DOS, Windows, and Windows NT are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
PKZIP and PKUNZIP are registered trademarks of PKWARE, Inc.
NetManage and Chameleon are trademarks or registered trademarks of
NetManage, Inc.
Netscape and Netscape Navigator are registered trademarks, and the
Netscape Communications logo is a trademark of Netscape Communications
Corporation.
Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Inc.
Solaris is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Ultrix is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation.
Unix is a registered trademark of X/Open Company Limited.
This product uses Intellifont Scalable typefaces and Intellifont technology.
Intellifont is a registered trademark of Agfa Division, Miles Incorporated
(Agfa).
CG, Garth Graphic, Intellifont, and Type Director are registered trademarks,
and Shannon and CG Triumvirate are trademarks of Agfa Division, Miles
Incorporated (Agfa). CG Bodoni, CG Century Schoolbook, CG Goudy Old
Style, CG Melliza, Microstyle, CG Omega, and CG Palacio are products of
Agfa Corporation. CG Times, based on Times New Roman under license
from The Monotype Corporation Plc is a product of Agfa.
Univers is a registered trademark of Linotype AG and/or its subsidiaries.
Letraset is a registered trademark, and Aachen, Revue and University Roman
are trademarks of Esselte Pendaflex Corporation.
Futura is a registered trademark of Fundición Tipográfica Neufville, S.A.
ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Benguiat, ITC Bookman, ITC Century, ITC
Cheltenham, ITC Clearface, ITC Galliard, ITC Korinna, ITC Lubalin Graph,
ITC Souvenir, ITC Tiepolo, ITC Zapf Chancery, and ITC Zapf Dingbats are
registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation.
Albertus, Gill Sans, and Times New Roman are registered trademarks, and
Monotype Baskerville is a trademark of The Monotype Corporation Plc,
registered in the U.S. Pat. and TM office and elsewhere.
Hiroshige and Marigold are trademarks of AlphaOmega Typography, Inc.
Table Of Contents
1 Introduction .......................................................... 17
About This Manual ................................................................................17
Warnings, Cautions, And Notes .......................................................17
Printing Conventions Used In This Manual ......................................17
Related Documents..........................................................................18
Printer Overview....................................................................................19
The Printronix P5000LJ Series Printer Family .................................19
Taking Care Of Your Printer.............................................................21
Standard Features ...........................................................................21
Graphics Options .............................................................................23
Protocols And Emulations ................................................................23
Line Matrix Printing ..........................................................................24
Printing Speed..................................................................................25
Network Interface Card (NIC)................................................................26
What Special Features Are Available?.............................................26
NIC ...................................................................................................27
2 Downloading Function Code In
P5000LJ Series Printers ...................................... 29
Introduction............................................................................................29
Downloading In A Nutshell ...............................................................29
Preparation For Downloading...........................................................30
Copying Function Code To Your Computer ..........................................31
Loading Function Code To Flash Memory In The Printer .....................32
Installing Printer Emulations..................................................................32
Downloading Software Through the Serial
or Parallel Port .................................................................................33
Downloading Software Through the
Network Interface Card (NIC)...........................................................37
Downloading Optional Font Files to Flash Memory..........................39
Table of Contents
3 Configuring The Printer ........................................ 45
Overview ...............................................................................................45
Configuring The Printer .........................................................................45
Operating Modes..............................................................................48
The Configurations...........................................................................48
Locking And Unlocking The ENTER Key .........................................48
Changing And Saving Parameter Settings.......................................49
Factory Default Configuration Values ..............................................50
Changing Parameters ...........................................................................54
Example ...........................................................................................54
Saving Your New Configuration .......................................................56
Printing The Current Configuration ..................................................58
Loading Configuration Values ..........................................................60
The Power-Up Configuration............................................................62
Deleting Configurations....................................................................64
Protecting Your Configurations ........................................................66
Configuring NIC.....................................................................................67
Connecting To The Network ............................................................67
Configuration Setup .........................................................................67
Configuration Using The Printer Control Panel ................................68
Configuration Alternatives ................................................................69
4 The Configuration Menus.....................................73
Overview ...............................................................................................73
Configuration Main Menu ......................................................................74
Config. Control Menu ............................................................................77
Active Emulation Menu..........................................................................79
Emulation Menu ....................................................................................80
PCL-II Emulation ..............................................................................81
LP Plus Emulation............................................................................86
P-Series Emulation ..........................................................................90
Proprinter XL Emulation...................................................................93
Epson FX Emulation ........................................................................95
Serial Matrix Emulation ....................................................................97
P-Series XQ Emulation ..................................................................100
IGP/PGL Emulation........................................................................102
IGP/VGL (Code V) Emulation ........................................................107
Maint/Misc Menu .................................................................................114
Table of Contents
Host Interface Menu ............................................................................115
Bi-Tronics Submenu.......................................................................116
Centronics (Parallel) Submenu ......................................................117
Serial Submenu..............................................................................119
Ethernet Submenu .........................................................................122
Auto Switching Submenu ...............................................................123
Ethernet Params Menu .......................................................................125
Printer Control Menu ...........................................................................127
Diagnostics Menu................................................................................129
RibbonMinder ......................................................................................132
RibbonMinder Menu.......................................................................133
5 Approaches To Network Printing ....................... 137
Overview .............................................................................................137
Peer To Peer Networks..................................................................137
Print Job Servers............................................................................138
Logical Printer Architecture ............................................................138
6 Embedded NIC Web Page................................. 141
Overview .............................................................................................141
Configuration .......................................................................................142
Configuration Network.........................................................................143
TCP/IP Network .............................................................................143
Windows Network (NetBIOS TCP/IP) ............................................144
Novell Network ...............................................................................144
Configuration Print Path ......................................................................145
Destination Settings .......................................................................145
Current Model Settings ..................................................................146
Current Log Path Settings..............................................................147
Configuration - Print Model..................................................................147
Configuration - Log Path .....................................................................148
Configuration - I/O Port .......................................................................149
Parallel Port (PRN).........................................................................149
Configuration – SNMP.........................................................................150
Configuration - Administration .............................................................154
System Information ........................................................................154
Passwords......................................................................................154
Configuration - System........................................................................155
Status ..................................................................................................155
Status - I/O Port...................................................................................155
Status - Network..................................................................................155
Table of Contents
7 TCP/IP Configuration ......................................... 157
TCP/IP NIC Configuration ...................................................................157
Before You Begin ...........................................................................157
Creating Aliases .............................................................................158
Methods For Setting TCP/IP Values ..............................................159
Assign TCP/IP Values....................................................................160
Using BOOTP ................................................................................163
8 HP e3000/NIC Configuration.............................. 165
Overview .............................................................................................165
HP e3000 / MPE-XL / MPE / iX: Host Configuration ...........................165
NIC Configuration Verification .............................................................168
Methods Of Adjusting Paper Position..................................................170
Method 1 ........................................................................................170
Method 2 ........................................................................................171
Using Page Level Recovery On P5000LJ Printers..............................171
HP e3000 / MPE-XL / MPE / iX: DTC Configuration ...........................173
MPE-XL / MPE / iX Typical Configuration ......................................173
9 Windows Configuration ...................................... 175
Overview .............................................................................................175
Windows Environment Description......................................................175
Windows NIC Configuration ................................................................176
Mandatory ......................................................................................176
Optional..........................................................................................176
Communicating Across Routers.....................................................177
Changing Workgroup Names.........................................................177
Changing Destination Names ........................................................178
Windows Host Configuration...............................................................179
Windows NT 3.51 Host Setup ........................................................179
Windows NT 4.0 Host Setup..........................................................180
Windows 95/98/ME Host Setup .....................................................186
Windows 3.1 Host Setup................................................................187
Windows Troubleshooting Tips ...........................................................187
NIC Cannot Be Found On The Network.........................................188
HTML Configuration Forms Will Not Display..................................188
Errors Occur When Defining An LPR Printer .................................188
Cannot Browse The NIC On The Network .....................................189
Printer Errors When Printing Or No Output....................................189
TCP/IP Access Problem.................................................................189
Table of Contents
Web Browser/HTTP Problem.........................................................191
Windows NT 4.0 or 2000 Host Setup Problems.............................191
Installing Microsoft TCP/IP Printing................................................191
10 Unix Configuration ............................................. 193
Overview .............................................................................................193
Unix Environment Description .............................................................194
Unix NIC Configuration........................................................................195
Mandatory ......................................................................................195
Optional..........................................................................................195
Communicating Across Routers.....................................................195
Unix Host Configuration ......................................................................196
Printing Setup On HP-UX...............................................................196
Printing Setup On Sys V ...............................................................198
LPR/LPD Printing Setup On BSD Systems
(Sun 4.x, DEC‚ Ultrix‚, Free BSD, etc.)...........................................200
FTP Printing ...................................................................................201
Remote Shell Printing ....................................................................201
Unix Troubleshooting Tips...................................................................202
Nothing Prints.................................................................................202
Stair-stepped Output ......................................................................203
No Form Feed Or Extra Page Comes Out .....................................203
11 Novell Configuration........................................... 205
Overview .............................................................................................205
Novell Environment Description ..........................................................206
Novell NIC Configuration.....................................................................206
Using HTML Forms ........................................................................207
Novell Host Configuration....................................................................208
NetWare Version 3.x PSERVER Setup..........................................208
NetWare Version 3.x RPRINTER Setup ........................................210
NetWare Version 4.x and 5.x PSERVER Setup.............................211
NetWare Version 4.x and 5.x RPRINTER Setup............................213
Novell Troubleshooting Tips................................................................215
NetWare 3.x - No PSERVER Connection ......................................215
NetWare 4.x and 5.x - No PSERVER Connection .........................216
Table of Contents
12 Novell Configuration For 10/100Base-T
Interfaces............................................................ 217
Overview .............................................................................................217
Novell NIC Configuration (10/100Base-T)...........................................217
Preferred File Server (NDS & Bindery) ..........................................218
Setting Password Security (NDS & Bindery)..................................221
Adjusting Polling Time (NDS & Bindery) ........................................222
Changing The Print Server Name (NDS & Bindery) ......................223
Changing The Frame Type (NDS & Bindery).................................225
Changing The Print Server Mode (NDS & Bindery).......................226
Setting The NIC Context (NDS) .....................................................227
Setting The Print Server Preferred NDS Tree (NDS).....................228
Novell Host Configuration (10/100Base-T)..........................................229
NDS PSERVER Setup (Netware 4.x and 5.x)................................229
Bindery PSERVER Setup (Netware 3.x, 4.x, and 5.x) ...................231
Referencing A Bindery Queue In NDS
(Netware 3.x, 4.x, and 5.x) .............................................................231
RPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup (Netware 3.x, 4.x, and 5.x)............232
NPDS Configuration (Netware 4.11 and Above) .................................234
Troubleshooting (10/100Base-T).........................................................236
PSERVER Setup............................................................................236
RPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup .......................................................239
Printing Related..............................................................................240
13 Commands......................................................... 243
Command Shell Overview...................................................................243
Access Methods.............................................................................243
Main Command Shell Prefixes.......................................................243
Getting Command Help..................................................................243
Complete Command List.....................................................................244
Store Commands ...........................................................................244
Set Commands ..............................................................................247
List Commands ..............................................................................254
Debug Commands .........................................................................255
Miscellaneous Commands .............................................................256
Table of Contents
14 Extra Features ................................................... 259
NIC Security ........................................................................................259
Users And Passwords....................................................................259
TCP Access Lists ...........................................................................261
Printer Monitoring And Logging...........................................................262
Printer And Print Job Monitoring ....................................................262
Printer Logging Through Logpaths.................................................263
NIC Naming Schemes.........................................................................264
15 Interfaces ........................................................... 265
Overview .............................................................................................265
Centronics Parallel Interface ...............................................................266
Centronics Interface Signals ..........................................................267
Centronics Parallel Interface Configuration....................................267
Bi-Tronics Parallel Interface ................................................................268
Operating Modes............................................................................268
The Negotiation Phase...................................................................269
Signals ...........................................................................................269
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interfaces.................................................271
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interface Signals.................................272
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interface Protocol ...............................273
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interface Error Handling .....................273
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interface Configuration.......................274
16 Routine Service And Diagnostics....................... 275
Routine Service ...................................................................................275
Exterior Cleaning............................................................................275
Interior Cleaning.............................................................................275
Diagnosing Problems ..........................................................................278
Printer Self-Tests ...........................................................................278
Printing A Hex Dump......................................................................280
Fault Messages..............................................................................282
A Printer Specifications And Regulatory
Information ......................................................... 291
Ribbon Specifications..........................................................................291
Genuine Printronix P5000LJ Supplies.................................................293
Printer Dimensions ..............................................................................294
Environmental Characteristics.............................................................294
Electrical Characteristics .....................................................................295
Material Safety Data Sheets................................................................296
Communication Notices ......................................................................297
Table of Contents
B Paper Specifications And Forms Design............301
Introduction..........................................................................................301
General Paper Specifications..............................................................301
Paper Guidelines.................................................................................303
Terms And Definitions....................................................................303
Environmental Considerations .......................................................305
Form Types ....................................................................................305
Form Weight...................................................................................305
Form Thickness..............................................................................305
Form Evenness ..............................................................................305
Tractor Pin Engagement ................................................................305
Methods Of Forms Attachment ......................................................306
Chaff Content.................................................................................307
Form Design Checklist ........................................................................308
Summary .............................................................................................310
Storage And Handling....................................................................310
C Standard ASCII Character Set ...........................313
D Monitoring Printers ............................................. 315
Implementing Remote Management Software (RMS).........................315
Agent/Manager Model....................................................................315
MIB.................................................................................................315
SNMP.............................................................................................316
Monitoring Tools..................................................................................317
Monitoring With AIX NetView/6000 ................................................317
Monitoring With Web JetAdmin......................................................317
OS/2 TCP/IP ..................................................................................317
Setting The SNMP Community Name............................................317
17
1Introduction
About This Manual
This manual explains how to configure and perform routine service on the
Printronix® P5000LJ Series printers for maximum efficiency.
Warnings, Cautions, And Notes
Read and comply with all information highlighted under special headings:
Printing Conventions Used In This Manual
•UPPERCASE print indicates control panel keys.
Example: Press the CLEAR key, then press the ON LINE key.
•Quotation marks (“ ”) indicate messages you see on the Liquid Crystal
Display (LCD).
Example: Press the ON LINE key. “OFFLINE” appears on the LCD.
•The + (plus) symbol represents key combinations.
Example: “Press + ” means to press the (UP) key and the
(DOWN) key at the same time.
Warning Warning messages call attention to situations that could hurt you or
damage the equipment.
Caution Conditions that could damage the printer or related equipment.
Note A note gives you helpful hints about printer operation and maintenance.
18
Chapter 1 About This Manual
•Command syntax and examples are formatted as follows:
•The Courier font in boldface indicates commands that you type:
Example: $ ping ftp.HP.com
•Regular Courier font indicates displayed results:
Example: ftp.HP.com is alive
•Variable values are shown in italics in command syntax, output, and
in text.
Example: ping ipname
Example: ipname is alive
Related Documents
Following is a list of related documentation shipped with every Printronix
P5000LJ printer.
•P5000LJ Series Printers Installation Instructions, Cabinet and Pedestal
Models — Explains in a step-by-step process how to set up the printer for
operation.
•P5000LJ Series Printers Quick Reference Guide — Describes the keys
on the control panel and provides quick reference information on daily
printer operations such as loading paper and replacing ribbons. Italian,
French, German, and Spanish are included.
•P5000LJ Series Printers PCL-II/LinePrinter Plus Technical Reference
Manual — Describes the host control codes and character sets for the
LinePrinter Plus® and PCL®-II emulations.
•P5000LJ Series Printers IGP/VGL Technical Reference Manual —
Explains how to write graphics programs using the optional QMS® Code
V™ Printronix® emulation. This graphics programming language allows
the user to create and store forms; generate logos, bar codes, and
expanded characters; create other graphics; and merge graphics with
alphanumeric data as a document is printed.
•P5000LJ Series Printers IGP/PGL Technical Reference Manual —
Explains how to write graphics programs using the optional PGL®
Printronix IGP® emulation. This graphics programming language allows
the user to create and store forms; generate logos, bar codes, and
expanded characters; create graphic images; and merge graphics with
alphanumeric data as a document is printed.
Note This manual and the reference manuals listed below are located on the
software starter CD shipped with your P5000LJ printer.
The Printronix P5000LJ Series Printer Family
19
Printer Overview
The Printronix P5000LJ Series Printer Family
The P5000LJ series of line matrix printers consists of 500, 1000, and 1500
lines per minute (lpm) models packaged in various configurations. All of the
models offer software versatility and the latest refinements in line matrix
printing technology. The model numbers indicate printing speed and physical
configuration:
Most line matrix printers have specialized architectures which enable the
printer to emulate, or behave like, another printer. These specialized
architectures are restricted. The P5000LJ printer, however, introduces an
open architecture concept that is not available on any other line matrix printer.
The P5000LJ printer offers the standard emulation of Hewlett-Packard's
Printer Control Language, PCL Level II, to allow easy online programming
capabilities and compatibility with Hewlett-Packard systems. The Printronix
P5000LJ Series printers are fully compatible with HP LineJet and LP Series
printers.
Table 1. The P5000LJ Series Printer Family
Model
Number
US
Model
Number
Europe Nameplate Print
Speed Pedestal Cabinet Serial/
Parallel
Interface
Serial/
Ethernet
Interface
Power
Stacker
C3201D C3201E 500P 500 lpm
C3201ND C3201NE 500P 500 lpm
C3202D C3202E 500Q 500 lpm
C3202ND C3202NE 500Q 500 lpm
C3203D C3203E 1000P 1000 lpm
C3203ND C3203NE 1000P 1000 lpm
C3204D C3204E 1000Q 1000 lpm
C3204ND C3204NE 1000Q 1000 lpm
C3205D C3205E 1500Q 1500 lpm
C3205ND C3205NE 1500Q 1500 lpm
C3206D C3206E 1500P 1500 lpm
C3206ND C3206NE 1500P 1500 lpm
C5640D C5640E 1500QS 1500 lpm
C5640ND C5640NE 1500QS 1500 lpm
20
Chapter 1 Printer Overview
Additionally, the P5000LJ printer offers the following three emulations as part
of its LinePrinter Plus grouping: Proprinter® III XL, Epson® FX-1050, and
Serial Matrix P-Series. No matter what emulation is configured, your printer is
very easy to use. The message display and indicator on the control panel
communicate with you directly and clearly. You can select every function on
your printer at the control panel, or you can send commands from the host
computer.
Figure 1. The P5000LJ Printers
500Q
1000Q
1500Q
1500QS
P5000LJ
500P
1000P
1500P
Taking Care Of Your Printer
21
Taking Care Of Your Printer
Your printer will produce high quality print jobs if it is well taken care of.
Periodic cleaning, handling the printer properly, and using the correct printer
supplies, such as paper and ribbons, will ensure optimum performance.
Chapter 16 explains how to clean the printer, and printer supplies are listed in
Appendix A.
Whenever it is necessary to service the printer, remember these important
maintenance concepts:
•Use only the ribbons specified in Appendix A. Use of incorrect ribbons
can cause ink migration problems, degraded print quality, and expensive
damage to the printer.
•Incorrect closure of the forms thickness lever can cause smearing,
degraded print quality, paper jams, and damage to the platen and shuttle
assembly. Never close the forms thickness lever too tightly.
•Excessive printing outside of the boundaries of the paper will degrade
print quality and cause hammer bank damage. Never print outside of the
paper width.
Standard Features
All of the printers offer a wide range of horizontal and vertical dot densities,
operate quietly, and can load an emulation very easily. Other features are
specified in the following sections.
Host Computer Interfaces
The following host computer interface choices are available:
•Bi-Tronics®
•RS-232 serial interface
•RS-422 serial interface
•Centronics®
•Ethernet™ (optional on 500P and 500Q only)
Printer Emulations
The following printer emulations (or protocols) are selectable at the control
panel:
•HP® PCL-II (the default)
•LP Plus, which consists of:
Printronix P-Series
Epson FX-1050
IBM® Proprinter III XL
•QMS (optional)
•PGL (optional)
Each emulation provides a different set of configuration menus, control codes,
and character sets.
22
Chapter 1 Printer Overview
Output Control
Depending on the active emulation, the printers have the following output
control features:
•Four modes for printing text:
1. Correspondence (High Density)
2. Data Processing (DP) (Standard Density)
3. Sparse (high speed) (Sparse Density)
4. OCR A and OCR B
•Selectable forms length and width
•Character attribute specification:
1. Selectable pitch: normal, expanded, and compressed
2. Emphasized (shadow) printing
3. Automatic underlining and overscoring
4. Superscript and subscript printing
5. Double high and wide printing
•Resident multinational character sets and bar codes
Graphics and Vertical Formatting
Several graphics and vertical formatting features are available:
•Built-in graphics generators:
1. IBM Proprinter III XL bit-image graphics
2. Epson FX-1050 dot graphics mode
3. P-Series Plot
4. PCL raster graphics
•Programmable electronic vertical formatting provides rapid vertical paper
movement to specified lines for printing repetitive and continuous forms.
You can choose from the following methods:
1. Vertical tabbing in Proprinter III XL and Epson FX emulation modes
2. Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU) in P-Series emulation mode
3. PCL vertical forms control (VFC)
Built-in Diagnostic Tools
The following diagnostic tools are provided with the printer:
•Comprehensive diagnostic self-tests permanently stored in the printer
•Configuration printout
•Data stream hex code printout
•Symbol set printout
Graphics Options
23
Graphics Options
The PGL and VGL emulations allow you to create and store forms; generate
logos, bar codes, and expanded characters; and create other graphics.
Alphanumerics and bar code data are added as the form is printed.
Protocols And Emulations
A protocol is a set of rules governing the exchange of information between the
printer and its host computer. These rules consist of codes which manipulate
and print data and allow for machine-to-machine communication. A printer
and its host computer must use the same protocol.
Most impact printers use single ASCII character codes to print text, numbers,
and punctuation marks. Some characters, both singularly and in groups of two
or more, are defined as control codes. Control codes instruct the printer to
perform specific functions, such as underlining text, printing subscripts,
setting page margins, etc. The main difference between most printer
protocols is in the characters used to create control codes and the ways in
which these characters are formatted.
When the printer executes the character and control codes of a particular
printer protocol, it is “emulating” that printer. For example, if the printer uses
the Proprinter III XL protocol, it is emulating an IBM Proprinter III XL printer; if
the printer is using the Epson FX-1050 printer protocol, it is in Epson FX-1050
emulation mode. As used in this manual, “protocol” and “emulation” mean the
same thing.
24
Chapter 1 Printer Overview
Line Matrix Printing
Your printer is an impact printer; it creates characters by printing ink dots on
paper. The dots are printed on an invisible matrix mapped in printer memory
(see Figure 2). Dot impressions are made by an array of steel hammers
mounted on a rapidly oscillating shuttle. The hammers strike the paper
through a moving ink ribbon.
Figure 2. Dot Matrix Character Formation
Serial matrix printers use a moving printhead with pins to form single
characters sequentially along the printed line. Unlike serial matrix printers, the
P5000LJ printer is a line matrix printer. Line matrix printers divide every
printable line into horizontal dot rows, then print a dot row of the entire line at
every lateral sweep of the shuttle.
During each sweep, hammers are activated to print dots at the required
positions in the dot row. When the shuttle reaches the end of a sweep, it
reverses direction, the paper advances one dot row, and the hammers print
the next row of dots as the shuttle sweeps in the opposite direction, as shown
in Figure 3.
After a line of characters is printed, the paper advances to the first dot row of
the next print line. This creates a number of blank rows between lines of
characters, depending on the print mode and line spacing you selected.
Dot Column
Dot Row
Character Row
Character Column
Matrix visible only to
the printer
Ink dots formed by
hammer tips.
Printing Speed
25
Figure 3. Dot Matrix Line Printing
Printing Speed
The speed at which text prints is measured in lines per minute (lpm). This
speed is directly proportional to the number of dot rows required to produce a
character line, regardless of the number of characters in the line. More dot
rows are required to print lowercase characters with descenders;
consequently, those character lines print at a fractionally lower rate.
The printer also prints dot-addressable graphic images. The speed at which
graphics are plotted is measured in inches per minute (ipm). Unidirectional
plotting produces slightly better print quality and takes about twice as long as
bidirectional plotting. You can select either plotting mode from the control
panel.
Printing and plotting rates also vary according to the print mode you select.
Print mode refers to the way you instruct the printer to create characters. If,
for example, you select standard quality (data processing) mode, the printer
uses more dot rows to form characters than if you choose Sparse (high
speed) mode. Character formation and print speed are faster in Sparse mode,
because the printer prints fewer dot rows to form characters. Vertical dot
density is a factor in printing speed.
Nominal printing rates are charted in Appendix A.
Dot
Row Start
Paper
Feed
Number of rows is determined by line spacing.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
n
1
2
*
**
This row is used only for lowercase descenders.
This row is used for underlining and lowercase descenders.
*
**
One
Text
Line
Direction of Shuttle Movement
Direction
26
Chapter 1 Network Interface Card (NIC)
Network Interface Card (NIC)
Network Interface Card (NIC) allows you to attach printers on a local area
network (LAN) rather than attaching them directly to a host system. Following
simple configuration steps, these peripherals can be simultaneously shared
with users on the network whether you are using TCP/IP, NetBIOS over TCP/
IP, or IPX (Novell ).
NIC contains a network interface card to attach itself and the printer to the
network. This Ethernet™ 10/100Base-T interface connector is what allows the
printer to communicate with the network, and the interface itself has a number
of options, status indicators, and switches which are described in “NIC” on
page 27.
What Special Features Are Available?
NIC offers an extensive list of features including:
•built-in HTML forms for easy cross-platform configuration
•availability of printer manager software
•a detailed and easy-to-use command shell built in to the firmware
•multi-level configuration security through passwords, permission levels,
and access lists
•Wide Area Network (WAN) communication access
•numerous printer logging methods (e.g., automatic email) to record
printer errors and usage
•remote management through HTML forms, Telnet sessions, rsh/
rcmd/remsh commands, SNMP, and pre-defined log methods
•extensive built-in troubleshooting tools
•built-in telnet and ping clients
•configurable memory usage by disabling protocols and destination
services
•multiple destinations/queues for versatile printer manipulation and distinct
print setups
•header and trailer strings to instruct printers on font, pitch, printing, etc.
•flexible naming conventions
•automatic network connection and frame type sensing
•simultaneous printing across all I/O ports and all supported protocols
•multiple network protocol support
NIC
27
NIC
The NIC at the rear of the printer has two indicator lights and two dipswitches,
as shown in Figure 4.
Figure 4. Status Indicator Lights and Dipswitches
Run and Auto Reset Modes
Run Mode is the normal operating state of NIC. Auto Reset mode is entered
when the watchdog timer is triggered and the Print Server resets itself. In
either mode, the STAT LED flashes at a varying rate, depending on whether
the unit IP address is configured. The Run Mode and Auto Reset Mode
indicator descriptions are given in Table 2.
Table 2. Indicator Modes
STAT Indication Description
OFF flashes on once per second Normal Mode, IP address
configured
OFF flashes on twice per second IP address not configured
ON flashes off once per second Download (MOS)
ON flashes off twice per second Error
STAT (System Status)
NET (Data to Network)
12Shown in OFF
(default) position
Dipswitches
28
Chapter 1 Network Interface Card (NIC)
Network Indicator
The NET LED displays the status of the network link. When the NET LED is
on, link integrity is confirmed. The NET LED flashes off for 1/3 second when a
data packet is being transferred. When the NET LED is off, the network
connection has been severed.
Dipswitches
On the back of the interface, you will find a small window where you can
access two dipswitches labeled 1 and 2 (see Figure 4). The functions of the
dipswitches are explained in Table 3.
Table 3. Dipswitch Functions
Dipswitch Comments
12
OFF OFF Normal operation. With both dipswitches in the OFF
position, the NIC boots up using the settings in flash
memory rather than the default settings.
ON OFF Factory default settings. With the dipswitches in this
configuration, the NIC boots up and erases all settings
stored in flash memory except the Ethernet address
and key value.
OFF ON Default IP. With the dipswitches in this configuration,
the NIC boots up with factory default settings.
However, the stored settings in flash memory are
intact. Setting dipswitch 2 to ON does not clear any
settings stored in flash memory; instead, it boots the
unit with the IP settings in flash memory temporarily
ignored.
ON ON Reserved. This dipswitch setting is not for customer
use.
29
2Downloading Function
Code In P5000LJ Series
Printers
Introduction
Downloading the function code is equivalent to updating firmware in the
printer. This chapter explains how to load function code into P5000LJ printers.
You must download function code when:
•you require upgraded firmware for maintenance or other reasons;
•the CMX controller board is replaced;
•the flash memory SIMM is replaced;
•the NIC is installed or replaced;
•you need different emulation software or buy the VGL or PGL graphics
option after the printer is installed.
Downloading In A Nutshell
Updating the function code in a P5000LJ printer consists of three tasks:
1. Obtaining the appropriate download file and loading it into the PC or
laptop you will use to download the code into the printer.
2. Obtaining the appropriate interface cable if necessary.
3. Printing all saved configurations in the printer, making the function code
upgrade, and restoring your saved printer configurations.
30
Chapter 2 Introduction
Preparation For Downloading
There are several function code files available for the P5000LJ printers. The
file you use depends on the printer emulation in use.
To verify what function code is already installed, observe the control panel
display when the printer is online. If a configuration printout is available, the
function code file version is printed at the top of the configuration printout on
the line that begins “Program File Version.” For example, if the line is
“Program File Version (2.07P Part No. 356351), the number “356351” is the
function code download file active at the time the configuration printout was
generated.
You can download function code from a networked PC or laptop computer
which contains the function code. If the printer has the NIC installed, the
function code must be updated via the network to successfully update the NIC
firmware. Loading function code via the network is done using the Printronix
Remote Management (RMS) software available on the PrintNet Enterprise
CD or using the file transfer protocol (ftp) procedure.
Note Always upgrade the function code to the latest version available that meets
the minimum flash memory and DRAM SIMM sizes listed in Table 4.
Preparation For Downloading
31
Copying Function Code To Your Computer
In order to download function code to a printer if using a serial or parallel port,
the function code file must reside in a PC or laptop computer running any of
the following operating systems: MS-DOS®, PC-DOS™, or DOS session on
Windows 95/98, Windows NT or Windows 2000.
Note that the downloaded file, xxxxxx.exe, is a compressed executable file.
Leave the file as it is. Do not try to execute the file.
Table 4. P5000LJ Series Printers Function Code Chart
Description Control Panel Displays:
(Emulation in Use)
Download
File (as
shipped)
Download
Method
Minimum
Flash/DRAM
Required
If Serial or Parallel Connected
Printers using
PCL-II emulation
ONLINE-PARL / PCL II* (or)
ONLINE-PARL / LP PLUS*
xxxxxx.exe
(Note 2)
Parallel or
Serial Port
4 MB Flash
4 MB DRAM
Printers using
VGL emulation
ONLINE-PARL / PCL II / VGL* xxxxxx.exe
(Note 2)
Parallel or
Serial Port
4 MB Flash
4 MB DRAM
Printers using
PGL emulation
ONLINE-PARL/LP PLUS/PGL* xxxxxx.exe
(Note 2)
Parallel or
Serial Port
4 MB Flash
4 MB DRAM
If Network Connected
Printers using
PCL-II emulation
ONLINE-ETHERNET / PCL II (or)
ONLINE-ETHERNET / LP+
xxxxxx.exe
(Note 2)
Via Network
(Note 1)
4 MB Flash
4 MB DRAM
Printers using
VGL emulation
ONLINE-ETHERNET / LP+ (or)
ONLINE-E-NET / CODE V / PCL
xxxxxx.exe
(Note 2)
Via Network
(Note 1)
4 MB Flash
4 MB DRAM
Printers using
PGL emulation
ONLINE-ETHERNET/PGL/LP+ (or)
ONLINE-ETHERNET/PCL-II
xxxxxx.exe
(Note 2)
Via Network
(Note 1)
4 MB Flash
4 MB DRAM
NOTES
* ONLINE - SERL / PCL II or ONLINE - SERL / LP PLUS if serial port is the selected host interface
1 If the internal network card is not installed or was removed, download via the parallel or serial port. If the printer
Function Code is downloaded with the NIC removed, or a NIC card is added to the printer after downloading, the
Ethernet port will not function with RMS. In this case, do the following:
1. Press the up/down/right/left arrow keys simultaneously. Printer displays “FACTORY / Printer Management.”
2. Press the down arrow key. Printer displays “Diagnostic Port.”
3. Press the down arrow key. Printer displays “Debug Serial.”
4. Press the right arrow key. Printer displays “Debug Ethernet.”
5. Press ENTER. Printer displays “Debug Ethernet*.” Press ONLINE to exit.
2 Check with Technical Support, (Customer Service Center) to confirm the latest available Function Code
download file.
32
Chapter 2 Loading Function Code To Flash Memory In The Printer
Loading Function Code To Flash Memory In The Printer
This section contains two loading techniques:
•How to load function code through the parallel or serial port of the printer.
•How to load function code through the Ethernet port using the file transfer
protocol (ftp).
Installing Printer Emulations
Printer emulation software is stored in flash memory. Flash memory is
contained in single in-line memory modules (SIMMs) located on the controller
board. Printer emulation and operating system software are loaded into flash
memory at the factory, but you will install software in some situations:
•A printer software upgrade is installed
•The printer controller board has been replaced
•The flash memory SIMM has been replaced
Emulation and operating system software are stored on a CD. You will copy
the appropriate file to your computer’s hard disk, then download that file to the
printer.You can load software through the serial, parallel, or Ethernet NIC port
of the printer:
Note If Ethernet is installed, you must install the code through the Ethernet port
using ftp.
Note Each printer type, line matrix, laser, and thermal has its own CD with the
specific file types for that printer. Be sure to use the appropriate CD for
your printer type when downloading software.
Note When downloading emulation and operating system software to the
printer, all other optional font files, customer-supplied logos, setup files,
and TIFF files will be erased. You will then need to reload those files.
Before starting a download procedure, be sure that you have all the
necessary files on hand.
Downloading Software Through the Serial or Parallel Port
33
•Serial or Parallel Port: If you are going to load memory through the
serial or parallel port of the printer, see “Downloading Software Through
the Serial or Parallel Port” on page 33.. The load commands are different,
depending on the printer port you use. These differences are explained in
the note following step 22., page 36.
•NIC: If the printer has the NIC installed, see “Downloading Software
Through the Network Interface Card (NIC)” on page 37.
•Font Files: If you need to load optional font files, see “Downloading
Optional Font Files to Flash Memory” on page 39.
Downloading Software Through the Serial
or Parallel Port
1. Make a printout of all saved configurations. (Installing new software
erases all saved configurations. You will use the printouts to restore the
printer configurations.)
2. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
3. If the printer is already connected to the serial or parallel port of an
IBM-compatible computer running the PC-DOS™ or MS-DOS operating
system, go to step 9. If not, go to step 4.
4. Unplug the AC power cord from the printer.
5. Disconnect all data input cables from the printer interfaces.
6. Connect a parallel data cable to the LPT1 port or a serial data cable to the
COM1 port of an IBM-compatible computer running the PC-DOS or
MS-DOS operating system.
7. Connect the data cable to the appropriate I/O port of the printer.
8. Plug the AC power cord into the printer.
9. On the printer control panel, press and hold down the ONLINE + PAPER
ADVANCE keys. Without releasing the keys, power the printer on.
Continue holding down the keys.
10. When you see “TESTING HARDWARE PLEASE WAIT” on the LCD,
release the keys.
11. Wait until you see “WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD” on the LCD
before proceeding. This can take up to 30 seconds to appear, depending
on the emulations and interfaces installed in the printer.
12. Press the ⇒ (NEXT) key. “SELECT DOWNLOAD
PORT=CENTRONICS” appears on the LCD.
Note You can connect the cable to the LPT2 port if the LPT1 port is already in
use. The load commands are different if you use this port, as described in
the note after step 22.
34
Chapter 2 Installing Printer Emulations
13. Press ⇒ (NEXT) again to cycle through the download ports available in
the printer:
RS232-9600 (RS-232 serial, 9600 baud)
RS232-19.2K (RS-232 serial, 19200 baud)
RS232-38.4K (RS-232 serial, 38400 baud)
RS232-115K (RS-232 serial, 115000 baud)
RS422-9600 (RS-422 serial, 9600 baud)
RS422-19.2 (RS-422 serial, 19200 baud)
RS422-38.4K (RS-422 serial, 38400 baud)
RS422-115K (RS-422 serial, 115000 baud)
DEBUG
14. When the printer download port you want to use is displayed on the LCD,
press the ENTER key. “WAITING DOWNLOAD / PORT = <your
selection>” appears on the display.
15. Using Windows Explorer, create a directory named download at the root
level of your C: hard drive.
16. Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer.
Figure 5. Navigating to the Appropriate Emulation File on the CD
Note The default port is CENTRONICS; this is the standard load through the
parallel port. If you want to use the default, continue at step 14.
Downloading Software Through the Serial or Parallel Port
35
17. Using Windows Explorer, navigate to the appropriate file on the CD based
on the printer model number and desired emulation, e.g., T5000IGP.
(See Figure 5.)
18. Make note of the file name, which is a six digit number plus .exe,
e.g., 123456.exe.
This is the file you will download into the printer.
Figure 6. Copying the Emulation File to the Download Directory
19. Copy the file to the download directory.
20. Start a command prompt session. (The Start Menu icon is usually labeled
MS-DOS Prompt or Command Prompt.)
21. At the command prompt type:
C:<Enter>
cd \download<Enter>
Note You may need to hold Ctrl to make sure a + appears to the right of the
pointer. (See Figure 6.)
36
Chapter 2 Installing Printer Emulations
22. At the command prompt on the computer type:
filename.exe -pb<Enter>
where filename.exe is the file name you noted in step 18. This command
decompresses the file on the hard drive and copies it as a binary file into
the flash memory on the printer controller board.
While the file is copied into memory, the printer LCD informs you of the
load process and status.
23. When the new program has successfully loaded into memory and the
printer has reset itself, set the printer power switch to O (Off).
24. Unplug the AC power cord from the printer.
25. Remove the CD from the host computer and store it with the printer.
26. Power off the computer.
27. If you had to install a data cable to the computer and printer in step 6.,
disconnect it from the computer and printer.
28. If required, reconnect the data input cable(s) to the printer.
Using the configuration printout(s) you made in step 1., reconfigure the printer
and reload any optional font files.
Note If you are loading the file using the LPT2 port on the computer, enter the
following command:
filename.exe -pb2 <Enter>
The 9600 baud rate is the only selection older versions of MS-DOS can
use. The baud rate information entered in the following commands must
match the selection you made in step 13.
If you are loading the file through the printer serial port, enter the following
commands:
mode COM1:9600,N,8,1,P<Enter>
filename.exe -pbc1<Enter>
Caution Do not interrupt the downloading process once it has started.
Interrupting a download will damage the flash memory on the
controller board and the NIC.
Downloading Software Through the Network Interface Card (NIC)
37
Downloading Software Through the
Network Interface Card (NIC)
1. Make a printout of all saved configurations. (Installing new software
erases all saved configurations. You will use the printouts to restore the
printer configurations.)
2. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
3. On the printer control panel, press and hold down the ONLINE + PAPER
ADVANCE keys. Without releasing the keys, power the printer on.
Continue holding the keys down.
4. When you see “TESTING HARDWARE PLEASE WAIT” on the LCD,
release the keys.
5. Wait until you see “WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD” on the LCD
before proceeding. This can take up to 30 seconds to appear, depending
on the emulations and interfaces installed in the printer.
6. Using Windows Explorer, create a directory named download at the root
level of your C: hard drive.
7. Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer.
Figure 7. Navigating to the Appropriate Emulation File on the CD
8. Using Windows Explorer, navigate to the appropriate file on the CD (using
the Unzipped directory) based on the printer model number and desired
emulation, e.g., UnzippedT5000IGP. (See Figure 7.)
38
Chapter 2 Installing Printer Emulations
9. Make note of the file name, which is a six digit number plus .prg,
e.g., 123456.prg.
This is the file you will download into the NIC.
10. Copy the file to the download directory.
11. Start a command prompt session. (The Start Menu icon is usually labeled
MS-DOS Prompt or Command Prompt.)
12. At the command prompt type:
C:<Enter>
cd \download<Enter>
13. Start the FTP protocol by typing:
ftp xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx<Enter>
(where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx represents the IP Address of the printer.)
14. Log in to the printer by typing:
root<Enter>
You are given a password prompt.
15. At the password prompt, press <Enter>.
16. Once logged in, type the following sequence at the command prompt to
download the filename.prg file to the printer:
cd dest<Enter>
cd d1prn<Enter>
bin<Enter>
put filename.prg<Enter>
(where filename.prg is the file name you noted in step 9.)
17. As the file downloads, the FTP program shows the progress as a
percentage. Once the download is complete, exit out of the FTP program
by typing:
quit<Enter>
Note You must use the Unzipped directory, since this contains the
uncompressed files necessary for NIC download.
Note The default is no password. If the FTP program requires a password,
contact your system administrator.
Caution Do not interrupt the downloading process once it has started.
Interrupting a download will damage the flash memory on the
controller board and the NIC.
Downloading Optional Font Files to Flash Memory
39
18. When the new program has successfully loaded into flash memory and
the printer has reset itself, set the printer power switch to O (off).
19. Unplug the AC power cord from the printer.
20. Remove the CD from the host computer and store it with the printer.
21. Using the configuration printout(s), reconfigure the printer and reload any
optional font files.
Downloading Optional Font Files to Flash Memory
Optional font files are stored on a 3.5 inch floppy diskette that contains file
names comprised of a part number with a .dwn extension. You will insert the
diskette in your IBM-compatible computer and use either the parallel or serial
port to download the desired font file(s) to the printer’s flash memory.
1. Set the printer power switch to O (off).
2. Connect a parallel data cable to the LPT1 port or a serial cable to the
COM1 port of an IBM-compatible computer running the PC-DOS or
MS-DOS operating system.
3. Verify that the data cable is connected to the appropriate I/O port on the
printer and to the host computer.
4. Power on the computer and allow it to boot up.
5. On the printer control panel, press and hold down the ONLINE + PAPER
ADVANCE keys while powering the printer on. Continue holding the keys
down.
6. When you see “WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD” on the LCD,
release the keys.
7. Press the ⇒ (NEXT) key; “SELECT DOWNLOAD PORT =
CENTRONICS” appears on the LCD.
Note You can connect the cable to the LPT2 port on the computer if the LPT1
port is already in use. The load commands are different if you use this port,
as described in the notes after step 15.
Note The printer default port is CENTRONICS; if you want to use this port,
continue to step 15.
40
Chapter 2 Installing Printer Emulations
8. Press the ⇒ (NEXT) key again to cycle through the download ports
available in the printer:
RS232-9600 (RS-232 serial, 9600 baud)
RS232-9600 (RS-232 serial, 19200 baud)
RS232-9600 (RS-232 serial, 38400 baud)
RS232-9600 (RS-232 serial, 115000 baud)
RS422-9600 (RS422 serial, 9600 baud)
RS422-9600 (RS422 serial, 19200 baud)
RS422-9600 (RS422 serial, 38400 baud)
RS422-9600 (RS422 serial, 115000 baud)
DEBUG
9. When the printer download port you want to use is displayed on the LCD,
press the ENTER key. “WAITING DOWNLOAD / PORT” = <your
selection> appears on the display.
10. Insert the optional font diskette into diskette drive A (or B) of the
computer.
11. Start a command prompt session. (The Start Menu icon is usually labeled
MS-DOS Prompt or Command Prompt.)
12. Make the diskette drive the active drive by typing:
A:<Enter> (if the diskette is in drive B, type B:<Enter>)
13. List the contents of the diskette at the command prompt by typing the
following:
dir<Enter>
You will see a directory listing containing files with a .dwn extension, e.g.,
94021.dwn, 94022.dwn, 94023.dwn.
14. Make note of the file name with the .dwn extension of each file you want
to download to the printer.
15. At the command prompt type:
copy /b filename.dwn LPT1<Enter>
(where filename.dwn is file name you noted in step 14.)
Note The numeric portion of the file name will match the numbers of the font
typefaces listed in Appendix E of the PGL and VGL Programmer’s
Reference Manuals and provide you with a description and print sample of
the typeface.
Downloading Optional Font Files to Flash Memory
41
The 9600 baud rate is the only selection older versions of MS-DOS can
use. The baud rate information entered in the above commands must
match the selection you made in step 8.
You can download the optional font files one at a time by entering one file
name per the copy command or you can copy multiple files in one copy
command.
To download one file at a time, enter the following at the command
prompt:
copy /b filename.dwn LPT1<Enter>
To download multiple files, enter the following at the command prompt,
for example:
copy /b filename1.dwn+filename2.dwn+...LPT1<Enter>
16. While the font file is copied into flash memory, the printer LCD informs
you of the load process and status. When the new file is successfully
loaded into memory, the printer will reset itself and go online.
17. To verify that the optional fonts have been downloaded:
a. Perform a configuration printout.
— OR —
b. Select MAINT/MISCFile SystemsView Files List. The new file
names will appear with the same part number file name you
downloaded, but with an .sf extension.
Note If you are loading the file using the LPT2 port on the computer, type the
following command:
copy /b filename.dwn LPT2<Enter>
(where filename.dwn is a file you noted in step 14.)
If you are loading the file using the serial port on the computer,
type the following commands:
mode COM1:9600,N,8,1,P<Enter>
copy /b filename.dwn COM1<Enter>
(where filename.dwn is a file you noted in step 14.)
Note The optional font typefaces cannot be selected via the printer control
panel. They can only be selected via a software command from the host.
Note Press the ONLINE key to place the printer online and return the printer to
normal operation.
42
Chapter 2 Installing Printer Emulations
Table 5. Flash Memory Message Guide
Message Explanation Required Action
CLEARING PROGRAM
FROM FLASH The program successfully
loaded into printer RAM and
the checksum matched. The
old program is now being
deleted from flash memory.
None
DIAGNOSTIC PASSED The printer passed its
memory and hardware
initialization tests.
None
ERROR: DC PROGRAM
NOT VALID Printer cannot find the data
controller program or the
validation checksum is
corrupt.
1. Download the program
again.
2. If the message occurs
again, replace the flash
memory.
ERROR: DRAM AT
ADDRESS XXXXXXXX The printer found a defective
memory location. Replace the DRAM.
ERROR: EC PROGRAM
NOT VALID Printer cannot find the engine
controller program or the
validation checksum is
corrupt.
1. Download the program
again.
2. If the message occurs
again, replace the flash
memory.
ERROR: EC STOPPED AT
STATE XXXX Hardware fault in the engine
controller. Replace the CMX controller
board.
ERROR: FLASH DID NOT
PROGRAM The printer could not find any
flash memory. 1. Download the program
again.
2. If the message occurs
again, replace the flash
memory.
ERROR: FLASH NOT
DETECTED The printer could not find any
flash memory. Install flash memory before
attempting to download this
program.
ERROR: NO DRAM
DETECTED The printer could not find any
DRAM. Check DRAM on CMX. If
present, reseat DRAM, If
missing, install DRAM.
ERROR: NVRAM FAILURE The non-volatile memory has
failed. Replace the CMX controller
board. (Do NOT attempt to
replace NVRAM.)
ERROR: PROGRAM NEEDS
MORE DRAM The printer requires more
DRAM memory in order to run
the downloaded program.
Add DRAM or use a smaller
emulation program.
Downloading Optional Font Files to Flash Memory
43
ERROR: PROGRAM NEEDS
MORE FLASH The printer requires more
flash memory in order to run
the downloaded program.
Add flash memory or use a
smaller emulation program.
ERROR: PROGRAM NOT
COMPATIBLE The printer is not compatible
with the downloaded
program.
Use the correct emulation
software option(s) for this
model.
ERROR: PROGRAM NOT
VALID The printer does not see a
program in flash memory. There is no program in printer
memory. Download the
program again.
ERROR: SECURITY PAL
NOT DETECTED The security PAL is not
present or has failed. Check the security PAL at
location U54 on the CMX
controller. If the PAL is
absent, install correct PAL. If
security PAL is present,
replace the CMX controller
board.
ERROR: SHORT AT
ADDRESS XXXX Hardware failure in DRAM or
CMX controller circuitry. Replace DRAM. If message
occurs with new DRAM,
replace CMX controller board.
ERROR: WRITING TO
FLASH Hardware or software fault in
flash memory. 1. Download the program
again.
2. If the message occurs
again, replace the flash
memory.
ERROR: WRONG
CHECKSUM The printer received the
complete program but the
checksum did not match. The
data were corrupted during
download.
Download the program again.
ERROR OCCURRED
FLUSHING QUEUES * An interim message that
displays while the printer
discards host data it cannot
use because a fault condition
exists. While this message
displays, the asterisk (*)
rotates.
Wait. When the asterisk (*)
stops rotating, a different fault
message will appear:
troubleshoot the final
message.
LOADING PROGRAM FROM
PORT XX%The new program is loading
into printer RAM. XX
indicates how much of the
program has loaded.
None
Table 5. Flash Memory Message Guide (continued)
Message Explanation Required Action
44
Chapter 2 Installing Printer Emulations
LOADING PROGRAM INTO
FLASH The printer has deleted the
previous program from flash
memory and is loading the
new program into flash
memory.
None
PLEASE WAIT...RESET IN
PROGRESS The printer finished loading
the program into flash
memory and is automatically
resetting itself.
None
RESTORING BOOT CODE Normal download initialization
message. None
SECURITY CODE
VIOLATION The software running or being
downloaded does not match
the security PAL code.
Install the correct PAL or
program. (PAL and program
must match.)
SENDING PROGRAM TO
EC PROCESSOR The printer is loading the
engine controller program into
the engine controller.
None
TABLE MISMATCH
DOWNLOAD AGAIN EC software update in
process. Download the program again.
Table 5. Flash Memory Message Guide (continued)
Message Explanation Required Action
45
3Configuring The Printer
Overview
This chapter is a tutorial that explains how to configure the P5000LJ printer
and the NIC.
Configuring The Printer
In order to print data, the printer must respond correctly to signals and
commands received from the host computer. Configuration is the process of
matching the printer's operating characteristics to those of the host computer
and to specific tasks, such as printing labels, or printing on different sizes of
paper.
The characteristics that define the printer's response to signals and
commands received from the host computer are called configuration
parameters.
A configuration consists of all the parameters under the Active Emulation,
Emulation, Maint/Misc., Host Interface, Printer Control, and Diagnostics
menus. Chapter 4 describes the configuration submenus and their
parameters in more detail.
You configure the printer by pressing keys on the control panel (Figure 8) or
by sending control codes from the host computer. This chapter explains how
to change parameters and save, print, and load configurations with the control
panel. All of the keys are described in detail in the P5000LJ Series Printers
Quick Reference Guide which is shipped with each printer.
Note Configuration directly affects printer operation. Do not change the
configuration of your printer until you are thoroughly familiar with the
procedures in this chapter.
46
Chapter 3 Configuring The Printer
Figure 8. The Control Panels
DOWN
PREV
UP
SET TOF
ENTER
FF VIEW
CLEAR
ON LINE
NEXT
SHIFT
LF
Message Display Status Indicator
Cabinet Model
Message Display Status Indicator
Pedestal Model
Set
TOF
L.P.I.
Adj
Up Down
Clear
Next
Shift
Prev Enter
Page
L Adj
FF ViewOn Line LF
Primary Keys
Secondary Keys
(Raise the printer cover
to access these keys.)
L.P.I. ADJ
PAGE L ADJ
47
Figure 9. Configuration Menu Overview
OFFLINE
CONFIG.
CONTROL
page 77
ACTIVE
EMULATION1
page 79
EMULATION
page 80
MAINT/MISC
page 114
HOST
INTERFACE
page 115
Load Config.
Save Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up Config.
Protect Configs.
PCL-II*
LP PLUS
IGP/PGL & LP+
IGP/VGL & LP+
PCL-II*
LP PLUS2
IGP/PGL & LP+3
IGP/VGL & LP+3
Hex Dump Mode
Power-up State
Display Language
Power Stacker3
Bi-Tronics*
Centronics
Serial
Ethernet3
Auto Switching
ETHERNET
PARAMS3
page 125
PRINTER
CONTROL
page 127
IP Address
Gateway Address
Subnet Mask
MAC Address
Novell Protocol
NetBIOS Protocol
Novell Frame
PPM Port Number
PPM Port Timeout
Ethernet Speed
Unidirectional
PMD Fault
Slow Paper Slew
Power Saver Time
1 Choices available are limited to the emulations
installed on the printer.
2 Appears only if LP Plus is the active emulation.
3 Appears only if installed.
DIAGNOSTICS
page 129 RIBBON
MINDER
page 132
Printer Tests
Test Width
Paper Out Dots
System Memory
Print Statistics
New Ribbon
Ribbon Action
Ribbon Size
Ribbon Adjust
Fault Action
To view options, press: Down
Up
Next
Prev
To select an option, press ENTER.
To return to main menu, press
CLEAR.
To exit menu, press ON LINE.
* = Default Setting
48
Chapter 3 Configuring The Printer
Operating Modes
The printer has two operating modes: online and offline. When the printer is
online, it is controlled by the host computer and prints data sent by the host
computer. When the printer is offline, communication with the host is
interrupted so you can load paper, change ribbons, or test and configure the
printer.
Activate configuration settings with the ENTER key, which enters your new
setting into printer memory. An asterisk (*) after a displayed setting shows it is
entered into memory.
If pressing ENTER to select a parameter produces no result, press DOWN to
move to the next lower level. For example, if you press ENTER while
CONFIG. CONTROL/ Print Config. displays, nothing will happen because
another level exists below this selection. Press DOWN and the “Current”
option displays. To cycle through the choices (Current, Factory, Power-Up,
etc.), press the NEXT or PREV keys. Press ENTER and the selected
configuration will print.
The Configurations
A configuration consists of a group of parameters, such as line spacing, forms
length, etc. Your printer contains the following configurations:
•The factory default configuration. It can be loaded, but cannot be altered.
All of the parameters and their values are listed on page 50.
•Eight configurations that you can customize for unique print job
requirements. Creating customized configurations is explained on
page 54.
Locking And Unlocking The ENTER Key
To make configuration changes, you must unlock the ENTER key. With the
printer offline, raise the printer cover and press the UP and DOWN keys
simultaneously. The LCD will show this message for about a second:
When you lock the ENTER key, your configuration settings are fixed and
cannot be altered. (Locking secures your settings.)
With the printer offline, raise the printer cover and press the UP and DOWN
keys simultaneously to lock the ENTER key. The LCD will briefly show this
message:
ENTER SWITCH
UNLOCKED
ENTER SWITCH
LOCKED
Changing And Saving Parameter Settings
49
Changing And Saving Parameter Settings
You can change a parameter setting, such as line spacing or forms length, by
pressing keys on the control panel or by sending emulation control codes in
the host data stream.
When you change a parameter, it is active as long as the printer is on. This is
true whether you used the control panel or sent a control code from the host.
If you use the control panel, you can save the parameters as a customized
configuration. A configuration consists of a group of parameters. A saved
configuration will not be lost if you turn off the printer.
You can change a parameter with a control code, but to save the parameter
setting you must use the control panel.
Control codes override control panel parameters. For example, if you set the
line spacing to 6 lpi with the control panel, and application software later
changes this to 8 lpi with a control code, the control code setting overrides the
control panel setting.
The 8 lpi parameter is effective as long as the printer is on. If you turn off the
printer, the 8 lpi parameter will be erased. To save the parameter, you must
use the control panel and save it as a configuration.
You can save up to eight configurations.
Changing parameters is described on page 54, and saving configurations is
described on page 56.
50
Chapter 3 Configuring The Printer
Factory Default Configuration Values
The factory default values are permanently stored in memory as a
configuration and cannot be modified or erased. The configuration values for
the Bi-Tronics parallel interface and NIC interface are displayed on the
following pages.
Bi-Tronics Parallel Interface
ACTIVE EMULATION PCL-II
PCL-II Primary Char. set
ID 0
Symbol Set Roman-8 [8U]
Pitch 10.00
Density Data Processing
Second Char. set
ID 0
Symbol Set Roman-8 [8U]
Pitch 10.00
Density Data Processing
Page Length Rep. Inches/Page
Max. Line Width 13.2 inches
Face, CPI Delay Enable
Graphics Density 60 DPI
Perforation Skip Disable
Display Functns Disable
Line Terminator
LF After CR Disable
CR After LF Disable
CR after FF Disable
CR After VT Enable
PTX Linefeed Disable
LPI Adjust 6 LPI
Page L./Lines 66 Lines
Page L./Inches 11.0 Inches
Config. Print
Symbol Set Print
Reset Cmd CFG Ld Power Up Config
LP PLUS
Printer Protocol
P-Series
Control Code 06 8.0 LPI
Control Code 08 Elongated
Define CR Code CR = CR
Auto LF Disable
Overstrike Enable
Define LF code LF = CR + LF
Select SFCC 1
EVFU Select Enable
Alt. Set 80-9F Control Code
Character Set
IBM PC
Primary Subset ASCII (USA)
Extended Subset Code Page 437
SFCC d command Even dot plot
CPI/LPI Select
Select CPI 10.0 CPI
Select LPI 6.0 LPI
Factory Default Configuration Values
51
Font Attributes
Typeface Data Processing
Prop. Spacing Disable
Bold Print Disable
Italic Print Disable
Slashed Zero Disable
Page Format
Form Length
Abs. Length IN 11.0 inches
Abs. Length MM 279.4 mm
Funct. of lines 66 lines
Form Width
Abs. Width IN 13.6 inches
Abs. Width MM 345.4 mm
Function of CPI 136 characters
Margins
Left Margin 0 columns
Right Margin 0 columns
Bottom Margin 0 lines
Perforation Skip Disable
MAINT / MISC
Hex Dump Mode Disable
Power-up State Online
Display Language English
Power Stacker Enable
HOST INTERFACE
Bi-Tronics
Prime Signal Disable
TOF Action Reset
Buffer Size in K 1
PRINTER CONTROL
Unidirectional Disable
PMD Fault Enable
Slow Paper Slew Disable
Power Saver Time 15 min
DIAGNOSTICS
Printer Tests Shift Recycle
Test Width Full Width
Paper Out Dots 40 dots
System Memory x Megabytes
Print Statistics
On: x.x Hrs
Print: x.x Hrs
Print Strokes x
Print Lines x
11 inch Pages x
RIBBONMINDER
New Ribbon
Ribbon Action Disable
Ribbon Size 60 yards
Ribbon Adjust 0
Fault Action New Ribbon
52
Chapter 3 Configuring The Printer
NIC Interface
ACTIVE EMULATION PCL-II
PCL-II Primary Char. set
ID 0
Symbol Set Roman-8 [8U]
Pitch 10.00
Density Data Processing
Second Char. set
ID 0
Symbol Set Roman-8 [8U]
Pitch 10.00
Density Data Processing
Page Length Rep. Inches/Page
Max. Line Width 13.2 inches
Face, CPI Delay Enable
Graphics Density 60 DPI
Perforation Skip Disable
Display Functns Disable
Line Terminator
LF After CR Disable
CR After LF Disable
CR after FF Disable
CR After VT Enable
PTX Linefeed Disable
LPI Adjust 6 LPI
Page L./Lines 66 Lines
Page L./Inches 11.0 Inches
Config. Print
Symbol Set Print
Reset Cmd CFG Ld Power Up Config
LP PLUS
Printer Protocol
P-Series
Control Code 06 8.0 LPI
Control Code 08 Elongated
Define CR Code CR = CR
Auto LF Disable
Overstrike Enable
Define LF code LF = CR + LF
Select SFCC 1
EVFU Select Enable
Alt. Set 80-9F Control Code
Character Set
IBM PC
Primary Subset ASCII (USA)
Extended Subset Code Page 437
SFCC d command Even dot plot
CPI/LPI Select
Select CPI 10.0 CPI
Select LPI 6.0 LPI
Font Attributes
Typeface Data Processing
Prop. Spacing Disable
Bold Print Disable
Italic Print Disable
Slashed Zero Disable
Factory Default Configuration Values
53
Page Format
Form Length
Abs. Length IN 11.0 inches
Abs. Length MM 279.4 mm
Funct. of lines 66 lines
Form Width
Abs. Width IN 13.6 inches
Abs. Width MM 345.4 mm
Function of CPI 136 characters
Margins
Left Margin 0 columns
Right Margin 0 columns
Bottom Margin 0 lines
Perforation Skip Disable
MAINT / MISC
Hex Dump Mode Disable
Power-up State Online
Display Language English
Power Stacker Enable
HOST INTERFACE
Ethernet
Buffer Size in K 1
ETHERNET PARAMS
IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Gateway Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Subnet Mask xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
MAC Address hhhhhhhhhhhh
Novell Protocol Disable
NetBIOS Protocol Disable
Novell Frame Ethernet 802.2
PPM Port Number 3001
PPM Port Timeout 100 seconds
Ethernet Speed Auto Select
PRINTER CONTROL
Unidirectional Disable
PMD Fault Enable
Slow Paper Slew Disable
Power Saver Time 15 min
DIAGNOSTICS
Printer Tests Shift Recycle
Test Width Full Width
Paper Out Dots 40 dots
System Memory x Megabytes
Print Statistics
On: x.x Hrs
Print: x.x Hrs
Print Strokes x
Print Lines x
11 inch Pages x
RIBBONMINDER
New Ribbon
Ribbon Action Disable
Ribbon Size 60 yards
Ribbon Adjust 0
Fault Action New Ribbon
54
Chapter 3 Changing Parameters
Changing Parameters
A configuration consists of several parameters. The factory configuration is
PCL-II emulation using the Bi-Tronics interface. You can keep this
configuration to print your jobs, or if your print job requires a different setting
such as a serial interface, follow the procedure outlined in Table 6.
Example
The example below describes how to change the Unidirectional parameter
from disable to enable. Use this example as a basic guideline to move
throughout the configuration menu and change other parameters.
Figure 9 on page 47 shows the top level of the configuration menu. The
submenus are shown in Chapter 4.
If the configuration has already been changed and you do not know what the
current configuration is, print a copy (page 58). Then decide if you must
change any parameters.
Note Once you change active emulations, any changes to the previously
selected emulation will be gone unless they have been saved.
Table 6. Parameter Change Example Procedure
Step Key Result Notes
1. Make sure the printer is on. Raise the printer cover (on cabinet models).
2.
. . .
OFFLINE
CONFIG.
CONTROL PRINTER
CONTROL
Unidirectional PMD Fault Slow Paper
Slew
Power Saver
Time
Disable*
Enable Enable*
Disable
Disable*
Enable
15* - 60 Min.
Instant
* = Factory Default
ON LINE OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
Example
55
3. Allows you to make configuration
changes.
4.
5.
6.
7. Cycle through the choices.
8. An asterisk (*) indicates this
choice is active.
TO SAVE YOUR CHANGES AS A CONFIGURATION THAT IS STORED IN MEMORY:
1.
2.
3. Go to the CONFIG. CONTROL submenu Save Config. option, as described on
page 57.
TO USE THE CURRENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT SAVING:
1.
2.
3. On cabinet models, close the printer cover. The printer is ready for operation. All
parameters are effective as long as the printer is on. When you turn off the printer, the
parameters will be erased from memory.
Table 6. Parameter Change Example Procedure (continued)
Step Key Result Notes
+ENTER SWITCH
UNLOCKED
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
UNTIL OFFLINE
PRINTER CONTROL
PRINTER CONTROL
Unidirectional
Unidirectional
Disable*
OR Unidirectional
Enable
ENTER Unidirectional
Enable*
UNTIL OFFLINE
PRINTER CONTROL
UNTIL OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
+ENTER SWITCH
LOCKED
ON LINE ONLINE
56
Chapter 3 Changing Parameters
Saving Your New Configuration
A configuration must be saved in order to load it later. You can save up to
eight configurations to meet different print job requirements. For example:
Config 1: Selects Standard density, 10 CPI, 6 LPI, 11-inch forms
Config 2: Selects Sparse density, 10 CPI, 8 LPI, 8-inch forms
The configurations are saved and stored in memory; they will not be lost if you
power off the printer. Later, you can load one of the configurations for a
specific print job. This eliminates the need to change settings (LPI, forms
length, etc.) for each new job. See page 60 for information about loading
configurations. You may want to print your configurations (page 58) and store
them in a safe place, such as inside the printer cabinet.
If you are going to change and save parameters for both the PCL-II and
LinePrinter Plus emulations, remember to save the changes for the PCL-II
emulation before you select LP Plus as the active emulation (page 79) or vice
versa. Once you change active emulations, any changes to the previously
selected emulation will be erased unless they have been saved.
If you do not save your configuration before you turn off the printer, all of the
new parameters will be erased. When you turn the printer on again, the
power-up configuration will load. If no configurations have been designated as
the power-up configuration, the factory configuration will load.
If the Protect Configs. parameter is enabled, the new configuration will not be
saved unless the existing configuration has been deleted. See page 66 for
details.
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Load Config. Save Config. Print Config. Delete Config. Power-Up
Config.
Protect
Configs.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
* = Factory Default
Saving Your New Configuration
57
Table 7. Saving Configurations
Step Key Result Notes
1. Make sure the printer is on. Raise the printer cover (on cabinet models).
2.
3. Allows you to make configuration
changes.
4.
5.
6.
7. Press until the desired number
(1-8) displays.
NOTE: Do not turn off the printer while save is in progress because you might lose your
configuration.
8. The configuration is now saved in
memory. (In this case, config. 2.)
9.
NOTE: It is recommended you print the configuration (see page 59 for the procedure). If you
decide not to print the configuration, then continue with the following steps.
10. Locks the ENTER key.
11.
12. Close the printer cover. The printer is ready for operation.
ON LINE OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
+ENTER SWITCH
UNLOCKED
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
CONFIG. CONTROL
Load Config.
UNTIL CONFIG. CONTROL
Save Config.
Save Config.
1*
OR Save Config.
2
ENTER Save Config.
2*
UNTIL CONFIG. CONTROL
Save Config.
+ENTER SWITCH
LOCKED
ON LINE ONLINE
58
Chapter 3 Changing Parameters
Printing The Current Configuration
The configuration printout lists the stored parameters. You can print any or all
of the configurations shown above. Configurations 1-8 are the customized
configurations.
To print a configuration, follow the procedure in Table 8.
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Load Config. Save Config. Print Config. Delete Config. Power-Up
Config.
Protect
Configs.
Current*
Factory
Power-Up
All
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
* = Factory Default
Note It is recommended that you print all of the configurations and store them in
a safe place, such as inside the printer cabinet, for future reference.
Printing The Current Configuration
59
Table 8. Printing Configurations
Step Key Result Notes
1. Make sure the printer is on. Raise the printer cover (on cabinet models).
2.
3. Allows you to make configuration
changes.
4.
5.
6.
7. Press until the desired option
displays.
8. The configuration listing begins
printing.
9. Carefully tear off the configuration printout.
10. Locks the ENTER key.
11.
12. Close the printer cover. Store the printout in a safe place. The printer is ready for
operation.
ON LINE OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
+ENTER SWITCH
UNLOCKED
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
CONFIG. CONTROL
Load Config.
UNTIL CONFIG. CONTROL
Print Config.
Print Config.
Current*
OR Print Config.
All
ENTER OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
+ENTER SWITCH
LOCKED
ON LINE ONLINE
60
Chapter 3 Changing Parameters
Loading Configuration Values
You can load any of the eight customized configurations or the factory default
configuration, Configuration 0. Its list of parameters begins on page 50.
The loaded configuration remains active as long as the printer is on. If you
power off the printer, the power-up configuration will load when power is
turned back on. Any of the eight customized configurations can be designated
as the power-up configuration.
The procedure in Table 10 explains how to select the power-up configuration.
If you do not set a power-up configuration, the factory default configuration
will load if you power the printer off and then power it back on.
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Load Config. Save Config. Print Config. Delete Config. Power-Up
Config.
Protect
Configs.
0*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
* = Factory Default
Note A configuration must be saved first in order to load it.
Loading Configuration Values
61
Table 9. Loading Configurations
Step Key Result Notes
1. Make sure the printer is on. Raise the printer cover (on cabinet models).
2.
3. Allows you to make configuration
changes.
4.
5.
6. Press until the desired number
(1-8) displays.
7. Displays for about a second.
The printer has loaded the
configuration.
8. Locks the ENTER key.
9.
10. Close the printer cover. The printer is ready for operation.
ON LINE OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
+ENTER SWITCH
UNLOCKED
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
CONFIG. CONTROL
Load Config.
Load Config.
1*
OR Load Config.
4
ENTER Loading Saved
Configuration
Load Config.
4*
+ENTER SWITCH
LOCKED
ON LINE ONLINE
62
Chapter 3 Changing Parameters
The Power-Up Configuration
When you power on the printer for the first time, it loads configuration 0 which
is the factory default configuration.
If you save a configuration, such as configuration 1, and turn the power off
and then back on, the printer will load the designated power-up configuration,
not the last saved configuration.
For your convenience, you can specify which configuration (0-8) should be
the power-up configuration.
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Load Config. Save Config. Print Config. Delete Config. Power-Up
Config.
Protect
Configs.
0*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
* = Factory Default
The Power-Up Configuration
63
Table 10. Setting The Power-Up Configuration
Step Key Result Notes
1. Make sure the printer is on. Raise the printer cover (on cabinet models).
2.
3. Allows you to make configuration
changes.
4.
5.
6.
7. Press until the desired number
(1-8) displays.
8. The printer has selected the
desired configuration.
9. Locks the ENTER key.
10.
11. Close the printer cover. The printer is ready for operation.
ON LINE OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
+ENTER SWITCH
UNLOCKED
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
CONFIG. CONTROL
Load Config.
UNTIL CONFIG. CONTROL
Power-Up Config.
Power-Up Config.
0*
OR Power-Up Config.
6
ENTER Power-Up Config.
6*
+ENTER SWITCH
LOCKED
ON LINE ONLINE
64
Chapter 3 Changing Parameters
Deleting Configurations
You can delete any of your customized configurations. You cannot, however,
delete the configuration 0, which is the factory preset configuration.
The Protect Configs. parameter must be set to disable before you may delete
a configuration (see page 66).
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Load Config. Save Config. Print Config. Delete Config. Power-Up
Config.
Protect
Configs.
1*
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
* = Factory Default
Deleting Configurations
65
Table 11. Deleting Configurations
Step Key Result Notes
1. Make sure the printer is on. Raise the printer cover (on cabinet models).
2.
3. Allows you to make configuration
changes.
4.
5.
6.
7. Press until the desired number
(1-8) displays.
8. The printer has deleted the
selected configuration.
9. Locks the ENTER key.
10.
11. Close the printer cover. The printer is ready for operation.
ON LINE OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
+ENTER SWITCH
UNLOCKED
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
CONFIG. CONTROL
Load Config.
UNTIL CONFIG. CONTROL
Delete Config.
Delete Config.
1*
OR Delete Config.
3
ENTER Deleting Configuration
Delete Config.
3*
+ENTER SWITCH
LOCKED
ON LINE ONLINE
66
Chapter 3 Changing Parameters
Protecting Your Configurations
To save or delete a configuration you must set the Protect Configs. option to
disable.
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Load Config. Save Config. Print Config. Delete Config. Power-Up
Config.
Protect
Configs.
Disable*
Enable
* = Factory Default
Connecting To The Network
67
Configuring NIC
Connecting To The Network
To attach the NIC to a network, plug the network cable into the NIC connector
(see Figure 10).
Watch the LEDs in the rear of the printer as they cycle through the power on
self-test. When the test is complete, the STAT led will flash.
Figure 10. Physical Setup
Configuration Setup
There are two parts to a NIC setup:
1. Configuring the NIC so it can be seen on the network. This involves
network related settings (e.g., an IP address within TCP/IP environments)
configured through the built-in command shell, npsh, or from the control
panel.
2. Configuring a host with a new printer so it knows how to send data to the
NIC. Just being able to see the printer on the network does not mean you
can automatically print to it. A host has to be told where to send the data.
Network Connector
A
68
Chapter 3 Configuring NIC
Configuration Using The Printer Control Panel
NIC settings can be set from the printer control panel. The procedure is
described below.
You can set any of three listed parameters from the printer control panel.
These parameters are located in the ETHERNET PARAMS menu. The
available parameters are:
•IP Address
•Gateway Address
•Subnet Mask
The procedure for changing any of the parameters is the same. The
procedure for changing the IP Address is given here as an example. Use the
same procedure for the other required parameters.
To change the IP Address parameter:
1. Make sure the printer is on and raise the printer cover.
2. Press the ON LINE key to place the printer in the OFFLINE mode.
3. Unlock the ENTER key. (For instructions, refer to “Locking And Unlocking
The ENTER Key” on page 48.)
4. Press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key until the LCD displays “ETHERNET
PARAMS.”
5. Press the DOWN arrow key to access the “IP Address” parameter.
6. Press the DOWN arrow key to view the current IP Address.
7. Press the DOWN arrow key to access the portion of the IP Address to be
changed.
8. Press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key to select the portion of the IP
Address to be changed.
Note Some network environments do not require any network settings to be
configured on the NIC. However, all network setups require configuration
on the host end.
Note When the printer is first powered on, the messages “Waiting for the
Ethernet Adapter” and “Ethernet Detected” will display on the LCD. After
several other boot messages appear, the LCD will display the message
“E-NET INIT.” This initialization process will take about two minutes.
During that time, you will not be able to change any printer settings from
the control panel. If you attempt to do so, the message “Please Wait
E-NET INIT.” will appear. When the initialization is complete, the message
“E-NET READY” will display, and you may then change any NIC or other
printer configuration options from the control panel.
Configuration Alternatives
69
9. Press the DOWN arrow key.
10. Press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key to select the desired value.
11. Press the ENTER key to make the selection. An asterisk appears to the
right of the value.
12. Press the UP arrow key and you will be returned to step 8. When you are
finished changing parameters, exit the configuration menus and lock the
ENTER key. (For instructions, refer to “Locking And Unlocking The
ENTER Key” on page 48.)
Configuration Alternatives
Besides the HTML forms and software provided, the NIC internal command
shell, npsh, can also be reached using the following methods.
The Printronix Printer Manager (PPM)
The PPM utility is a versatile and dynamic program. It allows you to remotely
organize all the printers in your office in a single database; download software
and printer settings from a host computer with a single mouse click; and use a
virtual operator's panel to configure printers in the same room or on the other
side of the world.
Telnet
A TCP/IP command that helps configure NIC settings remotely. A TCP/IP
host starts a Telnet session with the print server and logs in to the device
command shell to alter and view settings.
Example:
telnet 192.75.11.9
Caution When a change is made from the control panel, the NIC is re-
initialized. The messages “E-NET RESET” and “E-NET INIT” display
on the control panel. This process takes several minutes. Make sure
not to shut the printer off or make further changes to the NIC settings
during this initialization period to prevent a loss of NIC configuration
information. When the initialization is complete, the message
“E-NET READY” will display.
70
Chapter 3 Configuring NIC
Remote Shell
A TCP/IP command that helps configure print server settings remotely. A
TCP/IP host uses this command to remotely execute a single command on
the NIC.
Example:
rsh spike list prn
This command remotely executes the npsh command list prn on the NIC
named
spike
.
Configuration Using a Web Browser
NIC settings can be configured over TCP/IP through a standard Web browser.
The NIC Web pages provide a handy way to access some of the commands
built into the print server. You can access online help for all HTML pages.
To access the NIC home page:
1. Make sure the print server has an IP address and subnet mask so it is
recognizable on your TCP/IP network.
2. Make sure your network station can successfully ping the NIC over the
network.
3. Direct your Web browser to the Uniform Resource Locator (URL)
http://IPaddress (e.g., http://192.75.11.9). You will be
able to determine the exact state of the printer from the printer status
screen, as the shown in Figure 11.
Note If a router is used, make sure a gateway value is configured.
Configuration Alternatives
71
Figure 11. WWW Printer Status Screen
72
Chapter 3 Configuring NIC
73
4The Configuration Menus
Overview
Once you have familiarized yourself with the configuration process using the
tutorial information in Chapter 3, you are ready to complete your configuration
of the printer.
This chapter provides descriptions for each parameter provided by the
configuration menus. Figure 12 shows the configuration main menu and its
first level parameters. The remainder of this chapter includes illustrations of
many additional submenus and parameters nested beneath each of the main
menu options.
74
Chapter 4 Configuration Main Menu
Configuration Main Menu
Figure 12. Configuration Main Menu
OFFLINE
CONFIG.
CONTROL
(see page 77)
ACTIVE
EMULATION1
(see page 79)
EMULATION
(see page 80) MAINT/MISC
(see page 114)
Load Config.
0* - 8
Save Config.
1* - 8
Print Config.
Current*
Factory
Power-Up
All
1 - 8
Delete Config.
1* - 8
Power-Up Config.
0* - 8
Protect Configs.
Disable*
Enable
PCL-II*
LP PLUS
IGP/PGL & LP+
IGP/VGL (CODE-V) & LP+
PCL-II*
LP PLUS
IGP/PGL & LP+
IGP/VGL (CODE-V) & LP+
Hex Dump Mode
Disable*
Enable
Power-up State
Online*
Offline
Display Language
English*
Italian
French
German
Spanish
Power Stacker2
Enable*
Disable
NOTES:
1 Choices available are limited to the emulations
configured with the printer.
2 Appears only if the power stacker option is installed.
Continued on
the next page
To view options, press:
Down
Up
Next
Prev
To select an option, press ENTER.
To return to main menu, press
CLEAR.
To exit menu, press ON LINE.
* = Default Setting
75
Figure 12. Configuration Main Menu (continued)
HOST
INTERFACE
(see page 115)
ETHERNET
PARAMS
(see page 125)
Bi-Tronics*
Prime Signal
Disable*
Enable
TOF Action
Reset*
Do Nothing
Buffer Size in K
1* (1-16)
Centronics
Data Bit 8
Enable*
Disable
PI Ignored
Enable*
Disable
Data Polarity
Standard*
Inverted
Resp. Polarity
Standard*
Inverted
Busy on Strobe
Enable*
Disable
Latch Data On
Leading*
Trailing
Prime Signal
Disable*
Enable
TOF Action
Reset*
Do Nothing
Buffer Size in K
1* (1-16)
Serial
Interface Type
RS-232*
RS-422
Data Protocol
XON / XOFF*
ETX / ACK
ACK / NAK
DTR
Baud Rate
9600*
19200
38400
600
1200
2400
4800
Word Length
8*
7
DIAGNOSTICS
(see page 129)
Printer Tests
Shift Recycle*
All E’s
E’s + TOF
All H’s
All Underlines
All Black
Shuttle Slow
Shuttle Fast
Shuttle Only
Phase Printer
217* (500 lpm)
123* (1000 lpm)
62* (1500 lpm)
(1 to 2000)
Paperout Adj.
Burnin Test
Print Error Log
Clear Error Log
E-Net Test Page
Test Width
Full Width*
80 col.
Paper Out Dots
40 dots*
(4-76 dots)
System Memory
x Megabytes
Print Statistics
On: x.x Hrs.
Print: x.x Hrs.
Print Strokes
Print Lines
11 inch Pages
Serial (cont.)
Stop Bits
1*
2
Parity
None*
Odd
Even
Mark
Sense
Data Term Ready
True*
On-Line and BNF
Off-Line or BF
False
Request to Send
On-Line and BNF*
Off-Line or BF
False
True
Buffer Size in K
1* (1-16)
Ethernet
Buffer Size in K
16* (1-16)
Auto Switching
Parallel Hotport
Port Type
Bi-Tronics*
Centronics
Ethernet
Disable
Trickle Time
1/4*
(1/4-16 sec.)
Off
Timeout
10 sec.*
(1-60 sec.)
Report Status
Disable*
Enable
Serial Hotport
Port Type
RS-232*
RS-422
Disable
Trickle Time
1/4*
(1/4-16 sec.)
Off
Timeout
10 sec.*
(1-60 sec.)
Report Status
Disable*
Enable
PRINTER
CONTROL
(see page 127)
Unidirectional
Disable*
Enable
PMD Fault
Enable*
Disable
Open Platen @BOF
Disable*
Enable
Slow Paper Slew
Disable*
Enable
Power Saver Time
15 min.*
(5 sec.-60 min.)
Disable
Instant
RIBBON
MINDER
(see page 132)
New Ribbon
Ribbon Action
Disable*
Display
Fault
Ribbon Size
60 yards*
(1-255)
Ribbon Adjust
0%*
(-99% to 99%)
Fault Action
New Ribbon*
Do Nothing
To view options, press:
Down
Up
Next
Prev
To select an option, press ENTER.
To return to main menu, press
CLEAR.
To exit menu, press ON LINE.
* = Default Setting
IP Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Gateway Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Subnet Mask
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
MAC Address
hhhhhhhhhhhh
Novell Protocol
Enable*
Disable
NetBIOS Protocol
Enable*
Disable
Novell Frame
Ethernet 802.2*
802.2 Snap
Auto Sensing
Ethernet II
Ethernet 802.3
PPM Port Number
3001*
(0-65535)
PPM Port Timeout
32 Seconds*
(1-255)
Ethernet Speed
Auto Select*
10 Half Duplex
10 Full Duplex
100 Half Duplex
100 Full Duplex
76
Chapter 4 Configuration Main Menu
The first-level configuration menu options are briefly described below:
•CONFIG. CONTROL. Allows you to save, print, load, and delete entire
sets of configuration parameters. These options are described briefly in
this chapter and covered in detail in Chapter 3.
•ACTIVE EMULATION. Allows you to select either Hewlett-Packard's
Printer Control Language (PCL-II) or LP Plus.
•If you select PCL-II, you can select the optional IGP®/PGL® or
IGP/VGL (Code V) emulations, if installed.
•If you select LP Plus, you can select Epson FX, Proprinter XL, or
P-Series.
•EMULATION. If PCL-II is the active emulation, PCL-II will display and you
can select its parameters for configuration.
•If the optional IGP/PGL or Code V emulations are installed, you can
access their configuration parameters.
•If LP Plus is the active emulation, Epson FX, Proprinter XL, and
P-Series configuration parameters are available.
•MAINT / MISC. Provides miscellaneous functions, such as printing a hex
dump, selecting a display language, and choosing whether the printer will
power up offline or online.
•HOST INTERFACE. Allows you to select the printer interface depending
on what type of interface cabling you installed while setting up your
printer. In addition to selecting an active interface, this menu also allows
you to configure several parameters for each interface.
•ETHERNET PARAMS. Allows you to view and change the IP Address,
Gateway Address, and Subnet Mask. The MAC Address may also be
viewed. In addition, Novell and Printer Manager options can be set.
•PRINTER CONTROL. Allows you to select several operating parameters
for the printer, such as the speed at which paper will advance when FF
(Form Feed) is pressed.
•DIAGNOSTICS. Includes the printer's diagnostic tests, system memory,
and print statistics.
•RIBBONMINDER. Allows you to enable the RibbonMinder™ feature and
set its parameters.
77
Config. Control Menu
The CONFIG. CONTROL menu manages configurations, which are
groupings of parameter values that can be stored in printer memory. Brief
descriptions follow for each option.
Load Config.
The printer can store up to eight unique configurations in memory. This
parameter allows you to select and load a specific configuration.
Configuration 0 is the factory default, and its parameters cannot be changed.
It is always available for loading. See page 60 for a detailed description and
sample procedure.
CONFIG.
CONTROL
Load Config. Save Config. Print Config. Delete Config. Power-up
Config.
Protect
Configs.
0*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1*
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Current*
Factory
Power-up
All
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1*
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Disable*
Enable
To view options, press:
Down
Up
Next
Prev
To select an option, press ENTER.
To return to main menu, press
CLEAR.
To exit menu, press ON LINE.
* = Default Setting
78
Chapter 4 Config. Control Menu
Save Config.
This option allows you to save up to eight unique configurations to meet
different print job requirements, which eliminates the need to change the
parameter settings for each new job.
The configurations are stored in memory. They will not be lost if you turn off
the printer. Configuration 0 is a factory-preset configuration, which cannot be
changed or saved. See page 56 for a detailed description and sample
procedure.
Print Config.
Allows you to print a listing of stored printer configurations. It is recommended
you store the configurations in a safe place for quick referral, such as inside
the printer, if you have a cabinet model. See page 58 for a detailed
description and sample procedure.
Delete Config.
Allows you to delete one or all of your eight customized configurations.
Configuration 0 is a factory-preset configuration and cannot be changed or
deleted.
Power-Up Config.
Allows you to specify which of the nine configurations (0-8) will be the power-
up configuration. The factory default for power-up is configuration 0. See page
62 for a detailed description and sample procedure.
Protect Configs.
Allows you to specify whether or not a new configuration should overwrite an
existing configuration when you activate the Save Config. parameter.
•Disable. The default. The new configuration will overwrite the existing
configuration.
•Enable. The new configuration will not overwrite the existing
configuration, and the message “CONFIG. EXISTS / Delete First”
displays. You must delete the existing configuration (1-8) before trying to
save the new configuration.
Note If the Protect Configs. parameter is enabled, the new configuration will not
be saved unless the existing configuration has been deleted.
79
Active Emulation Menu
The ACTIVE EMULATION menu determines what emulations are available.
•PCL-II. The default. The PCL-II emulation is active.
•LP PLUS. Allows you to select LinePrinter Plus as the active emulation. If
LP PLUS is the active emulation, you can select Epson, Proprinter III XL,
or P-Series as the printer protocol (see page 86).
•IGP/PGL & LP+ and IGP/VGL (Code V) & LP+. The ACTIVE
EMULATION function also allows you to activate either the PGL or the
Code V emulation. There are two methods for selecting the desired
emulation. The first is by selecting the emulation directly from the printer
menu. The second is by sending a host command which will switch the
emulation automatically. See the appropriate Technical Reference
Manual for more information on these command codes.
When changing from one IGP emulation to the other, the printer will load
the power-up configuration. Thus, any setting performed before selecting
those emulations and not saved in flash memory will be lost.
For more information on IGP/PGL and Code V, see the appropriate
Technical Reference Manual.
ACTIVE
EMULATION
PCL-II* LP PLUS IGP/PGL &
LP+1IGP/VGL
(CODE-V) &
LP+1
Note To configure an IGP emulation, the IGP emulation must be selected in the
ACTIVE EMULATION menu. The IGP emulation that is not selected will
not appear in the EMULATION menu.
80
Chapter 4 Emulation Menu
Emulation Menu
The EMULATION menu is the gateway to configure the emulations available
with the P5000LJ printer. The control codes for each of these emulations are
described in their respective Technical Reference Manuals.
PCL-II Emulation
Hewlett-Packard's Printer Control Language that is compatible with Hewlett-
Packard systems.
LP Plus Emulations
•Epson FX. This LP Plus emulation is provided for compatibility with the
Epson FX-1050 printer control language.
•Proprinter XL. This LP Plus emulation is provided for compatibility with
the IBM Proprinter III XL printer control language.
•P-Series. This is the Printronix P-Series printer control language,
provided as part of LP Plus.
Optional Emulations
IGP/VGL (Code V) and IGP/PGL are optional graphics emulations. They can
be selected and configured only if you have purchased these options. PCL-II
must be the active emulation for Code V or IGP/PGL to operate.
EMULATION
PCL-II* LP PLUS IGP/PGL &
LP+1IGP/VGL
(CODE-V) &
LP+1
(see page 81) (see page 86) (see page 102) (see page 107)
To view options, press:
Down
Up
Next
Prev
To select an option, press ENTER.
To return to main menu, press
CLEAR.
To exit menu, press ON LINE.
* = Default Setting
1 = If installed
PCL-II Emulation
81
PCL-II Emulation
EMULATION
(from page 80)
Primary
Char. Set
Secondary
Char. Set
Graphics
Density
Display
Functns
LPI Adjust
Page L. /
Lines
Page L. /
Inches
Config. Print
ID
0* - 109, xx
Symbol Set
(see next page)
Pitch
10*, 12, 13.3
15, 16.67, 20
Density
Data Processing*
NLQ
OCR-A
OCR-B
High Speed
ID
0* - 109, xx
Symbol Set
(see next page)
Pitch
10*, 12, 13.3
15, 16.67, 20
Density
Data Processing*
NLQ
OCR-A
OCR-B
High Speed
60 dpi*
70 dpi
Disable*
Enable
6 lpi*
8 lpi
66*
(1-128) 11.0 inches*
(2-16 inches)
* = Factory Default
PCL-II
Line
Terminator
LF After CR
Disable*
Enable
CR After LF
Disable*
Enable
CR After FF
Disable*
Enable
CR After VT
Enable*
Disable
Symbol Set
Print
Max. Line
Width
13.2 inches*
13.6 inches
Face, CPI
Delay
Enable*
Disable
Page Length
Rep.
Inches/Page*
Lines/Page
Perforation
Skip
Disable*
Enable
Reset Cmd
CFG Ld
Power-up Config*
Current Config
Factory Config
Disable
PTX Linefeed
Disable*
Enable
82
Chapter 4 Emulation Menu
Primary Char. Set
You can select one of 92 pre-defined character sets by ID (although character
sets range from 0 - 109, not all sets are available on the LJ500 printer), or you
can select pitch, symbol set, and typeface individually. If the combination you
choose matches one of the 92 predefined sets, the ID submenu will reflect
that selection. If not, the ID menu will display xx to indicate that the current
character set does not match a pre-defined set. Set 0 is the default, and its
attributes are 10 cpi, Data Processing typeface, and Roman 8 symbol set.
Secondary Char. Set
Your printer can store an additional character set. To toggle between them,
send the Shift In (Decimal 15, to select the Primary character set) or Shift Out
(Decimal 14, to select the Secondary character set).
Primary
Char. set
(from previous
page)
Symbol Set
Roman-8[8U]*
Turkish-8[8T]
Arab-8[8V]
Cyrillic[8R]
PC858 MtLi[13U]
MC Text[12J]
Roman-9[4U]
Latin-9[9N]
Win3.0Lat-1[9U]
Japan Postnet
Katakana Post
ASCII[0U]
Math Sym[0A/0M]
LineDraw[0B/0L]
IS0 Den/Nor[0D]
Roman Ext.[0E]
IS0 UK[1E]
IS0 France[0F]
IS0 German[0G]
Hebrew[0H]
Japan ASCII[0K]
Katakana[1K]
Block Char[1L]
OCR-A[0O]
OCR-B[1O]
ISO Swe/Fin[0S]
ISO Spain[1S]
ISO Italian[0I]
ISO Portugu[4S]
Latin-1[0N]
Latin-2[2N]
Latin-5[5N]
Latin-6[6N]
Baltic[19L]
PC8 DanNor[11U]
PC8 Cd437[10U]
PC850 MtLi[12U]
PC851 LtGk[12G]
PC852 Lat2[17U]
PC Turkish[9T]
PC Hebrew[15H]
PC Lat/Ara[10V]
PC Cyrillic[3R]
Win3.1Lat1[19U]
Win3.1Lat-2[9E]
Win3.1Lat-5[5T]
Math-8[8M]
PS Math[5M]
Greek-7[12N]
Postnet4[15Y]
Postnet11.25
Greek-8[8G]
Hebrew-8[8H]
Katakana-8[8K]
DEC 256 Greek
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
Symbol Set
(identical to Primary
Character Set)
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
Secondary
Char. Set
(from previous
page)
PCL-II Emulation
83
Page Length Rep.
•Inches/Page. All page length calculations are based on the inches
displayed on the panel.
•Lines/Page. All changes in LPI or density will be changed accordingly.
The length of the page is the number of lines per inch, or lpi.
For example, if the form in use is 82 lines at 6 lpi, the page is physically
13.67 inches. Since 13.67 inches is not selectable from the Length in
Inches menu, change the representation to lines, then set the number of
lines to 82. The inches menu will display 13.6 inches although the printer
internally keeps the exact form length of 13.67 inches.
Max. Line Width
Set the maximum line width at 13.2 inches (the default) or 13.6 inches.
Face, CPI Delay
Allows the combination of different font densities on the same line.
•Enable. Different font densities can be used on the same line.
•Disable. Only the same font densities are allowed on the same line.
Graphics Density
Graphics can be printed in 60 DPI (the default) or 70 DPI.
Perforation Skip
•Disable. Allows printing on page perforation.
•Enable. You may set up a skip-over margin. For example, a skip-over
margin of one inch creates a one inch margin at the bottom of the page.
Display Functns
•Disable. The default. Control characters are not printed.
•Enable. Control characters are printed before they get executed. This is a
useful debugging tool.
Line Terminator
You can specify what will be used to indicate the end of a line. Four options
are available: LF after CR, CR after LF, CR after FF, and CR after VT. Each of
these options may be enabled or disabled independent of one another.
84
Chapter 4 Emulation Menu
PTX Linefeed
•Disable. The default. Linefeed is to be performed as calculated from the
bottom of the graphics or barcode, thereby disrupting the vertical text
alignment.
•Enable. The Linefeed moves to the next line as calculated from the Top
of Form position, thereby retaining vertical text alignment. When printing
graphics or bar codes, you may want to set the PTX Linefeed parameter
to Enable to maintain text alignment.
LPI Adjust
This parameter lets you specify the lines per inch (lpi) values: 6 LPI (the
default) or 8 LPI.
Page L. /Lines
This parameter lets you set physical page length in lines from 12 to 96 at 6 lpi,
or 16 to 128 at 8 cpi. The default is 66 lines at 6 lpi.
Page L. /Inches
This parameter allows you to set physical page length from 2 to 16 inches, in
increments of half an inch. The default is 11 inches.
Config. Print
This option prints the emulation's parameters and the currently selected
values.
Linefeed
LINE 1
Linefeed
LINE 2
LINE 3
LINE 1
LINE 2
LINE 3
PTX Linefeed Enabled PTX Linefeed Disabled
Note If 6 lpi is selected, you will be able to scroll the menu to 128 (an invalid
length). However, when you press ENTER to select this value, the menu
will return with the maximum lines for 6 lpi (i.e., 96 lines). Similarly,
selecting too few lines for 8 lpi will cause the menu to return with 16 lines.
PCL-II Emulation
85
Symbol Set Print
This option prints a list of all the available sets. The character set number
prints to the left of the character set sample.
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
When the printer receives a host data stream reset command in addition to
resetting printer variables, the selected configuration will be loaded.
•Disable.
The printer ignores the reset command when it is received and continues
to use the currently loaded configuration.
•Power-Up Config.
The power-up configuration is loaded when the reset command is
received.
•Current Config.
If you have preset and presaved multiple configurations, then the
currently selected presaved configuration is loaded when the reset
command is received.
•Factory Config.
The factory installed configuration is loaded when the reset command is
received.
86
Chapter 4 Emulation Menu
LP Plus Emulation
EMULATION
(from page 80)
Printer
Protocol Print Char.
Set
Font
Attributes
Page
Format
Typeface
Data Processing*
NLQ
OCR-A
OCR-B
High Speed
NLQ Sans Serif
Prop. Spacing
Disable*
Enable
Bold Print
Disable*
Enable
Italic Print
Disable*
Forward Slant
Backward Slant
Slashed Zero
Disable*
Enable
LP PLUS
P-Series* Proprinter XL Epson FX
(see page 90) (see page 93) (see page 95)
CPI/LPI
Select
Select CPI
10.0 CPI*
12.0 CPI
15.0 CPI
17.1 CPI
20.0 CPI
Select LPI
6.0 LPI*
8.0 LPI
10.3 LPI
Margins Perforation
Skip
Form Length Form Width
Left Margin
0* columns
(0-369)
Right Margin
0* columns
(0-369)
Bottom Margin
0* lines
(0-451)
Disable*
1/2 inch
2/3 inch
5/6 inch
1 inch
Abs. Length IN
11.0* inches
(0.1-24)
Abs. Length MM
279.4* mm.
(0.1-609.6)
Funct. of Lines
66* lines
(1-192)
Abs. Width IN
13.6* inches
(0.1-13.6)
Abs. Width MM
345.4* mm.
(0.1-345.4)
Function of CPI
136* characters
(1-272)
Reset Cmd
CFG Ld
Disable*
Power-up config
Current config
Factory config
To view options, press:
Down
Up
Next
Prev
To select an option, press ENTER.
To return to main menu, press
CLEAR.
To exit menu, press ON LINE.
* = Default Setting
Serial Matrix
(see page 97)
P-Series XQ
(see page 100)
LP Plus Emulation
87
Printer Protocol
Select the LinePrinter+ protocol you wish to use. Refer to the PCL-II/
LinePrinter Plus Technical Reference Manual for more information.
Print Char. Set
When this selection is displayed and the ENTER key is pressed, the current
character set is printed.
CPI/LPI Select
This parameter lets you specify the characters per inch (cpi) value and lines
per inch (lpi) value.
Font Attributes
Typefaces
•Data Processing. A general purpose font printing out at 120 dpi
horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. The width of the font will vary with each
cpi.
•NLQ. A high quality font printing at 180 dpi horizontally and 96 dpi
vertically. This font has serifs, and the width of the font varies with the cpi.
•OCR-A / OCR-B. Optical character recognition fonts printing at 120 dpi
horizontally and 144 dpi vertically. Both fonts print only at 10 cpi.
•High Speed. A draft quality font printing at 120 dpi horizontally and 48 dpi
vertically. The width of the font varies with the cpi.
•NLQ Sans Serif. A high quality font printing at 180 dpi horizontally and 96
dpi vertically. This font prints without serifs. The width of the font varies
with the cpi.
Prop. Spacing
Each printed character is contained inside a character cell. The width of the
character cell includes the character and the space around the character.
•Disable. Each character cell is printed with the same width. Each column
in the printed text will line up.
•Enable. The width of each character cell varies with the width of the
character. For example, [i] takes less space to print than [m]. Using
proportional fonts generally increases the readability of printed
documents, giving text a typeset appearance.
88
Chapter 4 Emulation Menu
Bold Print
•Disable. Text is printed normally.
•Enable. Text is printed with a heavy line thickness.
Italic Print
•Disable. Text is printed normally.
•Forward Slant. Text is printed with a forward slant.
•Backward Slant. Text is printed with a backward slant.
Slashed Zero
This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.
This option applies to all character sets except OCR-A and OCR-B.
•Disable. Zero is printed without a slash.
•Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.
Page Format
Forms Length
Forms length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page. You can set
forms length in inches, millimeters (mm) or as a function of the current LPI
(lines per inch).
Forms Width
The forms width can be specified in inches, millimeters, or as a function of the
current CPI (characters per inch). The forms width set should not exceed the
actual paper width.
Margins
•Right Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far right
edge of the page, and column numbering increments from right to left.
•Left Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far left edge
of the page, and column numbering increments from left to right.
•Bottom Margin. Defined in lines, starting from line zero at the bottom of
the page and incrementing from the bottom up.
Perforation Skip
•Disable. Allows printing on page perforation.
•You may set up a skip-over margin of 1/2 inch, 2/3 inch, 5/6 inch, or 1
inch. For example, a skip-over margin of 1 inch allows a 1 inch margin at
the bottom of the page.
LP Plus Emulation
89
Reset Cmd CFG Ld
When the printer receives a host data stream reset command in addition to
resetting printer variables, the selected configuration will be loaded.
•Disable.
The printer ignores the reset command when it is received and continues
to use the currently loaded configuration.
•Power-Up Config.
The power-up configuration is loaded when the reset command is
received.
•Current Config.
If you have preset and presaved multiple configurations, then the
currently selected presaved configuration is loaded when the reset
command is received.
•Factory Config.
The factory installed configuration is loaded when the reset command is
received.
90
Chapter 4 Emulation Menu
P-Series Emulation
Printer
Protocol
(from page 86)
Control Code
06 Control Code
08
Define CR
Code
Auto LF Overstrike Define LF
Code
Select SFCC EVFU Select Alt. Set 80-9F Character
Set SFCC d
Command
8.0 LPI*
10.3 LPI
6.0 LPI
Elongated*
Backspace
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Disable*
Enable
Enable*
Disable
LF = CR + LF*
LF = LF
1*
(0-7F hex) Enable*
Disable
Control Code*
Printable
(see below) Even dot plot*
Double high
* = Factory Default
P-Series
IBM PC* Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Mult.
Primary Subset
ASCII (USA)*
French
German
English
Danish
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Japanese
French Canadian
Latin American
Danish II
Spanish II
Latin Am II
Extended Subset
Code Page 437*
Code Page 850
ASCII (USA)*
EBCDIC
Primary Subset
ASCII (USA)*
German
Swedish
Danish
Norwegian
Finnish
English
Dutch
French
Spanish
Italian
Turkish
Japanese
Extended Subset
Multinational*
Barcode 10 CPI
Mult. DP 10 CPI
Mult. DP 12 CPI
Mult. LQ 10 CPI
Greek DP 10 CPI
Greek DP 12 CPI
Greek LQ 10 CPI
Grap. DP 10 CPI
Grap. LQ 10 CPI
Sci. DP 10 CPI
Sci. DP 12 CPI
Sci. LQ 10 CPI
ASCII (USA)*
French
German
English
Norw./Danish
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Japanese
French Canadian
Dutch
Finnish
Swiss
OCR-A OCR-B
Latin 2 8859-2 Latin 2 852 Bulgarian
Character Set
(from above)
Latin-9
8859-15
Polish POL1 DEC 256
Greek
ELOT 928
Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek ABG Greek ELOT 927
Greek
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7 PC851
LtGk[12G]
Greek-7[12N] Greek-8[8G]
P-Series Emulation
91
Control Code 06
Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can
select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8, or 10.3 LPI.
Control Code 08
Control Code 08 defines the function of ASCII code hex 08 (BS). You can
define the code to output an elongated character or a backspace.
Define CR Code
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each
time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed
code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host
computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.
•CR = CR. Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
•CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.
Auto LF
This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
•Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
•Enable. Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is
received past the forms width.
Overstrike
This option enables you to print bold characters.
•Enable. Turns on bold print. When enabled, overstrike printing slows
down the printer.
•Disable. Turns off bold print.
Define LF Code
•LF = CR + LF. Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed
command. The next print position is print position 1 of the next line.
•LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The next print
position will be the current print position of the next line.
92
Chapter 4 Emulation Menu
Select SFCC
This parameter allows you to select which ASCII codes will function as the
Special Function Control Code (SFCC) command delimiter. P-Series codes
can use hex 00 through hex 7F. Options include the following:
•ESC (hex 1B)
•SOH (hex 01)
•ETX (hex 03)
•CIRCUMFLEX (hex 5E)—also called caret (^)
•TILDE (hex 7E)—(~)
EVFU Select
Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting.
•Enable. Enables the VFU and selects P-Series compatible Electronic
Vertical Format Unit (EVFU).
•Disable. Disables VFU processing.
Alt. Set 80-9F
Determines whether the printer processes ASCII codes hex 80 through hex
9F as control codes or as printable characters.
Character Set
Specifies a character set as shown in the character set menu. To use one of
these sets, choose the desired group heading (such as Multinational) and
press ENTER. Then choose the desired set within that group (such as
EBCDIC) and press ENTER. Both the group and the desired set name will
include an asterisk to indicate your selection.
SFCC d Command
•Even dot plot. This option interprets SFCC d Command as even dot plot.
•Double high. This option interprets SFCC d Command as double high.
Select this option for backward compatibility.
Note SOH, ETX and ESC are non-printables. The characters (^) and (~) are
printable. However, do not use them as printables in the host data stream if
either is chosen as a delimiter, because print errors will occur.
Proprinter XL Emulation
93
Proprinter XL Emulation
Define CR Code
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each
time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed
code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host
computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.
•CR = CR. Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
•CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
Printer
Protocol
(from page 86)
Define CR
Code Auto LF Define LF
Code
FF valid at
TOF Character
Set
Alt. Char Set 20 CPI
Condensed
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF Enable*
Disable
LF = LF*
LF = CR + LF
Enable*
Disable
Code Page 437*
Code Page 850
OCR-A
OCR-B
Latin 2 8859-2
Latin 2 852
Bulgarian
Latin-9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Multinational
ASCII (USA)*
EBCDIC
DEC 256 Greek
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
PC851 LtGk[12G]
Greek-7[12N]
Greek-8[8G]
Set 1*
Set 2
Enable*
Disable
* = Factory Default
Proprinter XL
94
Chapter 4 Emulation Menu
Auto LF
This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
•Enable. Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is
received past the forms width.
•Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
Define LF Code
•LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed
command is received. The next print position will be the current print
position of the next line.
•LF = CR + LF. Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed
command received. The next print position is print position 1 of the next
line.
FF Valid at TOF
•Enable. Performs a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed
command and the printer is at the top of form.
•Disable. Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed
command and the printer is at the top of form.
Character Set
Specifies a character set as shown in the menu. To use one of these sets,
choose the desired character set and press ENTER. The desired set will be
marked with an asterisk to indicate your selection.
Alt. Char Set
This option determines if data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F should
be interpreted as a control code or as a printable character.
•Set 1. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control
code.
•Set 2. Prints data for the characters at hex locations 03, 04, 05, 06, 15,
and 80 through 9F.
20 CPI Condensed
Condensed print characters are narrower than the normal character set. This
is helpful for applications for which you need to print the maximum amount of
information on a page.
•Enable. Prints characters about 60 percent the width of normal
characters when condensed print is chosen by the host computer.
•Disable. Does not condense print widths, even if condensed print is
chosen by the host.
Epson FX Emulation
95
Epson FX Emulation
Printer
Protocol
(from page 86)
Define CR
Code Auto LF Define LF
Code
Printer Select Character
Set
20 CPI
Condensed
Alt. Set 80-9F
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF Enable*
Disable
LF = LF*
LF = CR + LF
Disable*
Enable
Epson Set*
ASCII (USA)*
French
German
English
Danish I
Swedish
Italian
Spanish I
Japanese
Norwegian
Danish II
Spanish II
Latin Am I
French Canadian
Latin Am II
OCR-A
OCR-B
Latin 2 8859-2
Latin 2 852
Cyrillic 866
Bulgarian
Latin-9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Multinational
ASCII (USA)*
EBCDIC
DEC 256 Greek
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
PC851 LtGk[12G]
Greek-7[12N]
Greek-8[8G]
IBM PC
Enable*
Disable
Control Code*
Printable
* = Factory Default
Epson FX
96
Chapter 4 Emulation Menu
Define CR Code
The Define CR Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives
a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is
enabled, each time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an
additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this
feature if the host computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.
•CR = CR. Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
•CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
Auto LF
This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
•Enable. Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is
received past the forms width.
•Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
Define LF Code
The Define LF Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a
Line Feed code (hex 0A) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled,
each time the printer receives a Line Feed, it inserts an additional Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This feature is required if the host
computer does not send Carriage Returns to the printer.
•LF = LF. Does not add a Carriage Return with a Line Feed.
•LF = CR + LF. Adds an extra Carriage Return with each Line Feed.
Printer Select
•Disable. Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.
•Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and
enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.
Character Set
This parameter selects a character set for the Epson emulation, as shown in
the Character Set menu. Note that when OCR-A or OCR-B is selected as the
print language, the Font Attribute Typeface option under the LinePrinter Plus
menu (page 86) is changed to OCR-A or OCR-B, respectively.
20 CPI Condensed
Condensed print characters are narrower than the normal character set. This
is helpful for applications for which you need to print the maximum amount of
information on a page.
•Enable. Prints about 60 percent of the width of normal characters when
condensed print is chosen by the host computer. For example, a 12 CPI
Draft font will condense to 20 CPI.
•Disable. Does not condense print widths, even if condensed print is
chosen by the host.
Serial Matrix Emulation
97
Alt. Set 80-9F
•Control Code. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a
control code.
•Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.
Serial Matrix Emulation
Control Code 06
Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can
select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8, or 10.3 LPI.
Define CR Code
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each
time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed
code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host
computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.
•CR = CR. Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
•CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.
Printer
Protocol
(from page 86)
Control Code
06 Define CR
Code
Auto LF Overstrike Define LF
Code
Printer
Select
Alt. Set
80-9F Character
Set
Esc d
command
8.0 LPI*
10.3 LPI
6.0 LPI
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Enable*
Disable
Enable*
Disable
LF = LF*
LF = CR + LF
Disable*
Enable
Control Code*
Printable (see page 99) Even dot plot*
Double high
* = Factory Default
Serial
Matrix
98
Chapter 4 Emulation Menu
Auto LF
The Auto LF option defines the printer actions when print data is received past
the forms width setting.
•Enable. Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is
received past the forms width.
•Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
Overstrike
This option enables you to print bold characters.
•Enable. Turns on bold print. When enabled, overstrike printing slows
down the printer.
•Disable. Turns off bold print.
Define LF Code
•LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed
command is received. The next print position will be the current print
position of the next line.
•LF = CR + LF. Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed
command received. The next print position is print position 1 of the next
line.
Printer Select
•Disable. Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes.
•Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and
enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received.
Alt. Set 80-9F
•Control Code. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a
control code.
•Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F.
Character Set
Specifies a character set as shown in the “Serial Matrix Character Set Menu”
on page 99. To use one of these sets, choose the desired group heading
(such as European Sets) and press ENTER. Then choose the desired set
within that group (such as Roman 8) and press ENTER. Both the group and
the desired set name will include an asterisk to indicate your selection.
Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual.
ESC d Command
•Even dot plot. Interprets the ESC d command as even dot plot.
•Double high. Interprets the ESC d Command as double high. Select this
option for backward compatibility.
Serial Matrix Emulation
99
Serial Matrix Character Set Menu
* = Factory Default
IBM PC* Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Mult.
Primary Subset
ASCII (USA)*
French
German
English
Danish
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Japanese
French Canadian
Latin American
Danish II
Spanish II
Latin Am II
Extended Subset
Code Page 437*
Code Page 850
ASCII (USA)*
EBCDIC
Primary Subset
ASCII (USA)*
German
Swedish
Danish
Norwegian
Finnish
English
Dutch
French
Spanish
Italian
Turkish
Japanese
Extended Subset
Multinational*
Barcode 10 CPI
Mult. DP 10 CPI
Mult. DP 12 CPI
Mult. LQ 10 CPI
Greek DP 10 CPI
Greek DP 12 CPI
Greek LQ 10 CPI
Grap. DP 10 CPI
Grap. LQ 10 CPI
Sci. DP 10 CPI
Sci. DP 12 CPI
Sci. LQ 10 CPI
ASCII (USA)*
French
German
English
Norw./Danish
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Japanese
French Canadian
Dutch
Finnish
Swiss
OCR-A OCR-B Latin 2 8859-2
Bulgarian Latin-9
8859-15
Polish POL1 DEC 256
Greek
ELOT 928
Greek
Greek 3 ABY Greek ABG Greek
ELOT 927
Greek
Greek 437 Greek 8859-7
PC851
LtGk[12G]
Greek-7[12N] Greek-8[8G]
Character Set
(from page 97)
Latin 2 852
100
Chapter 4 Emulation Menu
P-Series XQ Emulation
Control Code 06
Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can
select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8, or 10.3 LPI.
Define CR Code
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each
time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed
code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host
computer sends Line Feeds to the printer.
•CR = CR. Does not insert an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
•CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra Line Feed after each Carriage Return.
The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.
Auto LF
This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the
forms width setting.
•Disable. Discards any data past the forms width.
•Enable. Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is
received past the forms width.
Printer
Protocol
(from page 86)
Control Code
06 Define CR
Code
Auto LF Define LF
Code Compressed
Print
Elong/Alt.
Font
HS Print EVFU Select Upr. Case
Select
Slew
Relative
6.0 LPI
8.0 LPI*
10.3 LPI
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Disable*
Enable
LF = CR + LF*
LF = LF
char 01 SOH*
char 03 ETX
char 09 HT
Elng=BS Font=SO*
Elng=SO Font=BS
char 02 STX*
char 03 ETX
char 09 HT
Enable*
Disable
Disable*
Enable
1 to 16 lines*
1 to 15 lines
* = Factory Default
P-Series
XQ
P-Series XQ Emulation
101
Define LF Code
•LF = CR + LF. Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed
command received. The next print position is print position 1 of the next
line.
•LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed
command is received. The next print position will be the current print
position of the next line.
Compressed Print
Controls which host command sets compressed printing.
•CHAR 01 SOH
•CHAR 03 ETX
•CHAR 09 HT
Elong/Alt. Font
Controls which host command sets elongated (double high) fonts and
extended character set.
•ELNG=BS (hex 08) FONT=SO (hex 0E)
•ELNG=SO FONT=BS
HS Print
Controls which host command sets high speed printing.
•CHAR 02 STX
•CHAR 03 ETX
•CHAR 09 HT
EVFU Select
Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting.
•Enable. Enables the VFU and selects P-Series compatible Electronic
Vertical Format Unit (EVFU).
•Disable. Disables VFU processing.
Upr. Case Select
Controls how the printer handles lowercase characters it receives from the
host computer. When enabled, all characters will be printed in uppercase.
•Disable. Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer as
lowercase, and uppercase characters received from the computer as
uppercase.
•Enable. Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer as
their corresponding uppercase equivalents; uppercase characters
received from the computer are printed as uppercase.
102
Chapter 4 Emulation Menu
Slew Relative
“Slewing” is rapid vertical paper movement. This parameter determines the
number of lines slewed (either 1-15 lines or 1-16 lines) when an EVFU Slew
Relative command is received.
IGP/PGL Emulation
The IGP/PGL emulation can be configured either through the printer’s front
panel or from the host computer with control codes. For a detailed description
of configuration with control codes, see the PGL Technical Reference
Manual. For information on configuring the emulation through the printer’s
front panel, see the submenu below and the parameter descriptions that
follow.
EMULATION
(from page 80)
Define CR
Code Define LF
Code
Autowrap Select SFCC PI Slew
Range
CR Edit
Select Font Select LPI Auto
Uppercase Skip Cmd
Prefix
Power on
IGP/PGL
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF LF = LF*
LF = CR + LF
Disable*
Enable
126*
(1-255)
16*
15
Disable*
Enable
0*
(1-31) 6.0*
8.0
9.0
10.0
Disable*
Enable
Enable*
Disable
Enable*
Disable
* = Factory Default
Ext Execute
Copy
UPC
Descenders
Ignore Char IGP100
Compatbl. Optimized
Ratio
Disable*
Enable
Enable*
Disable
Ignore Mode
Disable*
Enable
Select Char
0*
(0-255)
Disable*
Enable
Disable*
Enable
Compressed
CPI
Disable*
Enable
IGP/PGL &
LP+
Error Report
On*
Debug Mode
Fault
Off
IGP/PGL Emulation
103
Define CR Code (Carriage Return)
This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Line Feed code into
the data stream whenever a Carriage Return code occurs. This is to be used
only if the host computer does not send Line Feeds to the printer.
•CR = CR. Does not perform a line feed. The next print position will be
print position 1 of the current line.
•CR = CR + LF. Performs an automatic line feed. The next print position
will be print position 1 of the next line.
Define LF Code (Line Feed)
This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code
into the data stream whenever a Line Feed code occurs. This can be used in
most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send
Carriage Returns to the printer.
•LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The next print
position will be the current print position of the next line.
•LF = CR + LF. Performs an automatic carriage return. The next print
position will be print position 1 of the next line.
Autowrap
This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line when the line of
text exceeds the right margin.
•Disable. Truncates the text beyond the right margin until a CR or CR + LF
is received.
•Enable. Automatically inserts a CR + LF after a full print line.
Select SFCC
You can specify which decimal code (1-255) will be used as the Special
Function Control Code (SFCC). The factory default setting is 126. The SFCC
denotes that the following data is a PGL command.
PI Slew Range
You can specify how many lines the paper will feed.
•16. A paper slew of 0-15 will move 1-16 lines.
•15. A paper slew of 1-15 will move 1-15 lines. A paper slew of 0 will move
1 line.
CR Edit
This parameter determines if a carriage return will be followed by a line feed.
•Disable. The printer ignores all carriage returns that are not followed by
line feeds.
•Enable. The printer processes all carriage returns, even for those that are
not followed by line feeds.
104
Chapter 4 Emulation Menu
Select Font
This parameter allows you to select a font for the IGP/PGL feature. The
default is 0, which is U.S. ASCII. The following values are valid choices:
0 U.S. ASCII
1German
2 Swedish
3Danish
4 Norwegian
5Finnish
6English
7Dutch
8French
9 Spanish
10 Italian
11 Turkish
Values 12-23 are undefined and will default to 0. You can set values 24-31 to
specific fonts; refer to the USET command in the IGP/PGL Technical
Reference Manual.
Select LPI
This is the number of lines to be printed per inch. For example, at 6 lpi there is
1/6 inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line.
Auto Uppercase
This parameter enables the printer to print text in all uppercase when using
the ALPHA command.
•Disable. The printer will print text in upper and lowercase.
•Enable. The printer will print text in uppercase only.
Skip Cmd Prefix
This parameter determines if the printer will print any data before a PGL
command is received.
•Enable. The printer ignores all data on the current line before an IGP
command.
•Disable. The printer will print all data on the current line before an IGP
command.
Power on IGP/PGL
You can set the IGP feature so that it is enabled or disabled when the printer
is powered on.
•Enable. The PGL is enabled when the printer is powered on. (The PGL
feature is initialized in the Normal mode.)
•Disable. The PGL is disabled when the printer is powered on. (The PGL
feature is initialized to the Quiet mode.)
IGP/PGL Emulation
105
Ext Execute Copy
•Disable. Dynamic data, overlay data, etc. are not allowed if the optional
Form Count parameter (number of forms to print) is specified as part of
the Execute command. (This setting is IGP-100 compatible.)
•Enable. Dynamic data, overlay data, etc. are allowed within a form in
which the Form Count parameter is specified in the Execute command. In
this case, the exact same form (with identical dynamic data) is printed for
whatever the Form Count is. However, incremental data is not
incremented since the page that is printing is exactly the same, the
overlay data is only printed with the first form and not on subsequent
forms, and each form is printed on a separate page.
UPC Descenders
This parameter allows you to print bar code descenders when human
readable data is not presented in the UPC/EAN bar codes.
•Enable. UPC/EAN bar codes are printed with descenders, even if there is
no human readable data.
•Disable. UPC/EAN bar codes are printed without descenders if there is
no human readable data.
Compressed CPI
This parameter allows you to choose a compressed character (60% shorter)
for 17 or 20 CPI instead of the normal height character.
•Disable. The PGL does not use compressed 17 or 20 CPI font.
•Enable. Uses the standard compressed 17 or 20 CPI font.
Ignore Char
Ignore Mode
This parameter instructs the PGL to ignore the character selected under the
Select Character menu.
•Disable. The PGL does not ignore any characters.
•Enable. The PGL ignores the characters specified in the Select Character
menu.
Select Character
Instructs the PGL which decimal character (0-255) to ignore from the host.
106
Chapter 4 Emulation Menu
IGP100 Compatbl.
This option instructs the IGP/PGL to behave similarly to the IGP-100 with
respect to certain commands. All new users with new applications should
select the Disable option. Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave
as described in this manual.
•Disable. The IGP does not emulate the IGP-100 mode.
•Enable. The IGP emulates the IGP-100 version.
Optimized Ratio
This option selects different bar code ratios for certain bar codes including
Code 39 and Interleaved 2 of 5. It is included for compatibility with the
IGP-X00 printers.
•Disable. Uses standard bar code ratios.
•Enable. Selects the alternate bar code ratios.
Error Report
Sets the error reporting capability for IGP/PGL forms.
•On. Full boundary error checking reported. Any element which falls off the
current page is reported as an error.
•Debug Mode. The printer is put in debug mode whenever a form is
defined in Create Form Mode. Each line of the Create Form is printed
along with an error if one occurred. This is the same functionality as if
there were a slash (/) entered before the Create Form Name.
•Fault. When an error occurs, the error is printed, and the message
IGP/PGL ERROR appears on the printer front panel. The printer then
stops printing and goes offline. The error must be cleared before the
printer can resume normal operation.
•Off. No form boundary checking. Graphic elements appear clipped if they
are beyond the page boundaries.
IGP/VGL (Code V) Emulation
107
IGP/VGL (Code V) Emulation
The IGP/VGL (Code V) emulation can be configured either through the
printer’s front panel or from the host computer with control codes. For a
detailed description of configuration with control codes, see the QMS Code V
Technical Reference Manual. For information on configuring the emulation
through the printer’s front panel, see the submenu below and the parameter
descriptions that follow.
EMULATION
(from page 80)
SFCC &
Pwrup LPI Graphics
Options
Error
Handling Ignore/DB8
Setup
ISO Char Set PI Control
Control Char
94* (17-255)
Ignore Mode
Disable*
Enable
Free Format
Disable*
Enable
Mgnum Conversion
Disable*
Enable
6*
7
8
9
10
(see next page) Error Msgs
Enable*
Disable
Error Markers
Enable*
Disable
Offpage Errors
Disable*
Enable
Barcode Errors
Enable*
Disable
Ignore Nulls
Disable*
Enable
Data Bit 8
Enable*
Disable
0*
(0-10) Printer PI
Disable*
Enable
Host PI
Disable*
Enable
Max PI 16
Enable*
Disable
* = Factory Default
IGP/VGL
(CODE-V) &
LP+
108
Chapter 4 Emulation Menu
SFCC & Pwrup
This option has several suboptions which define the SFCC and power-up
configuration used with Code V.
SFCC
This option selects the Special Function Control Code. The default value is
the caret ^ (decimal 94). Valid values are 17 through 255. Throughout this
section, the ^ is used as the SFCC. Run a configuration printout to determine
the currently selected SFCC.
Ignore Mode
•Disable. The default.
•Enable. Selects the ignore mode as the power-up default, and selects the
graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default. All characters are ignored
until a ^A command is received.
Graphics
Options
(from page 107)
Slashes in
Zeros Ignore Dots Append
Rotated
Truncate
Alpha True Vert
1/10
Absorb After
^PY
UPC
Descenders Rot. Char
Size
Ignore
Spaces
Midline PY Convert to
U/C
Absorb After
^PN
Enable*
Disable Disable*
Enable
Disable*
Enable
Enable*
Disable
Disable*
Enable
Absorb All*
Disable
Absorb Motion
Disable*
Enable Adjusted*
Not Adjusted
Disable*
Enable
Disable*
Enable
Disable*
Enable
Disable*
Enable
* = Factory Default
IGP110
Compatbl.
Disable*
Enable
IGP/VGL (Code V) Emulation
109
Free Format
•Disable. The default.
•Enable. Selects free format mode as the power-up default, and selects
the graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default. Free format causes the
Code V to ignore carriage returns, line feeds, and all characters below
hex 20 sent from the host.
Mgnum Conversion
•Disable. The default.
•Enable. Selects the graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default.
LPI
The number of lines to be printed per inch. For example, at 6 lpi there is 1/6
inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line.
Graphics Options
Following are several options which configure printing output:
Slashes in Zeros
This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.
This option applies to all character sets except OCR-A and OCR-B.
•Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.
•Disable. Zero is printed without a slash.
Ignore Dots
•Disable. The default.
•Enable. Causes the Code V to expect position values to be specified in
only 1/10ths of an inch. If the dot position is also given, it is treated as
text.
Append Rotated
•Disable. Logos and alphanumeric strings are treated as separate
elements.
•Enable. Appends logos to an alphanumeric string rotated in a clockwise,
counterclockwise, or inverted orientation.
110
Chapter 4 Emulation Menu
Truncate Alpha
When enabled, this parameter prevents the printing of Error 48 (Element Off
Page Error) if alphanumeric data, including spaces, extends beyond the right
side of the form.
True Vert 1/10
•Disable. A vertical 1/10 of an inch parameter is used as 7/72 of an inch.
The absolute move is slightly smaller than expected. For example, a one
inch move would be 70/72 of an inch. Vertical moves that have the same
value will be identical in length.
•Enable. A vertical 1/10 of an inch parameter is used as 1/10 of an inch.
Rounding occurs to the nearest 1/72 of an inch. This can cause vertical
moves that have the same value to differ by ± 1/72 of an inch.
Absorb after ^PY
•Absorb Motion. Prevents paper motion following a system terminator in
a graphics ^PY command.
•Absorb All. The system ignores all the data and terminator until a
host-generated terminator is detected.
•Disable. System terminators following a graphics command are sent to
the printer and result in paper motion.
UPC Descenders
•Disable. UPC/EAN bar codes are printed without descenders if there is
no human readable data.
•Enable. UPC/EAN bar codes are printed with descenders, even if there is
no human readable data.
Rot. Char Size
•Adjusted. Rotated (clockwise/counterclockwise), expanded characters
have a different size than an unrotated character with the same size
parameters.
•Not Adjusted. Rotated, expanded characters will be the same size as
unrotated characters with the same size parameters.
Ignore Spaces
•Disable. Trailing spaces are not deleted from alphanumeric elements in a
graphics pass.
•Enable. Trailing spaces are deleted from alphanumeric elements in a
graphics pass.
IGP/VGL (Code V) Emulation
111
Midline PY (includes ^PN)
•Disable. The Graphics mode Enable command, ^PY, must be the first
three characters of a line.
•Enable. The ^PY or ^PN can occur anywhere in a line.
Convert to U/C
•Disable. Lowercase characters are printed normally.
•Enable. All lowercase alphabetic characters are converted to uppercase.
Absorb After ^PN
•Disable. All line terminators that immediately follow the ^PN command
are sent to the printer and processed.
•Enable. All line terminators that immediately follow the ^PN command are
ignored.
IGP110 Compatbl.
This option instructs the Code V to behave similarly to the IGP-110 with
respect to certain commands. All new users with new applications should
select the Disable option. Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave
as described in this manual.
•Disable. The IGP does not emulate the IGP-110 mode.
•Enable. The IGP emulates the IGP-110 version.
Error Handling
Following are several options which define how errors are reported:
Error Msgs
•Enable. Command syntax is checked and error messages printed when
command parameters are incorrect.
•Disable. Error checking and error messages are suppressed.
Error Markers
•Enable. Prints the following error markers for those elements that print
beyond the page boundaries:
>> for elements that begin off the right side of the page;
<< for elements that begin at the indicated position but end off the page;
♦ for elements where the starting position of the command contains an
error other than an off-page error.
112
Chapter 4 Emulation Menu
Offpage Errors
•Disable. Does not report errors for elements that start or end beyond the
right edge of the page.
•Enable. Reports errors for elements that start or end beyond the right
edge of the page.
Barcode Errors
•Enable. An error message will print when invalid bar code data is
encountered.
•Disable. Code V will not print an error for illegal bar code data; the bar
code will be skipped.
Ignore / DB8 Setup
Following are several options which define character filtering and data bit 8.
Ignore Nulls
•Disable. None of the null characters (hex 00 or 80) are ignored.
•Enable. Null characters are filtered out of the data stream.
Data Bit 8
•Enable. The PI line is not passed directly from host to printer; all 8 bits are
used for data bits, and characters in the hex 80-FF range can be
accessed.
•Disable. When the host PI line is enabled, data bit 8 internally indicates
PI line status. To use the PI line, disable data bit 8 and enable the Host PI
configuration option (under the PI Control option, below).
Note When Barcode Errors is disabled, the Code V emulation will try to make
the best use of invalid data by either truncating extra digits or adding zeros
to the end of bar code data to meet minimum data length requirements for
some bar codes. Not all errors will be corrected.
Note Data bit 8 is interpreted as either data bit 8 or the PI signal, but never both.
When enabled as data bit 8, data bit 8 has priority over the PI signal, and
all data above hex 7F is used to access character data and not to interpret
PI line data.
Conversely, when data bit 8 is disabled and the PI signal is used, data bit 8
of the data is reserved for use as the PI function, and you cannot access
characters in the hex 80-FF range. Therefore, to access characters in the
hex 80-FF range, data bit 8 must be enabled.
IGP/VGL (Code V) Emulation
113
ISO Char Set
This parameter allows you to select a font for the IGP/VGL (Code V) feature.
The default is 0, which is U.S. ASCII. The following values are valid choices:
0 U.S. ASCII
1 United Kingdom
2 Swedish/Finnish
3 Norwegian/Danish
4 Japanese
5German
6French
7 Italian
8 Spanish
9 PC Subset
10 Code V Version I
PI Control
Printer PI
•Disable. The ASCII emulation is configured with the PI line disabled.
•Enable. The ASCII emulation is configured with the PI line enabled.
Host PI
•Disable. The host does not send PI signals.
•Enable. The host sends PI signals. The Data Bit 8 configuration option
must be disabled to transmit the PI line to the printer.
Max PI 16
•Enable. A paper slew of 0-15 will move 1-16 lines.
•Disable. A paper slew of 1-15 will move 1-15 lines. A paper slew of 0 will
always move 1 line.
114
Chapter 4 Maint/Misc Menu
Maint/Misc Menu
Hex Dump Mode
A hex code printout (or hex dump) translates all incoming data to hexadecimal
equivalents. A hex dump lists each ASCII data character received from the
host computer together with its corresponding two-digit hexadecimal code.
Hex dumps can be used to troubleshoot some types of printer data reception
problems. Figure 23 on page 280 shows a hex dump sample.
Power-up State
This parameter allows you to configure the printer to power-up in the offline or
online state. Online is the default.
Display Language
This parameter chooses the language that will appear on the message
display: English, Italian, French, German, or Spanish.
MAINT/MISC
Hex Dump
Mode Power-up
State
Display
Language
Power
Stacker1
Disable*
Enable Online*
Offline
English*
Italian
French
German
Spanish
Enable*
Disable
To view options, press:
Down
Up
Next
Prev
To select an option, press ENTER.
To return to main menu, press
CLEAR.
To exit menu, press ON LINE.
* = Default Setting
1 = If installed
IGP/VGL (Code V) Emulation
115
Power Stacker
This parameter, which is only presented with the 1500QS model, allows you
to enable (the default) or disable power stacker operation.
Host Interface Menu
The Host Interface Menu Diagram enables you to select and configure an
interface between the printer and your host computer:
•Bi-Tronics (factory default)
•Serial
•Centronics
•Ethernet
•Auto Switching
Note When running short print jobs with the power stacker enabled, it
automatically moves to the top position.
Note When you press the Online button, the stacker automatically moves down
one inch. When you press the Offline button, the stacker moves up
approximately one inch. When printing a batch file, the user must press the
stacker down until the lower limit is reached.
HOST
INTERFACE
Bi-Tronics* Centronics Serial
(see page 116) (see page 117) (see page 119)
Ethernet
(see page 122)
Auto
Switching
(see page 123)
116
Chapter 4 Host Interface Menu
The currently selected interface is indicated with an asterisk on the control
panel message display. Each interface has its own submenu with the set of
associated interface parameters that you may configure. The host interface
and its associated parameters control the interface between the printer and
your host computer. Descriptions follow for each of the host interface
submenus.
Bi-Tronics Submenu
Prime Signal
•Disable. The parallel port does not perform a warm start (reboot) if the
host asserts the prime signal.
•Enable. The parallel port performs a warm start (reboot) if the host
asserts the prime signal.
Note The printer will not work online unless the type of interface selected from
the HOST INTERFACE menu matches the type of interface in your host
computer. The interface in your host computer is the one that connects to
the data cable of the printer. For example, if the interface in your computer
is a serial interface, then the serial interface must be selected from the
HOST INTERFACE menu in the printer.
Note The Bi-Tronics parameters in the printer must be set the same as the
interface in the host computer (at the other end of the data cable of the
printer). Otherwise, the printer might not work online, and data characters
from the computer might not print or might print as “garbled” text.
Bi-Tronics
(from page 115)
Prime Signal TOF Action Buffer Size in
K
Disable*
Enable Reset*
Do Nothing
1*
(1-16)
* = Factory Default
Centronics (Parallel) Submenu
117
TOF Action
•Reset. A form feed is performed before a warm start when the prime
signal is asserted from the host. This setting is used only if the Prime
Signal parameter is enabled.
•Do Nothing. No form feed is performed on reset.
Buffer Size in K
This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the Bi-Tronics port
buffer. You can designate the size of the printer buffer from 1 through 16
Kbytes.
Centronics (Parallel) Submenu
The Centronics submenu provides the options and settings available to
configure the interface as required for your application. These options and
available settings are outlined in the following paragraphs.
Note The Centronics parameters in the printer must be set the same as the
interface in the host computer (at the other end of the data cable of the
printer). Otherwise, the printer might not work online, and data characters
from the computer might not print or might print as “garbled” text.
Centronics
(from page 115)
Data Bit 8 PI Ignored Data
Polarity
Resp.
Polarity Busy on
Strobe
Latch
Data On
Prime
Signal TOF
Action
Buffer Size
in K
Enable*
Disable Enable*
Disable
Standard*
Inverted
Standard*
Inverted
Enable*
Disable
Leading*
Trailing
Disable*
Enable Reset*
Do Nothing
1*
(1-16)
* = Factory Default
118
Chapter 4 Host Interface Menu
Data Bit 8
•Enable. Allows access to the extended ASCII character set.
•Disable. The printer interprets bit 8 of each incoming data character as a
zero, regardless of its actual setting.
PI Ignored
The PI (Paper Instruction) signal is used to control vertical paper motion.
•Enable. Ignores the PI signal and treats the data as characters or control
codes.
•Disable. Causes the printer to interpret the eight data lines as VFU
commands when the PI signal is true.
Data Polarity
The Data Polarity parameter must be set to match the data polarity of your
host computer.
•Standard. Does not expect the host computer to invert the data.
•Inverted. Expects the data received on the data lines from the host
computer to be inverted. Ones become zeros, and vice-versa.
Resp. Polarity
The Response Polarity parameter must be set to match the response polarity
of your host computer. This option sets the polarity of the Acknowledge,
Online, Fault, Paper Empty, and Busy signals.
•Standard. Does not invert the response signals.
•Inverted. Inverts the response signals sent to the host computer.
Busy on Strobe
•Enable. Asserts a busy signal after each character is received.
•Disable. Asserts a busy signal only when the print buffers are full.
Latch Data On
The Latch Data On parameter specifies whether the data is read on the
leading or trailing edge of the data strobe signal.
Prime Signal
•Disable. The parallel port does not perform a warm start (reboot) if the
host asserts the prime signal.
•Enable. The parallel port performs a warm start (reboot) if the host
asserts the prime signal.
Serial Submenu
119
TOF Action
•Reset. A form feed is performed before a warm start when the prime
signal is asserted from the host. This setting is used only if the Prime
Signal parameter is enabled.
•Do Nothing. No form feed is performed on reset.
Buffer Size in K
Configures the amount of memory allocated for the Centronics parallel port
buffer. The default is 1 Kbyte, but you can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes,
in 1-Kbyte increments.
Serial Submenu
The serial submenu allows you to choose the configuration of the Serial host
interface type, as shown above. Several other serial parameters are included
on this menu, as described below.
Note The serial parameters in the printer must be set the same as the interface
in the host computer (at the other end of the data cable of the printer).
Otherwise, the printer might not work online, and data characters from the
computer might not print or might print as “garbled” text.
Serial
(from page 115)
Interface
Type Data
Protocol
Baud Rate Word
Length Stop Bits
Parity Data Term
Ready
Request to
Send
Buffer Size in
K
RS-232*
RS-422 XON / XOFF*
ETX / ACK
ACK / NAK
DTR
9600*
19200
38400
600
1200
2400
4800
8*
7
1*
2
None*
Odd
Even
Mark
Sense
True*
On-Line and BNF
Off-Line or BF
False
On-Line and BNF*
Off-Line or BF
False
True
1*
(1-16)
* = Factory Default
120
Chapter 4 Host Interface Menu
Interface Type
Allows you to select either the RS-232 (the default) or RS-422 serial port
interface.
Data Protocol
You can select one of the following serial interface protocols to meet the host
interface requirements.
•XON / XOFF. The default. The printer controls the flow of communication
from the host by turning the transmission on and off.
In some situations, such as when the buffer is full or the timing of signals
is too slow or too fast, the printer will tell the host to stop transmission by
sending an XOFF character.
An XOFF character is sent when the number of empty bytes in the buffer
is less than or equal to 25 percent of the buffer size.
If the host keeps sending data after an XOFF is sent, the printer firmware
will continue to send an XOFF for every 16 characters received.
When cleared, the printer will resume receiving data (XON). The data
does not have any End of Text codes; XON / XOFF is a non-block
protocol.
•ETX / ACK. End of Text / Acknowledge. The host controls the flow of
communication to the printer by sending a block of data and ending the
block with an End of Text (ETX) signal. When the printer receives the
ETX signal, it will acknowledge the ETX, thereby acknowledging it has
received the entire block of data.
•ACK / NAK. ACK means acknowledge; the device acknowledges it has
accepted a transmission. NAK means a negative acknowledge; the
device did not receive the transmission.
•DTR. Data Terminal Ready. The printer controls the data flow by sending
this hardware signal to the host. If there is enough room in the printer
buffer, the printer will send a high signal. If the buffer is full, the printer will
send a low signal. DTR tells the host if it is safe to send more data. If the
host sends data during an unsafe condition, data will be lost.
Baud Rate
Sets the baud rate of the serial interface in the printer. Baud rate is the speed
at which serial data is transferred between the host computer and the printer.
The choices for the RS-232 and RS-422 interfaces are 600, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19200, and 38400. The default is 9600 baud.
Note If you select a baud rate that is 19200 or greater, you may need to increase
the Buffer Size in K parameter from the default (1 Kbyte) to improve
performance.
Serial Submenu
121
Word Length
Sets the length of the serial data word. The length of the data word can be set
to 7 or 8 bits, and must match the corresponding data bits setting in the host
computer. The default is 8 bits.
Stop Bits
Sets the number of stop bits in the serial data word. Either one or two stop bits
can be selected. The setting must match the corresponding stop bit setting in
the host computer. The default is 1 bit.
Parity
Set for odd parity, even parity, mark, sense, or no parity. The setting must
match the corresponding parity setting in the host computer. The default is
None.
Data Term Ready
This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the
Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal is generated. This signal indicates
whether or not the printer is ready to receive data.
•True. Continuously asserts the DTR signal (the default).
•On-Line and BNF (buffer not full). Asserts the DTR signal when the
printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full.
•Off-Line or BF (buffer full). Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is
offline or the internal serial buffer is full.
•False. Never asserts the DTR signal.
Request to Send
This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the
Request to Send (RTS) signal is generated. This signal indicates whether or
not the printer is ready to receive data.
•On-Line and BNF. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online and
the internal serial buffer is not full (the default).
•Off-Line or BF. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is offline or the
internal serial buffer is full.
•False. Never asserts the RTS signal.
•True. Continuously asserts the RTS signal.
Buffer Size in K
Configures the amount of memory allocated for the serial port buffer. The
default is 1 Kbyte, but you may specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in
1-Kbyte increments.
122
Chapter 4 Host Interface Menu
Ethernet Submenu
The Ethernet interface allows you to locate the printer on a LAN rather than
attach the host directly into the printer.
Buffer Size in K
This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the Ethernet
buffer. The default is 16 Kbytes. You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in
1-Kbyte increments.
Ethernet
(from page 115)
Buffer Size in
K
16*
(1-16)
* = Factory Default
Auto Switching Submenu
123
Auto Switching Submenu
Auto Switching
Gives the printer the ability to handle multiple data streams sequentially. With
Auto Switching, the printer can service hosts attached to the serial and
parallel ports as if they were the only interface connected.
For example, if the host computer sends one print job to the RS-232 serial
port and a separate print job to the Bi-Tronics parallel port, the printer's Auto
Switching is able to handle both jobs, in the order they were received, without
the user having to reconfigure the selected interface between jobs.
Port Type
Allows you to select the types of parallel and/or serial interfaces which are
connected to the printer. For example, if your printer is attached to one host
with a Centronics connection and a second host with an RS-422 serial
connection, you would select Centronics under the Parallel Hotport menu and
RS-422 under the Serial Hotport menu.
Auto Switching
(from page 115)
Parallel
Hotport Serial
Hotport
Port Type
Bi-Tronics
Centronics
Ethernet
Disable
Trickle Time
1/4 sec*
1/2 sec
1 sec
2 sec
4 sec
8 sec
16 sec
Off
Timeout
10 sec.*
(1-60)
Report Status
Disable*
Enable
Port Type
RS-232*
RS-422
Disable
Trickle Time
1/4 sec*
1/2 sec
1 sec
2 sec
4 sec
8 sec
16 sec
Off
Timeout
10 sec.*
(1-60)
Report Status
Disable*
Enable
* = Factory Default
124
Chapter 4 Host Interface Menu
Trickle Time
When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by
the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents the second host from
timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed. In order to support this
feature, the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for
future use.
For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port and then
receives a second print job from the parallel port, the data from the parallel
port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from
being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port.
The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next
byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the
host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its
buffer too fast.
Timeout
This is the value used by the printer to time out from the current port and
check the other selected Port Types for data to print. When the printer has not
received data from the host after a certain period of time, it needs to Timeout
in order to service the other ports.
Report Status
•Disable. When a fault occurs on the printer, only the active port reports
the fault to the host.
•Enable. The port will report any fault even when it is not the current active
port.
Auto Switching Submenu
125
Ethernet Params Menu
The ETHERNET PARAMS menu helps your printer communicate on a
network.
For information on assigning the IP Address, Gateway Address, Subnet
Mask, and MAC Address, refer to Μετηοδσ Οφ Αδϕυστινγ Παπερ
Ποσιτιον ον παγε 170.
You may also enable or disable the Novell or NetBIOS Protocols within this
menu, as well as selecting which Novell Frame scheme is used in processing
Novell signals. See Chapter 11, “Novell Configuration” for more details.
If the printer is connected to the Remote Management Software (RMS), the
RMS Port number and PPM Port Timeout settings must match the settings in
the Remote Management Software program.
IP Address
A numeric address such as 123.45.61.23 which identifies a printer or server in
a LAN or WAN.
ETHERNET
PARAMS
IP Address Gateway
Address
Subnet Mask MAC Address Novell
Protocol
NetBIOS
Protocol
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx hhhhhhhhhhhh Enable*
Disable
Enable*
Disable
Novell Frame PPM Port
Number
PPM Port
Timeout
Ethernet 802.2*
802.2 Snap
Auto Sensing
Ethernet II
Ethernet 802.3
3001*
(0-65535)
100 secs.*
(1-255)
Ethernet1
Speed
Auto Select*
10 Half Duplex
10 Full Duplex
100 Half Duplex
100 Full Duplex
* Factory Default
1 If you change the Ethernet speed setting,
you must also change the switch or hub
setting to match.
126
Chapter 4 Ethernet Params Menu
Gateway Address
A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device (gateway) that
translates data between two incompatible networks, which can include
protocol translation.
Subnet Mask
A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or
subnets. This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be
forwarded to other subnets.
MAC Address
This menu item is the Manufacturer’s Assigned Number, and is unique for
each printer. It is read-only.
Novell Protocol
This option determines whether the Novell protocol will be available. The
selections are as indicated below:
•Enable. (the default) makes the Novell protocol available with the
ethernet installed.
•Disable. Makes the Novell protocol unavailable during printer operation.
NetBIOS Protocol
This option determines whether the NetBIOS protocol will be available. The
selections are as indicated below:
•Enable. (the default) makes the NetBIOS protocol available with the
ethernet installed.
•Disable. Makes the NetBIOS protocol unavailable during printer
operation.
Novell Frame
This selection determines which framing scheme will be used in processing
Novell signals.
•Auto Sensing (the default)
•Ethernet II
•Ethernet 802.3
•Ethernet 802.2
•802.2 Snap
Auto Switching Submenu
127
Ethernet Speed
This menu option only appears if a 10/100Base-T network interface card
(NIC) is installed. The Ethernet Speed menu allows compatibility with different
systems and networks. The factory default is Auto Select.
•Auto Select. (the default) This setting tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to
perform an auto detection scheme and configure itself to be 10 Half
Duplex, 10 Full Duplex, 100 Half Duplex, or 100 Full Duplex.
•10 Half Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 10
Megabits per second using half duplex.
•10 Full Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 10
Megabits per second using full duplex.
•100 Half Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 100
Megabits per second using half duplex.
•100 Full Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 100
Megabits per second using full duplex.
Printer Control Menu
The Printer Control Menu allows you to choose the printer's behavior. Options
on this menu, as shown below, are described in the following pages.
PRINTER
CONTROL
Unidirectional PMD Fault Open Platen
@BOF
Slow Paper
Slew
Disable*
Enable Enable*
Disable
Disable*
Enable
Disable*
Enable
To view options, press:
Down
Up
Next
Prev
To select an option, press ENTER.
To return to main menu, press
CLEAR.
To exit menu, press ON LINE.
* = Default Setting
Power Saver
Time
15 mins.*
(5 sec.-60 min.)
Disable
Instant
128
Chapter 4 Printer Control Menu
Unidirectional
The Unidirectional feature affects both print quality and printing speed. By
setting this feature, you can configure the printer to print in both directions of
the shuttle sweep (bidirectional), or to print in one direction only
(unidirectional).
You might want to enable this feature when printing bar codes, high quality
text and graphics, or other printing that requires precise vertical alignment.
Although enabling this feature reduces print speed, it enhances the vertical
alignment of dots and produces cleaner, sharper bar codes and text. Choices
include the following:
•Disable. The default. The printer will print all data in both directions of the
shuttle sweep (bidirectional printing). This choice produces higher printing
speed.
•Enable. The printer will print all data in only one direction of the shuttle
sweep (unidirectional printing). This choice produces higher print quality.
PMD (Paper Motion Detection) Fault
•Enable. If a paper jam occurs, an audible alarm beeps, the LCD displays
the message, “CLEAR PAPER JAM,” and the printer stops printing.
•Disable. You should disable PMD only if special paper requires it.
Open Platen @ BOF (Bottom of Form)
Some special forms have perforation areas that are too thick to pass through
the print station. This parameter, when enabled, opens and closes the platen
when the perforations move across the platen. When enabling this parameter,
you must set the forms length to match the physical distance between
perforations.
Slow Paper Slew
This parameter affects the speed at which paper advances into the stacking
area of the printer. The speed may be slowed down by enabling this feature.
•Disable. The default. The printer will slew and stack paper at maximum
speed.
•Enable. Causes the paper to stack at a slower pace. This ensures that
certain forms will stack more neatly.
Caution Once PMD is disabled, paper motion is not monitored. If a paper jam
occurs, the printer ignores the condition and continues to print,
which can cause severe damage to the printer.
Auto Switching Submenu
129
Power Saver Time
Power Saver is also referred to as the ENERGY STAR® Office Equipment
Program. The Power Saver feature places the printer in “sleep mode” when
the printer has not been used for a specified number of minutes. In sleep
mode the printer is in low-energy idle state, all fans and higher voltages are
off, and only +5Vdc logical circuits are active.
You can designate the number of minutes after which the printer will go into
sleep mode. The range of time is from 0 to 60 minutes. The default is 15
minutes.
Pressing any key on the control panel or sending a print job to the printer will
turn off sleep mode.
Diagnostics Menu
The diagnostics menu allows you to choose the diagnostics tests to be run
and provides you with important system information. Options on this menu, as
shown below, are described in the following pages.
DIAGNOSTICS
Printer Tests Test Width Paper Out
Dots
System
Memory Print Statistics
Shift Recycle*
All E’s
E’s + TOF
All H’s
All Underlines
All Black
Shuttle Slow
Shuttle Fast
Shuttle Only
Phase Printer
217* (500 lpm)
123* (1000 lpm)
62* (1500 lpm)
(1 to 2000)
Paperout Adj.
Burnin Test
Print Error Log
Clear Error Log
E-Net Test Page1
Full Width*
80 columns
40 dots*
(4-76 dots)
x Megabytes On: x.x Hrs.
Print: x.x Hrs.
Print Strokes
Print Lines
11 inch Pages
1If Ethernet adapter is present
130
Chapter 4 Diagnostics Menu
Printer Tests
The printer tests are used to check the print quality and printer operation.
The Printer Tests parameters are described below. (For test running
procedures, see page 278.)
•Shift Recycle. A sliding alphanumeric pattern that identifies missing or
malformed characters, improper vertical alignment, or vertical
compression.
•All E's. A pattern of all uppercase E's that identifies missing characters,
misplaced dots, smeared characters, improper phasing problems, or light/
dark character variations.
•E's + TOF. A pattern of all E's followed by a form feed to the next page
top of form, that identifies paper motion or feeding problems.
•All H's. A pattern of all uppercase H's used to detect missing characters,
misplaced dots, smeared characters, or improper phasing.
•All Underlines. An underline pattern useful for identifying hammer bank
misalignment.
•All Black. A condition where all dot positions are printed, creating a solid
black band.
•Shuttle Slow. Verifies proper operation by exercising shuttle and ribbon
motion at low speed.
•Shuttle Fast. Verifies proper operation by exercising shuttle and ribbon
motion at fast speed.
•Shuttle Only. Exercises only the shuttle at fast speed.
•Phase Printer. It is recommended that only an authorized Printronix
representative runs this test.
The Phase Printer test checks for wavy print. The initial phase value is set
in the factory. The Customer Service Engineer (CSE) runs the test and
checks the quality. (The phase value prints on the left margin.) If the print
looks too wavy, the CSE changes the Phase Value parameter by
pressing the key while the test is running. A value between 1 and 2000
displays. To change the value, the CSE presses theorkey until the
desired value displays, and then presses ENTER.
Note Your Customer Service Engineer typically runs these tests. They are
described in more detail in the P5000LJ Series Printers Maintenance
Manual.
Auto Switching Submenu
131
•Paperout Adj. It is recommended that only a Hewlett-Packard Customer
Service Engineer run this test.
The Paperout Adj. allows the Customer Service Engineer to specify
where the last line of text will print when there is a paper out condition.
Setting this parameter correctly prevents printing on the platen. (See the
P5000LJ Series Printers Maintenance Manual for more information.)
•Burnin Test. Running this test is not recommended.
•Print Error Log. Prints a log of the last 50 errors that have occurred in
the printer.
•Clear Error Log. Clears the error log.
•E-Net Test Page. Prints the Ethernet statistics stored on the Ethernet
adapter (if present).
Test Width
This parameter permits you to run the self-tests at full width or 80 columns.
Paper Out Dots
It is recommended that only an authorized Printronix representative sets this
parameter.
Paper Out Dots allows the Customer Service Engineer to specify where the
last line on the page will print when there is a paper out condition. Setting this
parameter correctly prevents printing on the platen.
System Memory
This parameter displays the amount of RAM installed.
Note The printer must be printing the phase pattern of “H’s” when the Phasing
Value is changed or the new phasing value will not be written into non-
volatile RAM (NVRAM). If the value is changed when not printing, the
printer will return to its default phasing value when powered off and then
back on.
Caution This parameter must match paper width used. If full width is selected
for use with 80-column or 8.5-inch wide paper, damage to the
hammer tips and platen may result.
132
Chapter 4 RibbonMinder
Print Statistics
You can view various printer statistics, such as hours of usage, and refer to
these figures for preventive maintenance purposes. Printer statistics
accumulate continuously; they do not reset when you turn off the printer.
All of the printer statistics are set to zero at the factory after burn-in testing.
•On. The cumulative time in hours the printer has been powered on. The
range is from 0 to 30,000 hours.
•Print. The cumulative time in hours the printer has actually been printing.
The range is from 0 to 30,000 hours.
•Print Strokes. The cumulative number of back-and-forth shuttle strokes
the printer has printed during normal operation. The range is from 0 to
2,147,483,648 shuttle strokes.
•Print Lines. The cumulative number of lines the printer has printed. The
range is from 0 to 2,147,483,648 print lines.
•11 inch Pages. The cumulative number of pages the printer has printed.
The range in print pages is from 0 to 2,147,483,648 total inches of paper
movement divided by 11.
RibbonMinder
RibbonMinder is a user-definable software feature which notifies the user
when a ribbon should be changed. It does this by monitoring ink consumption
and alerts you when the print quality falls below a level you designate. This is
especially important if you are printing bar codes to be scanned.
As printing continues, the percentage of usable ink in the ribbon decreases.
When 0% usable ink appears, the printer is typically configured to stop
printing and display the following message:
ON LINE 100%
<printer emulation>
ON LINE 74% Ribbon ink being consumed
<printer emulation>
ON LINE 8% Ribbon life approaching end
<printer emulation>
RIBBON INK OUT
CHANGE RIBBON
RibbonMinder Menu
133
RibbonMinder Menu
New Ribbon
This provides a means to manually set the printer when a new ribbon has
been installed. The ribbon life displayed on the control panel (if active) is set
to 100%. The count internal to the printer will also be reset, and the tabulation
towards end of ribbon life will begin.
Ribbon Action
•Display. The factory default for this setting is the DISPLAY mode. When
DISPLAY is selected, the ribbon ink consumption will continually display
on the control panel, decrementing as ink is consumed. When the ribbon
life reaches 0%, the message RIBBON INK OUT / CHANGE RIBBON
displays on the control panel. The printer will continue to accept new print
jobs. No other indication (no flashing light, or warning beep) is given. The
display can be cleared by replacing the ribbon when NEW RIBBON
DETECT is enabled.
Note Once you have set up options for RibbonMinder, it works without attention.
When you begin printing with RibbonMinder enabled, the message display
shows a ribbon life value of 100%. The ribbon life decreases as the ink is
consumed.
RIBBON-
MINDER
New
Ribbon Ribbon
Action
Ribbon
Type**
Ribbon
End Point New Rib.
Detect
Press ENTER
to reset ribbon
life to 100%.
NOTE: If New
Ribbon Detect
is set to
“Enable”, the
Ribbon Life will
automatically
display 100%
when the
ribbon is
changed.
Display*
Fault Immed
Fault Paper Out
Disable
Gold Series 90
Gold Series 50
Gold Series 30
Gold Ser. 2000
Printronix 100
Printronix 60
Extend 100%
...(by 5%)
Extend 5%
Normal*
Reduce 5%
...(by 5%)
Reduce 100%
Enable*
Disable
* = Factory Default
**Defaults:
Cab - Gold Ser 90
Ped - Gold Ser 30
P5220 - Gold 2000
134
Chapter 4 RibbonMinder
•Fault immed. When FAULT IMMED. mode is selected, and the ribbon life
reaches 0%, the message RIBBON INK OUT/ CHANGE RIBBON
displays on the control panel. The printer stops and goes into fault
condition. To complete the job in progress, the user must press the
CLEAR key. This allows the printer to continue printing for approximately
two minutes. After two minutes, the printer goes into fault mode again,
the RIBBON INK OUT/ CHANGE RIBBON display appears, and the
printer status indicator flashes. Clear the display by (1) replacing the
ribbon when NEW RIBBON DETECT is enabled, or (2) pressing the
CLEAR key on the control panel. If the CLEAR key is pressed, the
message will re-appear after approximately two minutes.
•Fault paper out. When FAULT PAPER OUT mode is selected, and the
ribbon life reaches 5%, the printer continues to accept new print jobs until
the printer runs out of paper. When an END OF FORMS/LOAD FORMS
condition is cleared (paper is loaded), then the RIBBON INK LOW/
CHANGE RIBBON message appears and the printer status indicator
flashes. The printer will not accept new print jobs until the ribbon is
changed and the Ribbon Minder is reset to 100%.
In this mode, the Ribbon Minder is automatically reset when a “clean
hands” ribbon is installed and NEW RIBBON DETECT is enabled. If
another type of ribbon is used, the User must reset the Ribbon Minder
using the New Ribbon menu selection.
•Disable. When DISABLE mode is selected, the ribbon life display is
removed from the control panel, but the Ribbon Minder continues to
monitor ink consumption. No indication (no flashing light, or warning
beep) is given, and the printer continues to accept new print jobs
indefinitely.
NOTE: When the printer displays “Ribbon Ink Out / Change Ribbon, “
disabling the ribbon action will not clear the message.
RibbonMinder Menu
135
Ribbon Type
The factory default setting is dependent on the host printer. Printronix Gold
Series 90 corresponds to the Cabinet version, Printronix Gold Series 60 for
the Pedestal and Printronix Gold Series 2000 for the P5220. The relative
length equivalents for each of the ribbon settings are:
Ribbon End Point
The factory default is NORMAL. This value corresponds to the character life
expectancy of the installed ribbon. For example, the life of the Gold Series 90
ribbon is specified at 90 million characters. By selecting NORMAL Ribbon
End Point, the Ribbon Minder will track characters up to 90 million before
declaring RIBBON INK OUT / CHANGE RIBBON.
By changing this setting, the user can specify a point lower or higher at which
the RIBBON INK OUT / CHANGE RIBBON message is displayed. Using the
example above, if the Ribbon End Point is set to Reduce 50%, the RIBBON
INK OUT / CHANGE RIBBON message would display at 45 million
characters. If Ribbon End Point was set to Extend 50%, the message would
display at 135 million characters. In this way, the user can set ribbon life to
match the required print density for the application.
NOTE: The percentage of ribbon use displayed on the control panel by the
Ribbon Minder Ink Consumption display tracks the consumption
based on the adjusted Ribbon End Point. For example, if the Ribbon
End Point is set to Reduce 50% (45 million characters for the Gold
Series 90 ribbon), the Ribbon Minder Ink Consumption display will
start at 100%, and decrement to reach 0% as 45 million characters
are printed.
Table 12. Length Equivalent Ribbon Settings
Ribbon Type (Char) Equivalent Length Actual Length
Gold Series 90
(90 million characters) 80 yards 90 yards
Gold Series 50
(50 million characters) 100 yards 55 yards
Gold Series 30
(30 million characters) 60 yards 40 yards
Gold Series 2000
(60 million characters) 100 yards 80 yards
Printronix 100
(50 million characters) 100 yards 100 yards
Printronix 60
(30 million characters) 60 yards 60 yards
136
Chapter 4 RibbonMinder
If the Ribbon Type is changed from the factory default to another value,
Ribbon Usage will adjust accordingly, where 100% corresponds to the
proportionate value of the selected type. For example, if the Ribbon Type is
set to Printronix 60 (approximately 30 million), Ribbon End Point set to
NORMAL would correspond to 30 million characters. With this same 60 yard
ribbon, if Ribbon End Point was set to Reduce 50%, the character count
would be set to 15 million, etc. Ribbon Minder will track the ink consumption
based on these new parameters, display 100% when a new ribbon is installed
and tracking usage to 0%.
NOTE: Ribbon Ink Consumption is determined not by actual character count,
but by an accumulation of a specified number of printed dots in any
one of a number of pre-defined vertical zones. It is stated here as a
function of characters printed for user clarity.
New Rib. Detect
The factory default setting is Enable. When the RIBBON INK OUT / CHANGE
RIBBON message displays, and a new ribbon is installed with New Ribbon
Detect enabled, the Ribbon Minder will automatically reset by opening the
platen. If New Ribbon Detect is set to Disable, the Ribbon Minder must be
manually reset by using the New Ribbon function.
137
5Approaches To Network
Printing
Overview
Configuring your network printing is based on the network protocols and host
environments you already use or plan to use. It is common to find multiple
network protocols co-existing in the same network.
NIC is a multi-protocol device that is able to accommodate many protocols at
the same time. The actual print job order operates on a first-in/first-out basis.
This means it is possible to configure your NIC using any or all of the methods
listed in this manual for use at the same time. This concept is what creates the
ability to use powerful printer management tools in parallel with the act of
printing. The protocol for a print job and the protocol for the management tool
will often be different.
These ideas are also what differentiate networks by size and network protocol
use. Some common network arrangements include peer to peer networks and
print job servers.
Peer To Peer Networks
Peer to peer networks can be used when you have few machines, few
printers, only one network protocol, and when any host can print to the printer.
A variation of this is a mini-server which “shares” its printer with the other
networked computers in a single room or building. NIC improves flexibility in
printer placement and setup by becoming just another “peer,” rather than
dedicated to a single machine.
A common peer to peer network arrangement is comprised of Windows
95/98 with TCP/IP configured to use the netBEUI protocol to connect to the
print server. A second common extension of this arrangement is to install a
third party LPR PORT MONITOR on each PC and use simple TCP/IP to
connect to the print server. If Windows NT is used for the peer computers,
LPR is included and is easy to set up. Windows 95/98 does not have such a
monitor, but many are available for free for download from the Web.
138
Chapter 5 Overview
Print Job Servers
In most larger networks, print jobs usually are managed by designating one
protocol and method for printing and then designating specific computers as
print job servers, rather than by directing any host running any protocol to the
networked printer resource. Computers designated as print job servers have
large hard disk space to store print data and spool management software. All
clients direct their print job to the computer designated as the print job server
rather than the printer; therefore, the client to print job server network protocol
used might not be the same as the print job server to NIC. Large network
environments today are generally TCP/IP or Novell network protocols or a
mixture of the two.
Common examples of larger networks utilizing the P5000LJ Series printers
and NIC:
•Many Windows 95/98 clients directing print jobs to an NT server. The
Windows 95/98 clients, NT server, and P5000LJ Series printer might or
might not be in the same physical location, building, or even country. The
printer is located based on where its output is needed, not where the jobs
originate. Remote printer management tools (PPM, SNMP, etc.) give the
same ability to the administrator today that networking provided in the
past.
•Windows 95/98, NT, Novell network client computers direct output to
a Unix machine designated as the print job server which spools
and manages print jobs. The designated print server could be an
HP e3000, IBM AS/400, Unix (or Linux), or Novell machine.
Logical Printer Architecture
NIC implements a logical printer architecture which gives the system
administrator the possibility to configure the print server to handle and act
upon the print data in several ways. When a print job comes through the print
server, there is a certain logical print path that it follows before it gets to the
printer. Each logical print path consists of a sequence of logical steps where
extra processing may be performed on the print data before it is sent to the
printer. This ability to preprocess the print data before it is sent to the printer
allows elimination of printing problems, or implementation of printer
enhancements that may be difficult and time consuming to solve or introduce
at the system, spool or queue level, yet be simplistic to perform at the print
server level.
The logical print path for a print job going through NIC consist of three
different phases:
•Phase 1 - The host sends the job to a destination or queue on NIC
(e.g. d1prn).
•Phase 2 - The print job passes through the associated “model”
(e.g. model “m1”) on NIC for any extra processing associated with the
model.
•Phase 3 - The processed print job is directed to the printer for output.
Logical Printer Architecture
139
Figure 13. Print Path
Destinations/Queues
For every I/O port on NIC, there is at least one pre-defined logical print queue
or destination to accept print jobs destined for it. This includes print jobs that
are sent directly to the I/O port, such as port 9100. These queue or
destination names are pre-defined but can be changed by the user.
Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3
Host
Destination 4
(d4prn)
Destination 2
(d2prn)
Destination 3
(d3prn)
Destination 1
(d1prn) Model 1
(m1)
Model 2
(m2)
Model 3
(m3)
Model 4
(m4)
Printer
Destination 8
(d8prn)
Destination 6
(d6prn)
Destination 7
(d7prn)
Destination 5
(d5prn) Model 5
(m5)
Model 6
(m6)
Model 7
(m7)
Model 8
(m8)
140
Chapter 5 Overview
Models
For every destination or queue, there is a pre-defined model associated with
it. The model defines how the print job will be processed as it passes through
to the printer. Models are a set of mini filters that can be used to modify the
print data stream. The functions available for each model are as follows:
1. Insert carriage return after line feed
2. Insert a banner page before or after each print job
3. Insert header strings to
•print using upper tray’s paper
•printer using lower tray's paper
•print in landscape mode
•print in portrait mode
4. Insert trailer strings to
•reset the printer once the print job completes
•force the end of the job
•perform a form feed at the end of the data
5. Log one or all of the following information as each print job passes
through the model
•job ID and username
•user ID and three messages per job about the start and finish
•checksum value of the data transferred
•miscellaneous messages from the printer
•status of the printer based on the port interface signals
6. Load a specific printer configuration before processing a print job
•to specify a printer configuration to be associated with a print queue
•when a job is set to that print queue, the associated printer
configuration will be loaded before the job is processed.
•allows you to define up to four unique and independent printer
personalities in a single printer.
•allows you to effectively have four different printers in one.
141
6Embedded NIC Web Page
Overview
The NIC comes with an extremely powerful printer management tool that
allows you to monitor, configure, and manage both the printer and its print job.
The NIC comes with an embedded web server that allows System
Administrators and users access to its printer management capabilities from a
standard web browser.
The NIC printer’s IP address is used as a URL, similar to the URL of an
Internet web page. When a web browser is activiated and the printer’s IP
address is entered, the printer’s embedded web server displays its home
page, with links to the printer’s status and configuration settings.
All of the NIC’s configuration settings are protected by a password so
unauthorized users cannot make changes. When you try to open any of the
NIC’s configuration pages, you are asked for your user name and password.
At the prompt, enter root (unless you have another user configured with root
privileges) followed by the associated password. If there is no password,
press ENTER. For more information on setting passwords, refer to “NIC
Security” on page 259.
When you configure settings on the NIC and press the SUBMIT button on the
related form, re-power the NIC to ensure the latest settings are in use. To
reset the NIC, select System Form from the Configuration Menu and click the
REBOOT button.
The embedded NIC Web server gives you the ability to configure the network
adapter, monitor printer status, and to manage print jobs. The NIC Web Page
structure is divided into several menus as shown in Figure 14.
142
Chapter 6 Configuration
Configuration
Figure 14. NIC HTML Structure
The Configuration menu items allow you to configure the settings for the
following items:
•Network. This menu item allows you to change the network setting for
each protocol; TCP/IP, NetBIOS over TCP/IP, and Netware.
•Print Path. This menu item allows you to change the name of the
destination queues, and define how the print job is preprocessed before
printing. It allows you to log infomration, and to specify the SMTP server’s
IP address.
•Print Model. This menu item allows you to specify and display print
model settings.
•Log Path. This menu item allows you to specify and display log path
settings.
•I/O Port. This menu item is typically not used. It allows you to configure
the operation of the parallel port interface.
•SNMP. This menu item allows you to confiure the SNMP trap manager
settings. It also allows you to define the printer event types to monitor,
and the e-mail address that should receive alert notifications.
Index/Home
Configuration
I/O Port
Network
TCP/IP
Windows
Novell
d1prn
d2prn
d3prn
d4prn
d5prn
d6prn
d7prn
d8prn
Alert Config 1
Alert Config 2
Alert Config 3
Alert Config 4
Alert Config 5
Alert Config 6
Alert Config 7
Alert Config 8
Alert Config 9
Alert Config 10
Status Help About
Administration
SNMP
Print ModelPrint PathNetwork Log Path
System
I/O Port
TCP/IP Network
143
•Administration. This menu item allows you to define or change the
printer name, location, description, etc. It also allows you to change the
root and guest user passwords.
•System. This menu item allows you to reboot the NIC, or restore its
settings to the factory default.
Configuration Network
The network configuration allows you to specify the setting for each network
protocol. Beside each protocol name is a check box which allows you to
enable or disable each protocol depending on your network printing needs.
NOTE: TCP/IP is the only supported protocol which is always enabled.
TCP/IP Network
Interface
The two edit fields contain the NIC’s IP address and subnet mask. The check
boxes enable the RARP and BOOTP protocols, which are alternate methods
of assigning IP addresses. On most networks, you want to enter a permanent
IP address and subnet mask and disable RARP and BOOTP. However, if
your network requires one of these, you should clear the IP address (and
possibly the subnet mask) fields and ensure that the appropriate check box is
selected.
Routing
The routing table tells the NIC which router or gateway to use to access other
subnets or hosts. In most situations, you can add your router's IP address as
the default router. All packets destined for other subnets will be forwarded to
the default router for delivery to the destination host. If you have more
complex routing requirements, add static routing entries for specific hosts or
networks in the remaining Routing rows. Packets with IP addresses that
match a given Destination and Mask (from the first two fields in a Routing row)
route to the router/gateway named in the third field. Packets which do not
match any of the listed Destinations and Masks route to the default router if
one is set.
144
Chapter 6 Configuration Network
Windows Network (NetBIOS TCP/IP)
TCP/IP is used for Windows (i.e. Windows NT, Windows 95, and Windows for
Workgroups) printing unless another protocol like IPX is available. Therefore,
mandatory TCP/IP settings (i.e. IP address and subnet mask) are necessary
on the NIC. Go to "TCP/IP Network" on this form to fill in these settings if you
have not done so already.
Workgroup Name
This name specifies which Windows workgroup the NIC resides.
Novell Network
Protocol
Defines the packet structure of transmitted data or the control commands that
manage the session, or both.
FrameType
This option determines which framing scheme will be used in processing
Novell signals. The different types of Ethernet packet formats include:
•Auto Sensing
•Ethernet II
•Ethernet 802.3
•Ethernet 802.2 (the default)
•802.2 Snap
Service Type
Allows you to change the Nest Server. The options are:
•Binary
•NDS
•Auto
File Server
Define a Novell file server for the NIC to service as either a PSERVER or an
RPRINTER.
NDS
NDS (Novell Directory Services) is a distributed database of network
information. An NDS contains information that defines every object on the
network. For more information please see your Novell administrator.
Destination Settings
145
Pserver
Define a password for the NIC to use when logging in to the file server as a
PSERVER. This is an optional file server security feature.
Rprinter
Define an RPRINTER setup so the NIC knows to service a PSERVER.NLM
on a Novell file server. Define the PSERVER.NLM name, the number of the
printer serviced by the NIC within this PSERVER.NLM, and the destination on
the NIC you want the print jobs to pass through.
Configuration Print Path
The NIC print path is the path a print job takes when it reaches the network
adapter. First the job goes to a destination/queue (e.g. d1prn) where it then
passes through an associated model (e.g. m1) for extra processing and
logpath (e.g. l1) for job and printer logging. Finally the job reaches the NIC's
I/O port (e.g. PRN) where it passes through to the attached printer. The "Print
Path" form displays one destination's settings at a time. From here, you can
then select another destination or you can go directly to an I/O port to
configure port settings.
Destination Settings
Name
Name of the destination. The default destination queue names are d1prn,
d2prn, d3prn, and d4prn.
Back Channel
I/O port to receive printer feedback when a print job passes through this
destination. By default d1prn, d2prn, d3prn, and d4prn have no backchannel.
Services
Define what type(s) of print services the destination will support. By Default all
services are enabled.
•socket. prints to a TCP port number (e.g. 4000) on the NIC.
•lpd. remote printing using the Line Printer Daemon.
•lpsched. System V printing using the "lp" command.
•rprinter. Novell's remote printer setup.
•pserver. Novell's PSERVER setup.
•netbios. prints from Windows stations relying on NetBIOS over TCP/IP.
•ftpd. prints using the File Transfer Protocol (FTP).
146
Chapter 6 Configuration Print Path
Selected Model
Defines the model configuration that is to be associated with the current
destination. The default model names are m1, m2, m3, m4, m5, m6, m7, and
m8.
Current Model Settings
Model Type
The option is available on the Print Model web page. For a description, see
page 147.
Banner Page
The option is available on the Print Model web page. For a description, see
page page 147.
Filter
The option is available on the Print Model web page. For a description, see
page 147.
Header String
The option is available on the Print Model web page. For a description, see
page 147.
Trailer String
The option is available on the on the Print Model web page. For a description,
see page 148.
Printer Configuration
The option is available on the Print Model web page. For a description, see
page 148.
Selected Log Path
This option defines the log path configuration that is to be associated with the
current destination.
Current Log Path Settings
147
Current Log Path Settings
Log Path Type
The option is available on the Log Path web page. For a description, see page
148.
Log Path Port
The option is available on the Log Path web page. For a description, see page
149.
Configuration - Print Model
Name
Name of the model. The default model names are m1, m2, m3, m4, m5, m6,
m7, and m8.
Model Type
Define what processing (if any) will be performed on print jobs passing
through the associated destination. If set to "raw", the job will not be touched
by the network adapter.
Banner Page
Tell the Ethernet Interface to produce a banner page with each print job. The
type of banner page data can be text. You can also specify whether the
banner page should come at the front or the end of a print job.
Filter
Specify whether the Ethernet Interface is to add carriage returns to print jobs
passing through that contain solitary linefeeds. This is common with Unix text
jobs resulting in stair-stepped output.
Header String
Define an escape sequence to be sent to the printer before each print job. For
example, you may want to send a sequence to print the job in landscape
mode or to a certain tray on the printer. You can specify up to four separate
sequences per header string. The Ethernet Interface will execute them in
order from top to bottom. If specifying fewer than four sequences, be sure to
start at the top leaving undefined fields at the bottom.
The most common sequences are listed on the form:
•Print landscape - tells the printer to print in landscape mode.
•Print portrait - tells the printer to print in portrait mode.
148
Chapter 6 Configuration - Log Path
Trailer String
Define an escape sequence to be sent to the printer after each print job. For
example, you may want to send a sequence to add a formfeed so you don't
have to manually press the formfeed button on the printer. You may also want
to tell the printer to reset itself in case you have set a header string which tells
the printer to do something special with the job. You can specify up to three
separate sequences per trailer string. The Ethernet Interface executes them
in order from top to bottom. If specifying fewer than four sequences, be sure
to start at the top leaving undefined fields at the bottom.
The most common sequences are listed on the form:
•PCL Reset - tells the printer to reset itself once the data completes
•End of Transmission (EOT) - tells the printer to force the end of the job
•Formfeed - tells the printer to do a formfeed at the end of the data.
Printer Configuration
Specify a printer configuration number to be loaded before processing the
print job. This ability to associate a printer configurations to a logical printer
model allows you to define up to four unique and independent printer
personalities in a single printer. Using this feature, you effectively have four
different printers in one.
To associate a printer configuration to the currently selected destination
queue, just select the desired printer configuration number from the drop
down list. Once a printer configuration have been associated with a
destination queue, any print job sent to that destination queue name will
cause the printer to load the associated printer configuration before
processing the print job.
Configuration - Log Path
Name
Name of the log path. The default names are l1, l2, l3, l4, l5, l6, l7, and l8.
Logpath Type
Define what type of log information will be tracked for each print job passing
through the associated destination. The types are:
•job - job ID, username, etc.
•user - user ID and three messages per job about the start and finish
•checksum - value used when troubleshooting integrity of data transferred
•printer - miscellaneous messages from the printer
•i/o port - status of the printer based on the port interface signals.
Parallel Port (PRN)
149
Logpath Port
Define where logging information for print jobs passing through the
associated destination will be reported. The choices are:
•prn - reported to the PRN port
•none - don't report any logging information
•TCP/IP port - to a TCP port number (specified in the edit field)
•syslog - to a host (specified by the IP address in the edit field) running a
SYSLOG daemon
•email - to an e-mail address (specified by the e-mail address and the
SMTP server IP address edit fields)
NOTE: The values defined in Logpath Type and Logpath Port are common
among all destination queue.
Default: no logging turned on.
Configuration - I/O Port
I/O port configuration can be reached through a Print Path destination form
(by clicking on a port) or through the I/O Port option under the Configuration
Menu.
Parallel Port (PRN)
The parallel port on the Ethernet Interface can have its throughput altered by
selecting a particular “Mode”. The choices are:
•default - normal throughput rate which will work with most printers
•fast - increase data transfer rate
•test, non-printing - emulate an attached printer though no printer is
actually attached
150
Chapter 6 Configuration – SNMP
Configuration – SNMP
The SNMP Configuration form allows you to configure SNMP trap managers
and the e-mail alert features of NIC. It allows you to configure how SNMP
alerts are processed by a SNMP trap manager, an Unix syslog logging
daemon, and/or have e-mail notifications sent. Up to 10 SNMP trap managers
and e-mail recipients may be specified. Individual alerts fall into one of 12
alert group categories, providing the ability to filter alert notices as desired.
SNMP Manager Alert Posting Settings
Specifies whether alerts from the enabled alert group categories for this
configuration will be sent to the SNMP manager. If this option is enabled, the
following information must be entered:
•SNMP Manager IP Address - specifies the IP address of the SNMP trap
manager
•UDP Port - specifies the UDP port number used by the SNMP trap
manager for receiving trap messages. Acceptable values are 162, and
49152 through 65535
•Community Name - up to 15 character string specifying the trap
community name.
Syslog Alert Posting Settings
Specifies whether alerts from the enabled alert group categories for this
configuration will be sent to the Unix syslog daemon. If this option is enabled,
the syslog daemon IP address must be entered in the syslog field in the
Logpath Port section under the PrintPath menu item.
Default: Disabled
E-mail Alert Posting Settings
Specifies whether alerts from the enabled alert group categories for this
configuration will be sent to the specified e-mail address. If this option is
enabled, the following information must be entered:
•E-mail Address - specifies an e-mail address to which alert information
will be sent
•Short E-mail Format - specifies whether a short (15-80 character) alert e-
mail message should be sent.
If enabled, the message will contain the alert description, the severity
level, and device name (unless the length of the message exceeds the
Short E-mail Message Length, in which case the message will be
truncated.
Parallel Port (PRN)
151
If disabled, the message will contain additional information including the
device name and location, alert description, alert group, and alert severity
level, and printer status.
Default: Disabled
•Short E-mail Message Length - Specifies the maximum size of the short
e-mail message. Acceptable values are 15 to 80 characters.
Default: 80 characters
•Send Test Message - Provides a way to test the validity of the e-mail
address/SMTP server address. If checked, a test message will be sent to
the specified e-mail address when the submit button is pressed.
Default: All alert groups are disabled by default.
If the alert message is to be sent to a cellular phone or pager, the Short E-mail
Format option should be enabled. Once this option is enabled, you may
specify the maximum e-mail message length (15-80 characters). When
enabled, the message will contain the alert description, the severity level, and
device name (unless the length of the message exceeds the Short E-mail
Message Length, in which case the message will be truncated).
If the Short E-mail format is disabled, the message will contain additional
information including the device name and location, alert description, alert
group, alert severity level, and printer status.
To test the validity of the e-mail address and the SMTP server address,
enable the Send Test Message option. If the Send Test Message box is
checked, a test message will be sent to the specified e-mail address when the
submit button is pressed.
Alert Groups
Specifies which alert groups are enabled for reporting for this configuration.
When an alert occurs that is contained in one of the enabled alert groups, it
will be posted to the specified SNMP manager, Unix syslog daemon, and/or
e-mail address. The following table describes which printer events belongs to
which Alert Group.
Default: All alert groups are disabled by default.
152
Chapter 6 Configuration – SNMP
Table 13. Alert Groups and Printer Events
Alert Group Printer Events
Offline Printer is Offline
Hold Print Time Out
Warning COMM Check
Invalid Address
CU Time Out
CU Not Enabled
File System Full
File Exist
Hex Dump Mode
Half Speed Mode
Printer Warm
Print Head Warm
2B-Toner Density Too High
2C-Toner Density Too Low
Media Input Load Paper
Paper Out Time Out
Fanfold Paper Empty
No Fanfold Paper
63-CutSheet Feeder Fail
Cutsheet Pick Miss
No Paper Tray
Paper Jam at Entrance
Cutsheet Cover Open
Cutsheet Paper Empty
Tray Mismatch
Media Output Stacker Full
Stacker Jam Time Out
Stacker Full Time Out
Stacker Fault Time Out
Stacker Jam
Stacker Fault
Stack Over Flow
Stack Under Flow
Stacker Fail
Stacker Interlock Fail
Stacker Not Ready
Parallel Port (PRN)
153
Media Path Clear Paper Jam
Paper Jam Time Out
Paper Jam Fuser
Paper Jam Exit
Cutsheet Path Open
Paper Jam at Drum
Paper Jam at Fuser
Paper Jam at Exit
Tractor MTR FWD Speed Error
Tracker MTR BKWD Speed Error
Paper Jam at Entrance
Cutsheet Motor Fail
Cutsheet Feeder Fail
Clear Jam at Fuser Input
Clear Jam at Fuser Exit
Clear Jam Near TOF Lever
Marker Ribbon Stall Time Out
Ribbon Ink Out
Ribbon Stall
Ribbon Drive
Shuttle Over Speed
Ribbon Fault
Ribbon Detected
Print Head Up
Ribbon Broken
Ribbon Load Bad
Ribbon Take-up Full
2A-Toner Empty
Add Toner
Install Toner Cup
Cutter Cutter Fault
Cutter Fail
Barcode Barcode Fail Specification
Barcode Quiet Zone Too Small
Barcode Improper Data Format
Scanner Unscannable Check Media
Poor Scanning Check Head and Heat
Poor Scanning Inspect Head
Poor Scanning Check Media
Contrast Too Low Check Media
Intervention These are error messages that need
some kind of user intervention to solve
them.
Consumable Ribbon Low
Toner Low
Table 13. Alert Groups and Printer Events
Alert Group Printer Events
154
Chapter 6 Configuration - Administration
NOTE: Not all of the alerts are available on all of the printers. The alerts
available for monitoring will depend on the printer type and the
options installed on the printer.
Configuration - Administration
The Administration Configuration form is broken down into general print
server-related settings and password security.
System Information
The System Information form allows you to specify the following information
about the printer:
•Name - name given to the print server in Novell and Windows
environments. The defaul name is "M_xxxxxx" where "xxxxxx" equals the
last six digits of the network adapter's Ethernet address. (e.g. M_031C1A)
•Description - optional field to help identify the printer’s features and
capabilities
•Location - optional field to help identify the printer’s physical location
•Contact - optional field to help identify the individual or group responsible
for the printer.
Passwords
Only a user with root privileges can alter the NIC's settings. Guest users can
only view settings but cannot alter them. Both types of users can be assigned
passwords. To change a password, type in the old password in the "Old" field.
Then type the new password twice: once in the "New" field, and once in the
"Confirm" field.
Default: No passwords for root or guest users.
Label Label Present
Gap Not Detected
Table 13. Alert Groups and Printer Events
Alert Group Printer Events
Passwords
155
Configuration - System
The System Configuration form allows you to change the NIC 's operation
mode. Select "Reboot" to re-power the print server. Select "Default" to reset
the print server and have it come up with factory default settings.
Status
The Status menu items allow you to view the current status of both the printer
and the network. The submenu items available are as follows:
•I/O Port - this menu item allows you to view the current status of the
printer, including the print jobs that are queued or are currently active.
•Network - this menu item allows you to view the current status of the
network connection.
Status - I/O Port
The I/O Port Status form allows you to remotely see what is happening on the
NIC I/O port. The port's status and a list of active and queued jobs will be
displayed. You can cancel a job (as long as you have permission to) by
clicking on the Cancel icon beside the desired job. If you see "waiting" in the
"Status" line, this indicates the network adapter is either waiting for data from
the host or for feedback from the printer. If you see "blocked" in this line, this
indicates the printer is not allowing the NIC to send anymore data. The printer
could be busy processing data it has already received or it could be in an error
state.
The printer status display is automatically refreshed every minute.
NOTE: You cannot cancel a print job with an IPDS Emulation. Do not click
the Cancel icon.
Status - Network
This form allows you to view the current status of the network. The statistical
data provided is broken down by network protocol. You can use this form to
troubleshoot network-related problems.
156
Chapter 6 Status - Network
157
7TCP/IP Configuration
TCP/IP NIC Configuration
This configuration procedure assumes you have an existing network and
TCP/IP attached to a Windows 95/98/NT, Unix, or other machine.
You will configure network printing by adding the necessary TCP/IP values to
the NIC and associating the Print Server as an output port for a Windows
printer on a 95/98/NT client or server, or to a print queue or logical printer in
Unix, AS/400 , or HP e3000.
Before You Begin
1. You must obtain the IP address and subnet mask to be used for the NIC.
In addition, a gateway value may be needed. A gateway is a device that
knows how to find other TCP/IP devices on other sections of the network
that may need to know about the P5000LJ printer.
2. The NetBEUI/NetBIOS protocol may be used to define the network port
for a Windows printer, for example. (Use the following sequence: Start,
Settings, Printers, Add, network printer, network path or queue name...)
NetBEUI/NetBIOS does not route, which means you must use it on a
single network segment, but this setup is ideal for a single network or a
small network.
158
Chapter 7 TCP/IP NIC Configuration
Creating Aliases
All TCP/IP systems are designed to make multiple operations easy by using
an alias, which is a logical name to IP/MAC address association. This step is
important in the Unix world if DNS (Domain Name Services) is being used; it
can also simplify the other environments.
Locate the
hosts
file. (If you are using Windows 95/98 and have never had a
hosts
file, you can create one by using Notepad or any other text editor and
saving it to the Windows directory.) Edit the file to add your new P5000LJ
Printer, and save the file. Rebooting is not necessary.
Location of
hosts
file:
Windows 95/98 windows
NT windows/system32/drivers/etc
Unix /etc
HP e3000 host.net.sys
Example of entries in a
hosts
file:
10.200.30.123 printer1
10.200.30.130 accounting
192.168.2.33 next_state
10.200.30.18 MIS
In most Unix systems using DNS, a
hosts
table is constructed as shown
above. The file
nsswitch.conf
or its equivalent is then edited to associate a
MAC (hardware address) to an IP address in the
hosts
file. In doing this, any
individual client workstation needs only a single address entry—specifically,
the DNS host address—as a
ping
to printer1 is actually resolved by the DNS
machine and returned to the client workstation. This means an administrator
need maintain only one
hosts
file for all to use, making updating central.
For peer to peer and small networks, using a local
hosts
table on each
workstation can function in place of DNS.
Note Make the names easy to remember but descriptively useful.
Methods For Setting TCP/IP Values
159
Methods For Setting TCP/IP Values
Methods available to set TCP/IP values vary based the operating
environment (see Table 14).
•arp. Easy to use but cannot be routed, so printer and host computer must
be on same network segment. Requires the use of print server MAC.
•bootp. Workhorse method. Can be routed, and allows assigning of IP
address, subnet mask, and gateway value in one step.
•DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). Easy in concept, but a
poor choice for printers, because printers must always have the same IP
values. If the MAC value is known, however, DHCP can be used to
facilitate the location of print servers.
If you are unsure which method to use, you can use the front panel of the
printer to set the TCP/IP values without a live network connection.
For bootp, arp, and NetBEUI/NetBIOS, the MAC address of the NIC is
required. If the NIC is pre-installed, the MAC address can be obtained by
using the P5000LJ printer diagnostic print test
E-Net Test Page, or by using the printer control panel to view the MAC
Address value in the ETHERNET PARAMS configuration submenu (see page
125 for details). In addition, a label attached to the rear of the printer shows
the MAC address, which reads 00:80:72:xx:yy:zz. This value is also known as
the “hardware address” or “ethernet address.”
The DHCP is useful to locate a print server. DHCP generally is not useful for
using other than NetBEUI/NetBIOS, as most queueing mechanisms need to
know the static location (IP address) of a printer, and with each DHCP power
on cycle will likely change.
Table 14. Available TCP/IP Setup Methods
Operating Environment arp bootp DHCP
Unix, HP e3000, Windows NT, OS/2 
Windows 95/98
AS/400 *
Note *AS/400 can use bootp as of OS/400 v4.3
160
Chapter 7 TCP/IP NIC Configuration
Assign TCP/IP Values
Method 1: Using the Printer Control Panel
All of the basic TCP/IP values can easily be set and stored in the NIC via the
printer front panel under the ETHERNET PARAMS menu. Refer to
“Configuration Using The Printer Control Panel” on page 68 for detailed
instructions.
Set the IP Address, Subnet Mask or Gateway Values, then press the ON
LINE key to store those values in the NIC. These steps do not require the
printer to be connected to your network.
After setting the TCP/IP values, connect the printer to the designated hub or
switch port via UTP cable. With the P5000LJ printer powered on, use a
ping
to
the assigned IP Address for the NIC:
•Windows 95/98/NT, OS/2. Open a DOS shell (or OS/2 window) and type:
ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
using the IP value you assigned above.
•AS/400. At a command prompt, type:
ping ‘xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx’
(IP address must be in single quotes).
•Unix. At a terminal session command prompt, type:
ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.
If you receive a “reply received from…” message, then proceed. If you get a
“destination unreachable” message or “no reply from...” message, recheck
values and cables you have used.
Once you have established a positive
ping
response, you may wish to use a
browser to change or set items (such as the workgroup name to match that of
your client network), or to change other values or names or check printer
status. To do this, open your browser. In the URL line, enter the IP Address of
the NIC and press ENTER. When the P5000LJ Series Printer Web Page
displays, click on “Configuration.” When prompted for a user name and ID,
enter
root
and
press ENTER. Press ENTER again for a blank password. You
may now change the workgroup name and other values.
If your web browser is set to use a proxy (or you don’t know), use a telnet
command session order to finish your setup using store and set commands
(refer to Chapter 13, “Commands”).
Use the following example of a telnet session to change the Windows
workgroup name in the NIC from “workgroup” (the default) to “Acme.”
Note If you made a
hosts
table alias name entry (or set up DNS) you can
ping
the
alias instead of having to remember the actual IP Address. Similarly, the
alias can be substituted for the URL in telnet sessions or Web browser
sessions.
Assign TCP/IP Values
161
For Windows 95/98/NT or OS/2, open a DOS window. For AS/400, start from
a command prompt. For Unix, start from a terminal session prompt:
telnet xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
> login
> user ‘root’
(default user name for configuration)
> anything
(default is no password)
> welcome root user
(sample response)
> store pserver smb workgroup Acme
> ok
> reset
(print server will need about 30 seconds to reset)
session disconnected
You should now be able to browse the NIC in “Network Neighborhood,” which
has resources d1prn, d2prn, d3prn, d4prn.
•The TCP/IP values are not stored in the printer configuration, so it is not
necessary to use the printer configuration menu for the above.
•If the printer is attached to your network via UTP cable and you entered a
gateway value, then executing the E-Net Test Page will verify your
settings and execute a
ping
to the gateway. A “good” response is “gw-IP
is alive” which assures you of a functioning network connection
(cable is good, connection is functional, values are correct, all that
remains is setting up printing).
Method 2: Setting TCP/IP Values Using A Network
Start with the printer powered off. Have the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Gateway values ready.
For arp assignment, the syntax is:
arp -s ipaddress MAC_address
Example using Windows 95/98/NT:
On a DOS command prompt, enter:
arp -s 192.168.20.20 00-80-72-09-00-5F
(set the static arp value; be certain to replace the IP Address of this
example with a valid one of your own)
list arp -a
(to ensure you have the “static entry”)
Example using Unix (not AIX):
On a command prompt, enter:
arp -s 192.168.20.20 00:80:72:09:00:5F
(set the static arp value; be certain to replace the IP Address of this
example with a valid one of your own)
Example using AIX:
On a command prompt, enter:
arp -s ether 192.168.20.20 00:80:72:09:00:5F
(set the static arp value; be certain to replace the IP Address of this
example with a valid one of your own)
162
Chapter 7 TCP/IP NIC Configuration
Now power the printer up, and wait a minute or more for the NIC to obtain the
address above.
Test by issuing the command
ping IP_address
.
If you do not get a positive
ping
response, check your arp table entry, and
check that the printer is on the same “wire” as you (the same IP address
range, different only in the value after the last period). Verify that you have not
typed an IP address that you or someone else is already using. If you have,
type the command
arp -d IP_address
at a DOS prompt to delete the
incorrect entry and then type the correct value.
If you do get a positive
ping
response, remove the static arp entry (to avoid
conflict) by using either telnet or a web browser. At a DOS prompt, type the
command
arp -d 192.168.20.20
(with your own IP Address value in
place of this one). Then store this value into the NIC.
Telnet
Using a DOS window (or a third party tool capable of a telnet session), use
the following:
telnet xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
or
hosts_table_name
login: root
(default)
password:
(no password is default)
welcome root user>
(ignore warning messages about differences)
store TCP/IP 1 addr from current
(save the arp assigned value)
list TCP/IP
(you will see your IP address and a subnet address. If the
subnet address is incorrect, use the following command to modify it)
store TCP/IP 1 mask 255.255.255.0
(enter your mask value in place
of this one)
If you have a gateway value, enter it now using the following commands:
store TCP/IP add default router gateway_value 1
reset
(after a minute or so, you should be able to ping the print server)
Note Windows uses hyphens to separate the values in the MAC address; Unix
and others use colons.
Using BOOTP
163
Web Browser
Initiate the Web browser and enter the IP Address or
hosts
table name in the
URL line.
Click on “Configuration.”
Log in as
root
, no password.
Enter the values you need for subnet mask and gateway and click “Submit.”
Delete the static arp entry: at a DOS prompt, type the command
arp -d
192.168.20.20
(with your own IP Address value in place of this one). Then
click on “System Administration” and “Reset Adapter” to store the values
.
Using BOOTP
BOOTP allows you to assign an IP address to the NIC upon bootup. In
addition, the BOOTP server can provide additional details such as a default
router/gateway address. To configure the NIC with its TCP/IP settings using
BOOTP, complete the following steps.
1. On your BOOTP server, make an entry in the /etc/bootptab file for the
NIC.
Syntax:
NICIPname:\
:sm=netmask:\
:hd=homedirectory:\
:bf=null:\
:gw=defaultgateway:\
:ht=ethernet:\
:ha=ethernetaddress:\
:ip=ipaddress:\
:ts=timeserver:\
:to=timezone:
Example:
spike:\
:sm=255.255.255.0:\
:hd=/usr/null:\
:bf=null:\
:gw=192.75.11.1:\
:ht=ethernet:\
:ha=008072070060:\
:ip=192.75.11.9:\
:ts=192.75.11.7:\
:to=25200:
Note Windows 95/98 pre-winsoc2 TCP/IP has a bug in which an arp entry will
not be created unless a valid arp entry exists in the arp table on the client
you are using. To ensure you have a valid arp entry, p
ing
your own
workstation in the DOS window and type the command
arp -a
to view the
arp table before using the
arp -s
command.
164
Chapter 7 TCP/IP NIC Configuration
2. Turn the NIC on so that it immediately sends out a BOOTP request. Wait
one minute to allow the IP address assignment process to complete. You
should see the STAT LED (on the NIC) slow down indicating it knows
about an IP address to use.
3. Try to ping the NIC IP address from a network station to see if it can be
seen on your network.
Note You will be able to communicate with the NIC from network stations on
different subnets if the print server has been told about its default router/
gateway in the BOOTP response from the BOOTP server.
165
8HP e3000/NIC
Configuration
Overview
This chapter details the HP e3000 Host Configuration setup and
NIC setup.
HP e3000 / MPE-XL / MPE / iX: Host Configuration
Follow the instructions below to configure printing to a NIC by using TCP/IP
print to socket, sometimes referred to as “native tcpip mode.” The
configuration parameters are set via entries in the file “npconfig”
(npconfig.pub.sys).
1. If you have not already done so, use program sysgen (sysgen.pub.sys) to
add the necessary logical device descriptions. Create one logical device
for each P5000LJ Series Printer you wish to add:
a. log in as
MANAGER.SYS
b. enter the command
:run sysgen.pub.sys
c. at the
>
prompt, enter
io
to start the I/O configurator
d. enter the command
io> ad ldev=xx;id=HPTCPJD;path=NONE
HPTCPJD
is the HP-supplied logical network device type.
e. enter the
ld xx
configuration command to view the addition, where
xx
is the logical device number you chose in step d.
f. enter the commands:
io> hold
(
to save the I/O configuration)
io> exit
(
to exit the I/O configurator)
Note With the release of MPE/iX version 5.5 and higher, it is now possible to use
the spooler on the HP e3000 to control printing on devices attached to a
network. The Native Mode Spooler Reference Manual (HP P/N 32650-
90166, Edition 5, Sept. 1998 or later) and Configuring and Managing MPE/
iX Internet Services (HP P/N 32650-90835) are essential references to
assist you in this configuration.
166
Chapter 8 HP e3000 / MPE-XL / MPE / iX: Host Configuration
g. at the SYSGEN prompt, enter the commands:
SYSGEN> keep
SYSGEN> exit
h. to have the new configuration take effect, reboot the system with the
command, start norecovery. It is also possible to configure the
device online by using the command, ioconfig.
2. Identify the IP address, Subnet mask, and Gateway value to be used for
each NIC. These values are necessary for any network printing. Often,
only the IP address value will vary from printer to printer.
You can assign these values to NIC by entering the values in the printer
control panel (see page 68), or by using the
bootpd
process as described
in Configuring and Managing MPE/iX Internet Services. If you use
bootpd
,
create an entry in the
bootpd
configuration file for each NIC you are
adding. For example:
printer1: ht=ether: ha=00807209yyyy:
ip=xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:\
sm=xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx: gw=xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:
In this example, the
ha
value is the MAC address of NIC being added.
Replace
yyyy
with the last four digits of the MAC address for the
individual print server. If NIC is pre-installed, the MAC address can be
obtained by using the P5000LJ Series printer diagnostic print test E-Net
Test Page, or by using the printer control panel to view the MAC Address
value in the ETHERNET PARAMS configuration submenu (displayed on
page 125). In addition, a label attached to the rear of the printer will show
the MAC address, which reads 00:80:72:xx:yy:zz.
3. Configure the printer so the active emulation is PCL, PCL/PGL, or
PCL/VGL, depending on your printer software. This configuration should
also be set as the printer’s power-up configuration.
4. Log in to NIC using a telnet session. You can use telnet on your HP
e3000, or another workstation with TCP/IP installed (such as Windows,
etc.), or via a web browser session. Use the following commands to
establish a reverse communication channel for PJL to function:
a.
telnet xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
or
telnet host_name
(example:
telnet 192.192.192.192
or
telnet LJ50001
)
b. log in as user name
root
, no password (or by using the user name
and password you may have stored in the adapter).
Note Be sure to replace the
xxx
fields with the correct IP Address, Subnet
mask, and Gateway mask values you are using.
Note The
telnet host_name
command will only work if the host's table entry
(with the
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
format has been defined in the host file of the
HP e3000).
167
c.
set dest d1prn backchannel prn
save
list dest
(this will allow you to see your change)
exit
5. The npconfig file is read each time the printer commands
spooler
nn;start
or
startspool nn
are used, meaning if corrections are
needed to the file it is not necessary to restart the HP e3000, only the
spooler. Stop the spooler by using a
stopspool
command, then restart it
using one of the commands described above.
Create or modify the npconfig file. As a starting point, you can use the
system file npconfig.samp.
For each logical network printer that points to a physical NIC using the
npconfig file entries, make the following minimum entries (assume a
logical device 201 has been set in sysgen
)
:
201 ( network_address = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
tcp_port_number = 9100
pjl_supported = true
snmp_enabled = false
jam_recovery = false
data_timeout = 30 )
The entry
snmp_enabled = false
must be entered as shown.
If you have other HP LaserJet printers already configured while using a global
setup_file
entry, and you experience font or other difficulties with the
P5000LJ line matrix printers, create a separate setup file which is empty to
override the global entries. This may be required since the P5000LJ printer
uses PCL Level II, which is a minimal set of PCL, and the typical HP e3000
global setup file may contain PCL commands beyond those in PCL II. This will
not affect your ability to use the P5000LJ printer effectively. The syntax for the
setup file is
setup_file
= name.
Use npconfig entries
banner_header
and
banner_trailer
for banner or
trailer pages. Be aware that the default value is “true,” so banners will print by
default.
168
Chapter 8 NIC Configuration Verification
NIC Configuration Verification
1. Print the Current Configuration in the printer and verify the installed
Function Code. Install the latest version via ftp if not present and reenter
all printer configurations. The Function Code version installed is listed as
"Program File Version xxxx Part No. xxxxxx" at the top of the
configuration printout. Ethernet Version is a few lines below the program
File version on the configuration printout. The Ethernet firmware version
must be 1.1.3 or later and is only copied to the printer when the Function
Code is loaded via the Network Interface (via ftp).
2. On the Current Configuration printout:
a. Under Host Interface, verify Ethernet is selected and change the
buffer size to 8K (from 16K).
b. Under Ethernet Parameters, verify the IP address, Subnet mask, and
Gateway are correctly listed.
c. If you are not using Novell or NetBIOS for network printing, disable
Novell and NetBIOS under Ethernet parameters. This avoids
unnecessary protocol broadcasts.
3. Print the E-Net Test Page as follows:
a. OFFLINE / CONFIG CONTROL
b. LEFT ARROW twice to PRINTER DIAGNOSTICS
c. DOWN ARROW to PRINTER TESTS
d. DOWN ARROW again to SHIFT RECYCLE
e. LEFT ARROW to E-NET TEST PAGE (or, if something else displays,
press left arrow repeatedly until E-Net Test Page is displayed).
4. Verify the Subnet mask (Netmask) is correct in two locations on the E-Net
Test Page: under Network Information and TCP/IP Routing Table. The
Netmask must be the same in both locations.
For example, if the desired Netmask is listed as 255.255.255.0
under Network Information, and if the Netmask is listed as
255.255.255.255 under TCP/IP Routing Table, then the Netmask
does not match and you must correct the Netmask.
To correct an incorrectly associated Subnet mask (Netmask) complete
the following steps:
a. Take the printer offline.
b. Modify the Gateway from the front panel to the default address of
0.0.0.0.
Note When going through the menus, continue pressing the arrow key until the
menu you want displays.
169
c. Place the printer online and wait for the front panel to display “E-Net
Ready.” This will write the Gateway address to the network I/F
NvRam.
d. Take the printer offline and enter the desired Gateway address.
e. Place the printer online and wait for the front panel to display “E-Net
Ready.” This will write the Gateway address to the network I/F
NvRam.
f. Print E-Net Test Page and verify both listed Netmasks are the same
and that xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is alive is printed under Default
Gateway Ping Test (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx = Gateway IP address).
5. Inspect “Printer Destinations” on the E-Net Test Page. Reprint the E-Net
Test Page and verify the backchannel is set to prn for the d1prn queue.
On an HP e3000 host, prn must be listed under BACK for the d1prn
queue so that Printer Job Language (PJL) will operate properly. (PJL
must be operational for Page Level Recovery [PLR] to function.) The
backchannel for the d1prn printer queue can be set with a telnet session
from a PC running a DOS session as shown below:
C:\telnet 15.31.40.147
Network Printer Server Version 1.1.3 (15.31.40.147)
login: root
Password: (carriage return)
Welcome root User
15.31.40.147:root> set dest d1prn backchannel prn
ok
15.31.40.147:root> save
15.31.40.147:root> exit
6. The npconfig.pub.sys file is loaded each time the spooler is started.
Verify the npconfig.pub.sys file contains the (pjl_supported),
(snmp_enabled), and (data_timeout) lines for each P5000LJ
printer. Here is a typical list of the npconfig.pub.sys entry for a P5000LJ
printer:
npconfig.pub.sys Listing Comments
6 Network Address = 192.6.1.71 IP address - no leading zeros
tcp port number = 9100 This line optional
setup file = SETUP6.PUB.SYS Optional - specific setup file for LDev6
pjl supported = TRUE Required for PLJ to function
snmp enabled = FALSE Required
data timeout = 30 Required
banner header = false Optional - turns off headers
banner trailer = false Optional - turns off trailers
170
Chapter 8 Methods Of Adjusting Paper Position
The line setup_file = filename is the file that contains
customized setup strings to specify the printer operating mode for this
logical device. This file must be an unnumbered file. When no setup file is
specified, the default MPE/iX environment or the global setup file is
applied at print time to the printer. The spooler will send the contents of
the setup file, even if it is empty, which overrides its own default
initialization. So, for example, if you want the pitch to be determined by
the printer’s front panel setting (e.g., CPI 10, etc.), set the setup_file
to an empty file.
7. Whenever any parameters are changed (PCL-II, Host Interface, etc.) the
configuration must be saved. Then, the saved configuration must be
designated as the Power Up Configuration. If this step is not performed,
the printer will revert to the factory default configuration at power up
(parallel I/F – not Ethernet) and communication with the host would
become non-functional.
As we have changed some configuration values in this procedure (Host
Interface Buffer size), you must save this configuration to a numbered
location (1-8) and designate that configuration as the power up
configuration. Failure to save and designate the saved configuration as
the desired power up configuration will result in problems, such as loss of
communication, after powering off/on the printer.
Methods Of Adjusting Paper Position
When the HP e3000 spooler is active and the paper needs to be adjusted (the
print is too far up or too far down on the page) or replaced, use one of the
methods below to set the paper position. You can also defer printing or
temporarily stop the spooler (stopspool nn) to ensure no print jobs will
release.
Method 1
Place the printer offline from the control panel, open the printer platen, and
manually roll paper back and forth as required via the knob on the tractor
shaft. To put the printer back into active service, close the platen, press
CLEAR, and place back online. This procedure is safe at any time.
Note P5000LJ printers have Line Feed (LF), Form Feed (FF), and Set TOF keys
on the printer panel. These keys are intended to be used to adjust paper
position before the start of any print job.
When the HP e3000 spooler owns the printer, the FF, LF, and Set TOF
keys do not operate. If you press any of these keys, the message “Invalid
Key - Press View” displays. (If you want to check your output, press the
View key.) When the HP e3000 spooler does not own the printer, these
keys have their normal function.
Method 2
171
Method 2
Place the printer offline from the control panel. Press and hold either the
SHIFT+Up arrow or SHIFT+Down arrow to “micro-step” the paper up or down
as needed. Place the printer back online.
Using Page Level Recovery On P5000LJ Printers
The native mode spooler on MPE/iX 5.5 (and later) supports Page Level
Recovery (PLR). PLR provides the ability to restart printing at any page of a
document due to device problems or a suspended spooler. (Refer to the HP
e3000 MPE/iX Native Mode Spooler Reference Manual for more information.)
Clarification on how it is handled for P5000LJ printers is described below.
There are three types of PLR that can occur, and all three use silent run
techniques. That is, the data is sent to the printer and the printer interprets it
but does not start actual printing until the printer reaches a target starting
page specified by the spooler (e.g., the page following the last one printed).
Note The operation of the View key has been enhanced to include a new
function. Normally, pressing the View key will move paper six inches up so
the print can be viewed, and a second depression of the View key will
move the paper down into the print position. This function is helpful when
aligning forms.
The new function of the View key is invoked with a long depression of the
View key. When the View key is pressed and held, paper will advance
three complete forms, allowing tearoff at the rear of the printer. After
advancing paper three forms for tearoff, placing the printer ONLINE will
move paper downward two forms and printing will resume.
Note One feature of the Printer Job Language (PJL) spooler is the ability to
keep track of pages printed as a part of Page Level Recovery. On a paper
jam or paper out condition, the printer control panel displays the page
number counted.
172
Chapter 8 Using Page Level Recovery On P5000LJ Printers
Restarting at a user-specified page number in a command
Processing of a spool file can be suspended and then resumed. It can be
suspended by using the spooler command with the suspend parameter
or by using the suspendspool command. It can be resumed with the
spooler command with the resume parameter or by using the
resumespool command. When the spool file resumes printing, it can start
exactly where it left off or at another specified page.
For P5000LJ printers, the optional offset parameter in the spooler
command can only be used to specify an absolute offset (i.e., absence of a +
or – sign). When the offset parameter is not used, printing resumes where
it stopped. When the offset parameter is used, a silent run (PLR) will occur
up until the specified starting place.
For example, to suspend spooling and to position 7 pages from the beginning
of the spool file, enter the following command:
spooler 6;suspend;offset=7
In this case, the absence of a + or – sign indicates an absolute offset from the
beginning of the spool file.
Because P5000LJ printers are typically connected to the network with the
NIC, many of the spooler commands (e.g., those described above) should be
avoided for mid-file suspension. This is because of two reasons: 1) a great
deal of data is buffered in the network process and must be completed, and,
2) the network connection can be dropped if the printer is ready to receive
data but no data is being sent. (Refer to the HP e3000 MPE/iX Native Mode
Spooler Reference Manual.)
Restarting at the point of interruption when a device
exception occurs
When a device exception occurs, this is an unexpected recovery situation. A
device exception includes things such as paper jams, load paper error, etc.
Assume that the P5000LJ printer is connected to the network with the NIC. In
order for PLR (silent run) to take place after a device exception and without
specifying spooler commands to restart, the printer must be power cycled
(e.g., after the jam). This is different from the way it may work with other HP
printers that support PLR and use an “internal” JetDirect interface. This is also
different from the way it works with the C256X printers that use the HP-IB
interface. This caveat may be one of the reasons it appears that PLR does not
work for P5000LJ printers. Note that printing will start with the page following
the last one printed.
Note The CIPER protocol devices (e.g., C256x using the HP-IB interface) allow
you to specify the offset parameter with the + or – sign. With spooled
network printers such as P5000LJ printers, unpredictable results will occur
if the offset parameter is used with the + or – sign.
MPE-XL / MPE / iX Typical Configuration
173
Restarting at the point of interruption when a particular
spool file is reprinted after being interrupted previously by a
command
In this case, a spool file is reprinted after being interrupted by a command
such as spoolf #0 nnn;defer. For P5000LJ printers, when the spool
file is undeferred, after being interrupted with the deferred option, a silent run
(PLR) will occur up until the page following the last one printed.
A spool file can also be interrupted with the spooler ldev; stop
command, but this command should be avoided for a P5000LJ printer
connected to the network with the NIC. This is due to network printing
problems with stopping mid-file server.
HP e3000 / MPE-XL / MPE / iX: DTC Configuration
MPE-XL / MPE / iX Typical Configuration
Within NMMGR follow the menu:
Open Config
DTS
Go to Profiles
Add or
Modify
Printer Type [22] (21, 22, or 26)
or Printer Type File Name _______
Line Speed [9600] (300 through 38400)
Record Width [132] (1 . . . 2048 bytes)
Modem Type [0] (0-None, 1-US, 2-Europe)
Parity [NONE] (None, Even, Odd, 0's, 1's)
Initially Spooled [Y] (Y,N)
Device Class . . . user's choice
Save Data
Prior Screen . . . twice
Go to DTC
Config Card
Assign Profile to LDEV
Save Data
Validate Link/DTX
174
Chapter 8 HP e3000 / MPE-XL / MPE / iX: DTC Configuration
After successful Validation, run SYSGEN to cross-validate the DTS
configuration with the system configuration. In order for any TIO changes to
take effect, you must reboot the system.
Within SYSGEN
sysgen> io
io> LD
io> HO
sysgen> K . . . (Keep configuration)
Note Ensure that the P5000LJ Printer configuration matches the system baud
rate and parity.
175
9Windows Configuration
Overview
This chapter details a complete Windows configuration setup including:
1. Identifying the NIC on the network using TCP/IP as the underlying
protocol
2. Configuring the NIC with its mandatory TCP/IP settings (IP address and
subnet mask)
3. Configuring a new printer on the Windows station
Windows Environment Description
The NIC supports network printing under Windows environments by using
TCP/IP. In a Windows NT setup, pure TCP/IP is used as the network
protocol whereas with Windows 95 or Windows 98 , NetBIOS over TCP/IP
is used.
Figure 15 shows two of the most common Windows setups you will see with
the NIC. The ideal configuration is a network printer defined on the NT server
to be shared by Windows 95 clients. However, any Windows station can also
go directly to the NIC.
176
Chapter 9 Windows NIC Configuration
Figure 15. Windows Integration
Windows NIC Configuration
The IP address and subnet mask are mandatory TCP/IP settings and are
needed before the print server can be detected on the network. There are
also additional optional settings. This section offers alternative methods for
configuring your NIC in a Windows environment and mentions some of the
more common optional settings available.
Mandatory
Since TCP/IP is used for Windows printing, the NIC must be configured with a
minimum of an IP address and subnet mask before it can be seen on the
network.
Optional
Additional settings, like routing entries, can be configured. This allows
communication across subnets when no other router exists.
Configuration of the NIC can be done from the printer control panel, Web
browser, or host commands.
Win 95 Win 95
Win 95
NT Server
Win 95
Win 95
IP Router
Communicating Across Routers
177
Communicating Across Routers
Since Windows environments rely on TCP/IP to communicate with the NIC,
crossing routers becomes an issue.
After following one of the NIC configuration methods mentioned, you should
be able to communicate only with the print server from the same subnet. This
means any hosts across a router will not see your NIC. In order for hosts
across a router to see your NIC, store a default router/gateway within the print
server so that any packets destined for another subnet get forwarded to this
router automatically. The router (or series of routers) can then take over
ensuring the packets get to their final destination on another subnet on your
network.
To configure a default router/gateway within the NIC:
1. Load a Web browser on your Windows station and direct it to the URL
http://P5000LJIPaddress/networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html).
2. At the Network Configuration HTML form that displays, click in the first
field below the “Gateway” heading and type in the IP address of the
default router/gateway for the NIC subnet.
3. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower the print
server to make the new settings take effect.
Changing Workgroup Names
Windows environments define groups of related computers as “workgroups.”
By default, the NIC belongs to the workgroup called WORKGROUP.
However, you may want to change this to suit your network better. To do this:
1. Load a Web browser on your Windows station and direct it to the URL
http://P5000LJIPaddress/networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html).
2. At the Network Configuration HTML form that displays, search for the
“Windows (NetBIOS TCP/IP)” section and highlight the “Workgroup
Name” field.
3. Type in the new workgroup name for the NIC.
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
178
Chapter 9 Windows NIC Configuration
4. Click SUBMIT button when done and physically repower the print server
to make the new settings take effect.
Changing Destination Names
When defining some printers within Windows environments, the NIC requires
that you specify a pre-defined destination rather than any name you would
like. For example, when creating a new printer under Windows NT, you are
presented with a screen similar to Figure 16.
Figure 16. Windows NT Print Setup Dialogue Box
The first field requires the IP address for the NIC and the second field must be
filled in with a valid destination from the print server (e.g., d1prn). Otherwise,
LPR will not be able to access the printer. Table 15 outlines the default
destinations to choose from.
This name can be changed to something more meaningful using the built-in
HTML forms. To do this:
1. Load a Web browser on your Windows station and direct it to the URL
http://P5000LJIPaddress/destConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/destConf.html)
Table 15. NIC Default Destinations
Destination Mapped I/O Port
d1prn PRN
d2prn PRN
d3prn PRN
d4prn PRN
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
Windows NT 3.51 Host Setup
179
2. At the Print Path Configuration HTML form that displays, select a
destination link from the top of the page to bring up the appropriate
destination form. By default, you should see a line near the top of the form
showing the destinations listed in Table 15.
3. Once the desired destination HTML form displays, highlight the “Name”
field and type in the new name for this destination.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower the print
server to make the new setting take effect.
Windows Host Configuration
This section covers Windows NT, Windows 95, and Windows 3.1 new printer
setups.
Windows NT 3.51 Host Setup
To configure a new printer on a Windows NT 3.51 station:
1. Open the “Control Panel.”
2. Double click on “Printers.”
3. Select “Create a Printer” from the Printer menu to display the dialogue
box in Figure 17.
Figure 17. Create a Printer Dialogue Box
4. Define a name to represent this print setup and select the appropriate
driver for the printer that will be used in this setup. For printer driver
choose “generic text” or Epson “FX1050” or “Proprinter” based on print
need.
5. Under the “Print To” field, select “Other...”
6. Select “LPR Port” from the list that displays, and click OK to bring up a
dialogue box similar to the one found in Figure 18.
180
Chapter 9 Windows Host Configuration
Figure 18. Add LPR Compatible Printer Dialogue Box
7. Type in the IP address or host name of the NIC in the first field.
8. Type in the name of a pre-defined destination/queue on the NIC in the
second field.
9. Click OK when done specifying these two fields.
You now have a new network printer which relies on the standard TCP/IP
print protocol, LPD, to print remotely to a printer with the NIC.
Windows NT 4.0 Host Setup
This installation procedure assumes that the NIC adapter is configured with
the correct IP address, subnet mask, and gateway (if required). In addition,
the administrator can “
ping”
and telnet to the NIC adapter from the server
console.
If this is not the case, use the printer front panel to configure the NIC adapter
before proceeding.
1. Select “Settings:Printers” from the Start menu. The Printers window
opens.
2. Double-click the “Add Printer” icon. The “Add Printer Wizard” window
displays.
3. For Windows NT, skip to the next step.
For Windows 2000, click “Next.”
Note This name must be a name of an existing destination/queue on the NIC,
and it must be lowercase by default. You will probably use d1prn.
Windows NT 4.0 Host Setup
181
4. For Windows NT, select “My Computer” and click “Next.”
For Windows 2000, select “Local Printer” and deselect “Automatically
detect and install Plug and Play printers.” Then click “Next.”
5. For Windows NT, click “Add Port...”
For Windows 2000, click “Create a New Port...”
182
Chapter 9 Windows Host Configuration
6. For Windows NT, double-click “LPR Port.” If LPR Port is not listed, the
Microsoft TCP/IP Printing service is not installed.
For Windows 2000, select “LPR Port” from the pull down menu and then
click “Next.” If LPR Port is not listed, it means that the Microsoft TCP/IP
Printing service is not installed. To install the Microsoft TCP/IP Printing
service, refer to “Installing Microsoft TCP/IP Printing” on page 191.
7. In the “Name or address of server providing lpd:” box, enter the IP
address of the NIC adapter. In the “Name of printer or print queue on that
server:” box, enter the name of the print queue.
NOTE: This name must be a name of an existing destination/que on the NIC,
and must be lowercase by default. You will probably use d1prn.
Windows NT 4.0 Host Setup
183
8. Select the “Generic/Text only” printer driver or install the P5000LJ printer
driver. The generic driver is good for troubleshooting installation
problems. The network administrator can always go back and install the
P5000LJ printer driver at a later time. If you have the P5000LJ Utility CD
and you want to install the P5000LJ printer driver, click on “Have Disk...”
9. In the “Copy manufacturer’s files from” box, enter the path to the P5000LJ
Utility CD printer driver folder containing the NT driver. Click “OK.”
184
Chapter 9 Windows Host Configuration
10. Click “Printronix P5000LJ” in the “Printers” dialog box, and then click
“Next.”
11. In the “Printer name” box, enter a name for this printer. Click “Next.”
Printronix P5000LJ
Printronix P5000LJ
Windows NT 4.0 Host Setup
185
12. Determine if the printer is shared with other network users. If it is shared,
the share name and the operating system must be selected.
13. Print a Windows test page.
14. If there are any problems during or after installation, see “Windows NT 4.0
or 2000 Host Setup Problems” on page 191.
Printronix P5000LJ
186
Chapter 9 Windows Host Configuration
Windows 95/98/ME Host Setup
To configure a new printer on a Windows 95 station:
1. Select “Settings:Printers” from the Start menu.
2. Double click on the “Add Printer” icon.
3. Select “Network Printer” from the second window of the Add Printer
wizard that loaded.
4. At the next window, click on BROWSE to help fill in the network path of
this printer.
5. At the “Browse for Printer” dialogue box that displays, double click on the
appropriate workgroup containing the NIC. By default, the print server
falls under the workgroup, “WORKGROUP.”
6. Continue searching the network until you see the NIC name, M_xxxxxx,
where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of the print server Ethernet
address found when a configuration is printed.
7. Once you see the NIC, double click on it to display a list of pre-defined
destinations/queues to choose from.
8. Select a destination/queue that will use d1prn.
9. Click OK once you have selected a destination.
10. Back at the network path window, select NEXT since this path should now
be filled in for you.
11. At the next window, select the appropriate print driver and click on NEXT.
12. Fill in a name for this new network printer at the next window and decide if
you want this to be the default printer. This printer name can be anything
you would like as long as it is unique.
13. When prompted for a test page, select either “Yes” or “No” depending on
the state of the attached printer and click on FINISH.
Windows may ask for a disk or CD-ROM to load the appropriate printer driver
to complete this new printer setup.
There should now be a new printer icon within the Printers folder. This new
network printer relies on NetBIOS over TCP/IP as the underlying protocol to
print to the NIC.
Windows 3.1 Host Setup
187
Windows 3.1 Host Setup
If you are running Windows 3.1 stations on your network, you will need to rely
on either TCP/IP or IPX to print to the NIC. If IPX is used, you will have a print
queue defined on a Novell file server to which your Windows 3.1 stations will
send their print jobs. The NIC will then service this print queue as either a
PSERVER or an RPRINTER. Please see Chapter 11, “Novell Configuration”
for additional details.
If you want to rely on TCP/IP, you will need a third party TCP stack loaded
onto your Windows station since TCP/IP support did not automatically come
with Windows until the introduction of Windows NT and Windows 95. You
may also be running a third party stack if you decided not to use a Microsoft
operating system.
Some common TCP stacks are FTP Software's OnNet, NetManager's
Chameleon, and Frontier Technologies' SuperTCP. In each case, they allow
your Windows 3.1 station to communicate with other TCP/IP devices. This
means you can send print jobs to the NIC as well.
The most common print method offered with Windows TCP stacks is LPR/
LPD, a multi-platform remote printing protocol used on everything from PCs to
mainframes. The LPR print setup is very simplistic, involving only two
parameters:
1. NIC IP address. The IP address or host name of the print server you
want to print to.
2. NIC destination/queue. A pre-defined name on the print server telling
the device which I/O port to send the jobs to. The standard name for the
PRN port is d1prn. This destination name is case sensitive, and, by
default, all names are lowercase.
Windows Troubleshooting Tips
This section provides information on possible solutions to some standard
configuration errors. If you require technical support, please have as much of
the following information as you can available when you call:
1. What level of software are you running?
2. What type of attachment do you have?
3. What is your host operating system?
4. Give a detailed description of the problem.
5. How often, and when, does the problem occur?
6. Give a detailed description of your network and the components attached.
Please follow these tips to determine what the problem may be with your NIC
configuration.
188
Chapter 9 Windows Troubleshooting Tips
NIC Cannot Be Found On The Network
•Have you assigned the NIC a unique and valid IP address which
corresponds with the other IP addresses on your network? For example,
are you sure no other device is using this IP address?
•Are you sure you are trying to talk to the NIC from a Windows station on
the same subnet? Currently, the print server can only be seen locally
unless you configured a routing entry earlier.
•If you look at the back of the printer, is the STAT LED flashing once a
second or is it quicker than that? A slower, once-a-second rate tells you
that the print server is in fact configured with an IP address. A faster rate
says it knows nothing about this so, you may need to try the configuration
process again.
•Have you confirmed that the network connection to the NIC is working
correctly? Trying different network cables and locations will help narrow
down the problem.
HTML Configuration Forms Will Not Display
•Can you
ping
the NIC from your Windows station? If not, refer to the
section titled, “NIC Cannot Be Found On The Network”.
•Have you used the correct URL for the NIC home page? It should be
http://P5000LJIPaddress
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9)
•Is HTTP support enabled? If not, refer to “Web Browser/HTTP Problem”
on page 191.
Errors Occur When Defining An LPR Printer
•Can you
ping
the NIC from your Windows NT station? If not, refer to the
“NIC Cannot Be Found On The Network” section.
•Did you specify the correct IP address or host name for the NIC in the first
field of the “Add LPR Compatible Printer” box?
•Did you specify a valid destination/queue on the NIC in the second field of
the “Add LPR Compatible Printer” dialogue box? If so, did you also enter
it in lowercase letters?
•LPR is available only on Windows NT, not on Windows 95 or 98 (unless
third party software is added).
Cannot Browse The NIC On The Network
189
Cannot Browse The NIC On The Network
•Have you looked under the right Windows workgroup? By default, the NIC
will be found under “WORKGROUP.”
•Are you able to browse other Windows stations and devices on the
network from this same station?
•Has this Windows station been given enough time to update its registry so
it can see this newly added workgroup device? Sometimes Windows
stations can take considerable time, depending on the size of the
network.
Printer Errors When Printing Or No Output
•Is there a large job currently printing taking up all of the printer resources?
Usually when printing from Windows 95 stations, a busy printer can cause
Windows to display a printer error message. This is because it demands
immediate printer attention rather than holding the data until the printer is
ready again. The best way around this is to use a central spooling station
like an NT server.
•Have you tried restarting the spooler under “Control Panel:Services”?
Sometimes this is needed to get printing started.
TCP/IP Access Problem
If you can
ping
the printer from a workstation, but you cannot Web browse,
Telnet, or print to the printer through the NIC, there may be an incorrect entry
in the TCP access list. In order for this workstation to use the NIC in this case,
one of two things must happen:
1. The TCP list must have an entry added to grant access to this
workstation.
2. All entries must be deleted from the TCP list to grant all workstations/
hosts access to the above TCP services.
To view the current access list, use the printer control panel to access the
configuration menu (see Chapter 4 for configuration menu information). From
the DIAGNOSTICS/Printer Tests menu choose the E-Net Test Page. When
the page prints, look under the “TCP ACCESS TABLE” section for the TCP
access list entries.
To add or delete a TCP access list entry, refer to “TCP Access Lists” on page
261.
Note As a last resort, you may want to reboot the Windows station. Sometimes
this is the only option to completely clear this situation. The NIC usually
has nothing to do with this problem.
190
Chapter 9 Windows Troubleshooting Tips
To reset all TCP/IP values to the factory defaults when access is impossible:
1. Obtain a printer configuration printout using the control panel. See
Chapter 4 for configuration menu information.
2. Power off the printer.
3. On the NIC, place SWITCH 2 in the down position.
4. Power on the printer and wait for the ONLINE state.
5. On the Print Server Interface, place SWITCH 2 in the up position.
6. From a workstation attached to this network segment, create an ARP
entry. The NIC IP address and hardware or MAC address are needed. At
the workstation enter:
arp -s <ipaddress> <MACaddress>
ping <ipaddress>
7. Try to
ping
this IP address to see if the NIC can be seen on your network.
If the interface does not respond, verify you are on the same network
segment as the printer and that the ARP entry was created.
8. Telnet into the NIC using the same IP address as above. Log in as root
with no password.
9. At the system prompt, enter:
store tcpip from default
config http on
save
reset
10. Power the printer off and then back on.
11. Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway parameters to the
desired values.
12. If Web browser access does not work, Telnet into the NIC as root. Enter
the following command:
config http on
If you are still experiencing difficulty accessing or browsing the printer, contact
technical support.
Note When the following procedure is used, the TCP access list will be cleared,
but all IP addresses will need to be entered again after the procedure is
complete.
Note This will reset all TCP/IP settings to factory default and reset the NIC.
Web Browser/HTTP Problem
191
Web Browser/HTTP Problem
In some cases you may not be able to browse the printer web page simply
because the NIC HTTP may be turned off.
If you cannot
ping
the NIC IP address, make sure the IP Address, subnet
mask, and default gateway are set correctly by checking the Ethernet
Parameters menu from the operator panel. See Chapter 4 for configuration
menu information.
If you can
ping
the NIC IP address but cannot access the web pages, perform
the following procedure to verify the NIC HTTP is turned on.
1. Telnet into the Print Server and log in as root with no password.
2. At the system prompt enter the following commands:
config http on
save
reset
3. After approximately 30 seconds, point your browser to the Print Server IP
address. The printer web pages should now be accessible.
If you are still experiencing difficulty accessing or browsing the printer, contact
technical support.
Windows NT 4.0 or 2000 Host Setup Problems
The installation procedure covered earlier in this chapter assumes that the
NIC adapter is configured with the correct IP address, subnet mask and
gateway (if required), and that the administrator can
ping
and telnet to the NIC
adapter from the server console. If this is not the case, use the printer front
panel to configure the NIC adapter before proceeding.
Installing Microsoft TCP/IP Printing
The NIC installation for Windows NT 4.0 or 2000 also requires “Microsoft
TCP/IP Printing” service on the server. To install this service, click on the
Network icon in the Control Panel and click on the “Services” tab. Click on
“Add Service” and select “Microsoft TCP/IP printing.”
•Are you logged in as the “Administrator”?
This installation requires administrator privileges.
•“LPR port” is not listed in step 6.
Cancel the installation and install Microsoft TCP/IP printing service on the
server.
•LPR configuration warning during step 7.
192
Chapter 9 Windows Troubleshooting Tips
The Ethernet cable is not plugged in, or the printer is not turned on. This
message is a communication failure between the NT 2000 server and the
NIC. Check cabling, IP address settings, gateway, etc.
•Test page does not print or prints incorrectly.
1. Is the printer online? Re-send test page.
2. The print queue name in step 6 should be d1prn; however, the name can
be changed. To verify the queue names, print an Ethernet Test Page.
3. The Printronix NT print driver requires P-Series emulation active on the
printer. The Generic/Text driver should print in any printer emulation.
4. Delete then re-install Microsoft TCP/IP Print service on the server.
193
10 Unix Configuration
Overview
This chapter details a complete Unix setup including:
1. Configuring the NIC with its mandatory TCP/IP settings (i.e., IP address
and subnet mask).
2. Configuring the Unix host station with a new printer.
194
Chapter 10 Unix Environment Description
Unix Environment Description
The NIC supports network printing under various TCP/IP environments
including all variations of Unix. Printing can come from multiple hosts directly
or through central spooling machines. Figure 19 illustrates this.
Figure 19. Unix Integration
XTerm
XTerm
PC PC
PC
Linux
Solaris
OSF/1
Ultrix
IRIX
HP-UXSCO
SparcStation
SunOS 4.1.1
IP Router
Mandatory
195
Unix NIC Configuration
There are mandatory settings needed before the print server can be detected
on the network, as well as some additional optional settings. This section
offers alternative methods for configuring your NIC and mentions some of the
more common optional settings available.
Mandatory
The NIC must be assigned TCP/IP values of IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Gateway Value (if required) before setting up and establishing print queues
and logical Unix printers. Refer to Chapter 7, “TCP/IP Configuration” for more
information.
Additionally, the file “
etc/hosts”
on the Unix system (or the DNS server known
to the Unix workstation being set up) must be updated to include the IP
Address and logical name for the NIC, or a DNS server needs to be set with
this information so that the Unix print daemons (software processes) can
communicate with the physical NIC.
Optional
Additional settings, like routing entries, can be configured allowing for
communication across subnets.
Configuration of the NIC can be done from the control panel or through host
commands.
Communicating Across Routers
Since Unix environments rely on TCP/IP to communicate with the NIC,
attention must be paid to routing.
After following one of the NIC configuration methods mentioned (other than
the BOOTP method), you will most likely only be able to communicate with
the print server from the same subnet. This means any host across a router
will not be able to see your NIC. In order to communicate across a router, it is
possible to store a static default router/gateway within the print server so that
any packets destined for another subnet get forwarded to this router
automatically. The router (or series of routers) can then take over ensuring
the packets get to their final destination on another subnet on your network.
To configure a default router/gateway within the NIC:
1. Use the printer front panel to configure the gateway value.
2. Load a Web browser on your Unix station on the same subnet and direct
it to the URL http://P5000LJIPaddress/networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html)
196
Chapter 10 Unix Host Configuration
3. At the Network Configuration HTML form that displays, click in the first
field below the “Gateway” heading and type in the IP address of the
default router/gateway for the NIC subnet.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower the print
server to make sure the new setting is in effect.
Unix Host Configuration
There may be times when you would prefer to or have to perform the manual
setup steps for a new printer definition. There may also be times when you
require a less common print solution such as direct socket capabilities. This
section covers these additional setups.
Printing Setup On HP-UX
Method 1, SAM
A simple way to set up printing on HP-UX is using SAM, the system
administration tool.
1. At the command prompt in a terminal session, start SAM.
2. Double click on “Printers/Plotters.”
3. Under “Actions,” choose “Add Remote Printer.”
4. In the entry panel that opens, make the following entries (remember Unix
is case sensitive, so d1prn is not the same as D1PRN):
a. For Printer Name, enter anything you want. This is actually the Unix
Queue name, for example, “Accounting.”
b. For Remote System Name, enter the DNS/pingable name, for
example, “MyP5000LJ.”
c. For Remote Printer Name, enter a dest on the P5000LJ, for example,
“d1prn.”
d. Accept defaults for Remote Cancel model and Remote Status model.
e. Check the box next to “Remote Printer is on a BSD system.”
f. Click on OK.
5. You will be asked if you want to add the new printer to HP Vue, this is
optional. Other optional choices include making this the system printer
and allowing anyone to cancel a job.
6. Test your new printer by either a command line print:
lp -d Accounting /etc/inetd.conf
or, via an application which can be directed to a selected printer.
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in
root
for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no default password.
Printing Setup On HP-UX
197
Method 2, Command Line
The following procedure requires root privilege.
1. Assume a print queue (aka Unix printer). Quality is desired.
2. DNS/IP Address name of NIC.
3. The dest d4prn is to be used on the NIC.
4. The default BSD interface file
rmodel
on the HP-UX system will be
used.
5. Issue the following commands (in order shown):
lpshut
(stops the print scheduler)
lpadmin -pQuality -mrmodel -v/dev/null -ormMyP5000LJ -
orpd4prn -ob3
(sets up queue)
lpsched
(restarts print scheduler)
accept Quality
(allows queue to accept jobs)
enable Quality
(allows queue to pass jobs)
Explanation of command line:
-m
indicates the model
rmodel
is to be associated with
Quality
-v
indicates the use of
/dev/null
as a file interlock to avoid contention
-orm
is the name of remote Print Server
-orp
is the name of the remote printer on the remote Print Server
-ob3
declares that the remote Print Server is a BSD type
Other useful commands are
lpstat
and
lpmove
[ /usr/lib ]
6. You can now do a test print:
lp -d Quality /etc/inetd.conf
HP-UX Typical Configuration, Parallel or Serial Attachment
Printers set up on HP-PB & CIO computers:
The Drivers shown in this table should be installed in the Kernel
Configuration.
Table 16. Drivers Required
Interface HP-PB CIO 6 CHANNEL
MUX CIO 16 CHANNEL
MUX
Serial mux2 mux0,cio_ca0 mux0_16,cio,ca0
Parallel lpr2 N/A N/A
198
Chapter 10 Unix Host Configuration
HP-UX Configuration Guidelines
Within SAM follow the menu:
Printers and Plotters
Printers/Plotters
Printer/Plotter Manager menu ... select Actions
Add Local Printer/Plotter Add parallel Printer/Plotter or
Add serial Printer/Plotter
If parallel printer is selected:
Printer Name user's choice
Printer Model Interface user's choice
Printer Device File Name SAM creates a special file
Printer Class user's choice
If serial printer is selected:
The system displays the Serial Interface Hardware Paths
Port select a valid port
Printer Name user's choice
Printer Model Interface user's choice
Printer Device File Name SAM creates a special file
Printer Class user's choice
Printing Setup On Sys V
This setup involves any Unix operating system using System V print spooling
(e.g., SCO, Solaris , DG/UX , Sun 2.5.x, 2.6, 2.7 and similar, etc.). This
means an interface file is used for each defined printer and in the case of any
System V print setup involving a NIC, the RSHD protocol is used to transfer
data from the host to the print server.
To manually configure a new System V printer on a Unix station, create a
dummy device file that acts as a locking mechanism between contending print
jobs.
Sys V printing is characterized by use of the lp printer interface program,
lpsched
printer scheduler, and the use of an interface file. The file
lpadmin
is used in setting up the print queue definition. As of Sun 2.6 and on, the
interface file
netstandard
is provided in a generic interface file intended for
network print servers such as the NIC. Also as of Sun 2.6 the ability to print to
a socket (sometimes called raw tcp) or a remote printer (
dest
for P5000LJ) is
provided.
Root access is required to use
lpshut
(stop the print scheduler to add a new
printer with
lpadmin
),
lpsched
and
lpadmin
.
For the following example, assume the print queue to be created is
lobby
,
and the ping-able IP Address name of the P5000LJ is
LJ_PS1
, and you wish
to print to remote printer (dest)
d1prn
on LJ_PS1. As always with Unix,
commands are case-sensitive. Also, be sure to use the
bourne
or
korn
shell,
not the
cshell
when using the commands.
Printing Setup On Sys V
199
The command structure:
- stop print scheduler
- use
lpadmin
to describe print queue (often referred to as the
logical Unix printer of the same name)
- start the print scheduler
- enable the print queue
- accept the print queue (allow it to accept print jobs)
- do a test print
Several examples are shown below.
Example 1: Using the dest d1prn (Sun 2.5.x)
lpshut
lpsystem -t bsd lobby
lpadmn -p lobby -v/dev/null
(gives file locking)
lpadmin -p lobby -i/usr/lib/lp/model/netstandard
lpadmin -p lobby -sLJ_PS1!d1prn
lpsched
enable lobby
accept lobby
Example 2: Using the dest d1prn (Sun 2.6, 2.7 and Similar)
lpshut
lpadmn -p lobby -v/dev/null
(gives file locking)
lpadmin -p lobby -i/usr/lib/lp/model/netstandard -o
protocol=bsd
lpadmin -p lobby -sLJ_PS1!d1prn
lpsched
enable lobby
accept lobby
Example 3: Using the raw tcp socket 9100 (Sun 2.1, 2.7 and
Similar):
lpshut
lpadmn -p lobby -v/dev/null
(gives file locking)
lpadmin -p lobby -i/usr/lib/lp/model/netstandard
lpadmin -p lobby -o dest=LJ_PS1:9100 -o protocol=tcp
lpsched
enable lobby
accept lobby
To do a test print for either form using the
/etc/hosts
file:
lp -d lobby /etc/hosts
200
Chapter 10 Unix Host Configuration
LPR/LPD Printing Setup On BSD Systems
(Sun 4.x, DEC
‚
Ultrix
‚
, Free BSD, etc.)
NIC also supports Unix operating systems which follow a BSD print system
(e.g., SunOS 4.1.x). This means a printcap file is used to define all printers
available on the host and interface scripts are not commonly used. Instead,
LPR/LPD printers are defined.
To manually configure an LPR/LPD printer on a BSD Unix system:
1. Define an entry for this new printer within the printcap file, /etc/printcap.
Syntax:
printername:
:sh:pw#80:mx#0:\
:rm=P5000LJname:\
:rp=P5000LJdestination:\
:lp=:\
:sd=/usr/spool/lpd/printername:\
:lf=/usr/spool/lpd/printername/log:\
:af=/usr/spool/lpd/printername/acct:
where
printername
is any name you would like to give to this new
printer, P5000LJname is the host or IP name of the print server, and
P5000LJdestination is one of the pre-defined destinations/queues
on the device.
Example:
1000Q:
:sh:pw#80:mx#0:\
:rm=spike:\
:rp=d1prn:\
:lp=:\
:sd=/usr/spool/lpd/ 1000Q:\
:lf=/usr/spool/lpd/ 1000Q/log:\
:af=/usr/spool/lpd/ 1000Q/acct:
2. Create the spool directory specified by the sd= entry in the printcap entry
for this printer.
Example:
touch /usr/spool/lpd/ 1000Q
3. Create the log and account files specified by the
lf=
and
af=
entries in
the printcap entry for this printer.
Example:
touch /usr/spool/lpd/1000Q/log
touch /usr/spool/lpd/1000Q/acct
4. Create the spool directory to use, set the correct permissions and
ownership of the spool directory and objects within it, and start the printer
daemon for this new printer:
mkdir /usr/spool/lpd/1000Q
chmod -R g+rwx,o+rx /usr/spool/lpd/1000Q
chmod -R daemon.daemon /usr/spool/lpd/1000Q
lpc start 1000Q
FTP Printing
201
5. Start the printer daemon for this new printer.
Example:
lpc start 1000Q
You now have a new printer which relies on LPR/LPD to print to a NIC.
Use the following command to test printing:
Syntax:
lpr -printername filename
Example:
lpr -1000Q /etc/hosts
FTP Printing
NIC contains four logical printers (destinations) labeled as d1prn through
d4prn. For FTP printing, establish an FTP session, followed by a
put
to the
dest
. Since the printer emulation can be PCL -II, Epson , or Proprinter , be
sure the file you
put
to print is both printable and suitable for the printer
emulation. Straight text is usable in all cases.
Example:
Type the commands as shown, followed by the enter key. Assume the file you
want to print is
/etc/inetd.conf
, which is a simple text file.
ftp MyP5000LJ
(
MyP5000LJ
needs to be a ping-able DNS name, or if no
DNS, in the local
/etc/hosts
file, or it can be a dotted IP Address for the
NIC)
at the user prompt, type
root
at the password prompt, press ENTER (default password for
root
is blank
until you change it)
cd dest/d1prn
put /etc/inetd.conf
quit
Remote Shell Printing
The NIC is BSD capable, and has an internal lp daemon. Each Unix system
has a remote shell function which can be used to access this process: Sun,
etc. is
rsh
; UX is
remsh
; AIX is
rcmd
.
For example, printing the file
/etc/inetd.conf
on an HP-UX system to
the second logical
dest
in the NIC:
remsh MyP5000LJ lp -d d2prn < /etc/indetd.conf
You may also use this form:
cat /etc/inetd.conf | remsh MyP5000LJ lp -d d2prn
In this form of printing the printer status will be fed back as to on/off line.
Note If the file you want to print is a binary file, enter the command
bin
before
the
put
command.
202
Chapter 10 Unix Troubleshooting Tips
Unix Troubleshooting Tips
This section provides information on possible solutions to some standard
configuration errors. If you require technical support, please have the
following information (or as much as possible) when you call:
1. What level of software are you running?
2. What type of attachment do you have?
3. What is your host operating system?
4. Give a detailed description of the problem.
5. How often, and when, does the problem occur?
6. Give a detailed description of your network and the components attached.
Please follow these tips to determine what the problem may be with your NIC
configuration.
Nothing Prints
•Can you ping the NIC from your Unix station? If not, please refer to
Chapter 7, “TCP/IP Configuration” for information.
•Is the NIC able to communicate with the attached printer? To test this,
you can:
1. telnet to the print server (e.g., telnet 192.75.11.9) and log
in as root.
2. Enter the command start fox prn .
3. Execute stop prn right after starting the test.
This test will send the same text line over and over to the attached printer.
•Is the job getting stuck in the Unix host queue? If so, check that the printer
is online. If it is, there is a configuration error on the Unix station so
creating a new print setup may be needed.
•Is the control panel showing any activity to indicate it is receiving data? If
so, but there is nothing printing, check to see if a manual form feed is
needed. Also, ensure that the printer can support the type of job coming
through.
•Do all jobs fail or just certain ones? For example, is it possible that jobs
from a certain application are the only ones to fail? If so, check the type of
data it sends to make sure it matches the printer emulation. Check the
application printer configuration for mistakes.
•If you are using System V, was the spooler restarted?
Stair-stepped Output
203
Stair-stepped Output
Stair-stepped output is print which starts at the top left of the page but every
line thereafter starts a little further over to the right. It also refers to Unix jobs
that print one line of text at the top of a page followed by a series of blank
pages.
This kind of output happens only with Unix text jobs if carriage return insertion
is not incorporated into the print setup. The printer may be told to do a
linefeed but the Unix job does not specify anything about a carriage return to
follow this.
To fix this, carriage return insertion must be enabled somewhere in the print
setup. The easiest and most common location is on the NIC itself within the
appropriate model. The feature is called onlcr and the command syntax is:
set model modelname stty onlcr
save
For example, if printing to the destination d1prn, the associated model is
m1
.
Therefore, the command is:
set model m1 stty onlcr
save
No Form Feed Or Extra Page Comes Out
Unix text jobs may also have problems outputting the last page of a job
especially when the BSD Remote (LPD) print method is used. This means the
form feed button has to be pressed on the printer to get this last page out.
To make this process automatic, tell the NIC to handle this task by setting this
feature “on” in the appropriate model. The command syntax is:
set model modelname trailer $FF
save
For example, if printing to the destination d2prn, the associated model is m2.
Therefore, the command is:
set model m2 trailer $FF
save
For default destination model mappings of the NIC, please see “NIC Naming
Schemes” on page 264.
204
Chapter 10 Unix Troubleshooting Tips
205
11 Novell Configuration
Overview
This chapter details a complete Novell setup, including:
1. Identifying the NIC on the network.
2. Configuring the NIC with its mandatory print setup settings.
3. Configuring a new print queue on the file server.
See Chapter 12, “Novell Configuration For 10/100Base-T Interfaces” for
information about additional options available with the 10/100 Base-T
interface.
206
Chapter 11 Novell Environment Description
Novell Environment Description
The NIC card supports network printing under Novell environments by using
IPX. It supports all 3.1X versions of NetWare. Figure 20 provides a Novell
setup overview. Version 4.1X is supported under bindery emulation only.
Figure 20. Novell Integration
Novell NIC Configuration
Mandatory
Under all Novell environments, the NIC card does not require any network
settings to make it visible on the network. Simply plug it in to your network and
power it on. However, with a new print queue setup on a Novell file server,
there can be some mandatory settings needed on the NIC.
Bridge/Router
NetWare 4.1
File Server
NetWare
Workstation
NetWare
Workstation
NetWare
Workstation
NetWare
Workstation
NetWare 4.1
File Server
Using HTML Forms
207
Optional
Additional settings are available to fine-tune the NIC’s Novell functionality.
These options include:
•NDS Context. The NDS context in which the print server object was
created. This option is required if you create the print server object in a
different context from the context the file server object for the file server
that you logged in with is on.
•NDS Tree. The NDS tree the print server object was created in. This is
only needed if your environment uses more than one NDS tree.
•Mode. The mode the NIC will run in. This can be either auto, bindery, or
NDS. The default is auto so that the NIC can autosense which mode it
should run in. See “NetWare Version 4.x and 5.x RPRINTER Setup” on
page 213 for information on what to do when using both bindery and NDS
file servers at the same time.
•Preferred File Server. In a bindery setup, this specifies the file server
that the print server object was created on. In an NDS setup, this
specifies a file server(s) that the print server object resides on. Since NDS
is distributed, most administrators will not know which file server(s) the
print server object is actually stored on, so in most NDS environments this
option is not used.
See Chapter 12, “Novell Configuration For 10/100Base-T Interfaces” for
additional information about these options.
Using HTML Forms
When defining a new print queue on a Novell file server, a new print server
must be defined to represent the NIC. This name must match the pre-defined
name given to the print server. By default, this name is in the format
M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of the NIC address
found on a configuration printout or control panel settings under Ethernet
parameters, MAC Address (e.g., M_071C1A)
To use the HTML forms to define a print queue, do the following:
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the
print server over TCP/IP. The command to change the print server name
is:
Syntax:
store pserver name newname
Example to change the name to micro1:
store pserver name micro1
2. Direct your Web browser to URL
http://P5000LJIPaddress/adminConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/adminConf.html)
208
Chapter 11 Novell Host Configuration
3. At the Administration Configuration HTML form that displays, highlight the
field beside the “Name” heading and type in the new name of the print
server.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower the
printer to make the new setting take effect.
Novell Host Configuration
Under all versions of NetWare , both PSERVER and RPRINTER setups are
supported by the NIC. Since a PSERVER setup is the most common, you will
find the necessary steps to configure the NIC as a PSERVER shown first.
Configuration for RPRINTER and NPRINTER setup follow the PSERVER
information.
NetWare Version 3.x PSERVER Setup
To configure a print queue on a NetWare 3.1x network:
1. Log on to the Novell file server as supervisor.
2. Enter PCONSOLE.
3. Select “Print Queue Information” from the PCONSOLE Main Menu.
4. Press INSERT to add a new queue to the list of currently defined queues
showing.
5. Type in the name of this new queue when prompted and press ENTER.
This can be any name you would like.
6. Press ESCAPE to return to the Main Menu.
7. Select “Print Server Information” and press ENTER.
8. Press INSERT when the list of existing print servers displays.
9. Type the name of the NIC when prompted for a print server name and
press ENTER when done. By default, the NIC is named M_xxxxxx
where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of the print server Ethernet
address found on configuration printouts or reading MAC address on
control panel. (e.g., M_071C1A).
10. Back at the print server list, select this newly defined NIC and press
ENTER.
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
Note The NIC can service up to four printers on one file server. It can not service
multiple file servers at one time.
NetWare Version 3.x PSERVER Setup
209
11. Select “Print Server Configuration” from the menu that displays.
12. Select “Printer Configuration” from the next menu to display a list of
configured printers.
13. Select the first item listed as “NOT INSTALLED” and press ENTER.
14. At the printer configuration window, type in the name for this new printer.
This name must be one of the pre-defined destinations/queues on the
NIC. This will normally be “d1prn.”
15. Go to the “Type” field and press ENTER to see the possible choices.
16. Select “Defined Elsewhere” from this list.
17. When done, press ESCAPE and select “Yes” to save the changes to this
new printer.
18. Press ESCAPE again to return to the Print Server Configuration menu.
19. Select “Queues Serviced by Printer.”
20. Select this new printer from the printer list that displays and press
ENTER.
21. At the empty queue list that displays, press INSERT.
22. Select the queue created in step 5 and press ENTER.
23. When prompted for the priority, press ENTER to select the default or
select a priority.
24. Press ESCAPE until back at the PCONSOLE Main Menu.
25. Repower the printer.
26. Wait two minutes and then select “Print Queue Information” from the
PCONSOLE Main Menu.
27. Select this new queue from the menu that displays. Select “Currently
Attached Servers” to see which print server is servicing this queue.
At this point, the NIC name (e.g., M_071C1A) should show within this
window. This means the NIC knows about this new Novell print queue it must
service as a PSERVER. Therefore, it will poll this queue regularly looking for
jobs to print.
Note The NIC can service up to four printers on one file server. It can not service
multiple file servers at one time.
210
Chapter 11 Novell Host Configuration
NetWare Version 3.x RPRINTER Setup
These steps are for Novell environments with Netware 3.x (or earlier) file
servers.
To configure a new RPRINTER on a NetWare 3.x network:
1. Log in to the NIC command shell, npsh, as root.
If you have TCP/IP available and this print server already has an IP
address stored within it, you can use the built-in HTML configuration
forms or a Telnet session. Please see “Configuration Alternatives” on
page 69 for additional details. If you have only Novell available, you will
need to use a PC, laptop, or terminal.
2. Store the RPRINTER settings on the NIC. This will refer to an existing
PSERVER.NLM on the file server or to one that you will create later in
these steps.
Syntax:
store rprinter add PSERVERname printernumber
P5000LJdestination
Example for an RPRINTER servicing printer 0 of the PSERVER.NLM
called pserver1 and sending jobs to the NIC destination d1prn:
store rprinter add pserver1 0
d1prn
3. Leave this NIC login session and log on to the NetWare 3.x file server as
Supervisor.
4. Load a PSERVER.NLM if there is not one loaded already. This will be the
PSERVER that the NIC services as an RPRINTER so it must match the
PSERVER name given in step 2.
5. Enter PCONSOLE.
6. Select “Print Queue Information” from the PCONSOLE Main Menu.
7. Press INSERT to add a new queue to the list of currently defined queues.
8. Type in the name of this new queue when prompted and press ENTER.
This can be any name you would like.
9. Press ESCAPE to return to the Main Menu.
10. Select “Print Server Information” and press ENTER.
11. Press INSERT when the list of existing print servers displays.
12. Select the print server that you want the Print Server to service as an
RPRINTER. This is the PSERVER.NLM loaded in step 4.
Note If you use HTML configuration, you will need to go to the Network
Configuration HTML form http://P5000LJIPaddress/
networkConf.html (e.g., http://192.75.11.9/
networkConf.html) and look under the “Novell” section. The settings
in the following step are found there. If using a Telnet session, you will
need to manually execute the commands listed in the next step.
NetWare Version 4.x and 5.x PSERVER Setup
211
13. Select “Print Server Configuration” from the menu that displays.
14. Select “Printer Configuration” from the next menu to display a list of
configured printers.
15. Select an item from the list (e.g., either an existing printer name or a “Not
Installed” one) to display the printer configuration window.
16. Assign a name (if not an existing printer) to this printer.
17. At the “Type” field, select “Remote Other/Unknown.”
18. Press ESCAPE to save the changes.
19. Press ESCAPE until back at the Print Server Configuration menu.
20. Select “Queues Serviced by Printer” to display a list of defined printers.
21. Select the printer you just defined and press ENTER.
22. At the list of queues that displays, press INSERT to add a queue to the
list.
23. Select the queue defined and press ENTER.
24. When prompted for a priority, press ENTER to select the default or select
a priority.
25. Press ESCAPE until you have exited PCONSOLE.
26. Reload the PSERVER.NLM that the NIC is to service as an RPRINTER.
27. Repower the Print Server by turning the printer off and then on.
28. Wait two minutes and then check your PSERVER to see if the appropriate
printer is being serviced. The PSERVER should indicate that the printer is
“Waiting for job.”
At this point, the NIC knows to receive any jobs this PSERVER.NLM has to
send to it through the defined printer.
NetWare Version 4.x and 5.x PSERVER Setup
NIC destinations are case sensitive and will not be recognized if they are
typed incorrectly. By default, they are all lower case. If you are setting up a
NetWare 4 or 5 environment, the destination must be renamed to uppercase
to match the PCONSOLE entry.
The NIC can be used in a NetWare 4 or 5 environment with either of the
following options:
•Set the NIC up as a PSERVER, replacing a dedicated printer.
•Set the NIC up as an RPRINTER, interacting with an existing PSERVER
(see page 213).
Following a PSERVER setup, bindery emulation is required. To configure the
NIC as a PSERVER in a NetWare 4 environment:
1. Log in to the Novell as supervisor.
2. Enter PCONSOLE.
3. Press F4.
4. Select “Print Queues.”
212
Chapter 11 Novell Host Configuration
5. Press INSERT to add a queue.
6. Type in a new queue name and press ENTER.
7. Press ESCAPE.
8. Select “Print Servers.”
9. Press INSERT to add the new print server.
10. Type the name of the NIC. By default, it is M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx
equals the last six digits of the Ethernet address
(e.g., M_000BF5)
11. Select this new print server and press ENTER.
12. Select “Printers.”
13. Press INSERT to add a printer to the list.
14. Type in the name of one of the default destinations on the unit for the
“Name” field and go to the type field.
15. Press ENTER at this field and select “Defined Elsewhere.” If “Defined
Elsewhere” is not available, choose “Parallel.”
16. Press ENTER on the “Print Queues Assigned” field.
17. Press INSERT to display all queues; select the one you defined in step 6.
Then press ENTER.
18. Select a priority and press ENTER. Priority 1 should be sufficient.
19. Press ESCAPE until you are back to Main Menu.
20. Reboot the Print Server by repowering the printer.
21. Check the “Currently Attached Servers” and verify the print server is
active.
22. Press ESCAPE until you are out of the PCONSOLE.
Even though the entire print set up is done through PCONSOLE, you may
want to communicate directly with the print server in order to modify
settings, monitor the unit, etc. To communicate with the print server, the
optional host software, npsh.exe, may be used. npsh.exe is a DOS
executable program that can be run from a DOS prompt on a NetWare
workstation.
npsh.exe performs the following:
npsh nvplist
Lists all of the NIC devices on the network; each name is in the default
format M_xxxxxx (where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of the unit
Ethernet address). This is regardless of whether it is configured as a
PSERVER or an RPRINTER.
npsh unitname
Starts a Telnet-like session with the named print server, allowing you to
configure, monitor, and troubleshoot the unit with the built-in command
set.
npsh unitname command
Initiates a single Command with guest access only to the unit instead of
entering into a complete session.
NetWare Version 4.x and 5.x RPRINTER Setup
213
To communicate with the unit using npsh.exe:
a. From a DOS prompt on a Novell workstation, begin an npsh session
with the unit.
npsh unitname
Starts a Telnet-like session with the named print server with guest
access only.
b. To obtain root access to the unit, type:
supervisor
A standard login screen is displayed prompting you for the login name
and password.
c. Login to the unit as root user.
root
Root users require the use of a password as configured in the unit
user list.
d. Enter the password. If this password is not yet set, press enter at the
password prompt. Otherwise, enter the password that is already
stored in the unit.
password
You are now logged in to the unit as a root user and can access any npsh
command on the unit.
NetWare Version 4.x and 5.x RPRINTER Setup
NIC can be configured to service both RPRINTER, NDS mode, and
PSERVER, bindery mode.
Use the following procedure to set up an RPRINTER form of attachment on a
4.x or 5.x server:
1. NIC requires a bindery server login on the 4.x or 5.x as the first step to
servicing RPRINTER. This bindery login is necessary for registering the
NIC PSERVER name; no bindery queues or printers are set up. Using
PCONSOLE, bindery mode, create a bindery printer server object whose
name matches that of the NIC at the root context of the 4.x or 5.x box (i.e.,
M_03092B). After creating the bindery PrintServer on the 4.x or 5.x
server, reboot NIC and use the
debug Novell pserver
command via
a Telnet or npsh session, or print the E-Net Test Page out to make sure
there is a successful server login.
2. Using either PCONSOLE in NDS mode, or NWADMIN:
a. create an NDS queue (any name you want), or simply use an existing
one;
b. create a print server to use (any valid name, or choose one already in
existence);
Note Because npsh.exe makes use of broadcasts, you may have problems
communicating across a router.
214
Chapter 11 Novell Host Configuration
c. create a printer object to use with the print server object you chose or
created, and attach it to the chosen queue;
Example:
NDS queue name: Finance
NDS print server name: Fin_Q
NDS printer name: Fin_Prt_1
NDS printer name: Accounting_Prt_1
3. At a 4.x or 5.x console session, if a pserver.nlm session is already
running for Fin_Q, first unload it, then reload it to find the new objects, or,
simply issue
load pserver Fin_Q
.
If you are successful the print server console screen will show a “printer
status” option. In the “printer status” window, note the numbers assigned
to the printers you created. Assume for our example that one printer
previously existed (number 0), and we are adding two more, whose
numbers became 1, and 2.
On the load command you must strictly follow case of the name (this is
not required on the NIC).
4. Via a Telnet or npsh session create RPRINTER attachments:
store rprinter add Fin_Q 1 d1prn
This command assigns destination d1prn as the RPRINTER 1 service
path.
store rprinter add Fin_Q 2 d4prn
This command assigns destination d4prn as the RPRINTER 2 service
path.
For NIC entries, case does not have to be observed. Also, if you want to
change the destination names from dxprn, do so first with the
set dest
dest name new name
command, being sure to use the save command
so these reappear after a reboot.
5. Reboot the NIC adapter (power the printer off and on, or use the
reset
command) so the new RPRINTER service names are broadcast.
6. Open a Telnet or npsh session and log into NIC. Wait a minute or two,
then use the
list rprinter
command, and you should see your
entries. You could also do this by looking at the connection status on the
4.x or 5.x PSERVER printer status entries.
Note The 4.x or 5.x queue name, print server name, and printer object don't
have to match any NIC name; multiple printers can be defined, but only
one print server can be attached to.
NetWare 3.x - No PSERVER Connection
215
7. If you add, delete or change RPRINTER entries on NIC or 4.x or 5.x
console, you should always unload and reload the pserver.nlm module to
register the changes. The NIC can be configured and ready before the
pserver.nlm is reloaded, or NIC can be reset after pserver.nlm is
reloaded.
8. A web browser can also be used to see the RPRINTER attachments, etc.
and status.
Novell Troubleshooting Tips
This section provides information on possible solutions to some standard
configuration errors. If you require technical support, please have as much of
the following information available when you call:
1. What level of software are you running?
2. What type of attachment do you have?
3. What is your host operating system?
4. Give a detailed description of the problem.
5. How often, and when, does the problem occur?
6. Give a detailed description of your network and the components attached.
Please follow these tips to determine what the problem may be with your NIC
configuration.
NetWare 3.x - No PSERVER Connection
•Has the NIC been power cycled once the PCONSOLE steps were
completed? This will make the print server boot up and realize which print
queue and file server it needs to service.
•Is the NIC already servicing a queue on another file server? If so, it can
not service another file server at the same time.
•When defining a new print server within PCONSOLE, did you use the
correct name for the NIC (e.g., M_071C1A)? By default, it only recognizes
itself as M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of its
Ethernet address found on the configuration printout.
•When defining a new printer name within PCONSOLE, did you use a pre-
defined destination/queue rather than a name of your own? By default,
the NIC only recognizes names like “d1prn.” All other names will be
ignored by the device.
•Is the NIC in Bindery mode as seen under the list pserver output
on the device? If servicing only a NetWare 3.x file server, it must be set to
handle Bindery services. The default setting is “Bindery.”
•Is there an available NetWare user license for the NIC to use while it acts
as a PSERVER? Every PSERVER takes up one user license since it logs
in to the Novell file server.
216
Chapter 11 Novell Troubleshooting Tips
•Have you given the connection process some time after repowering the
NIC? In larger Novell environments, the file server identification and
connection process can take several minutes.
NetWare 4.x and 5.x - No PSERVER Connection
•Has the NIC been power cycled once the PCONSOLE steps were
completed? This will make the print server boot up and realize which print
queue and file server it needs to service.
•Is the NIC already servicing a queue on another file server? If so, it can
not service another file server at the same time.
•When defining a new print server within PCONSOLE, did you use the
correct name for the NIC (e.g., M_071C1A)? By default, it only recognizes
itself as M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of its
Ethernet address found on the configuration printout.
•When defining a new printer name within PCONSOLE, did you use a pre-
defined destination/queue rather than a name of your own? By default,
the NIC only recognizes names like “d1prn.” All other names will be
ignored by the device.
•Is the NIC in Bindery mode as seen under the list pserver output
on the device? If servicing only a NetWare 4.x file server, it must be set to
handle Bindery services. The default setting is “Bindery.”
•Is there an available NetWare user license for the NIC to use while it acts
as a PSERVER? Every PSERVER takes up one user license since it logs
in to the Novell file server.
•Have you given the connection process some time after repowering the
NIC? In larger Novell environments, the file server identification and
connection process can take several minutes.
217
12 Novell Configuration For
10/100Base-T Interfaces
Overview
This chapter provides additional information for Novell environments using the
10/100Base-T interface, including:
1. NIC Configuration. This section includes information about setting the
preferred file server; setting password security; adjusting polling time;
changing the NIC name; changing the NIC frame type; changing the NIC
mode; setting the NIC NDS context; and setting the NIC preferred NDS
tree.
2. Host Configuration. This section includes information about the NDS
PSERVER setup; Bindery PSERVER setup; referencing a Bindery queue
in NDS; and RPRINTER/NPRINTER setups.
3. Troubleshooting tips. This section covers PSERVER setups,
RPRINTER/NPRINTER setups, and printing related problems.
Novell NIC Configuration (10/100Base-T)
There are no mandatory Novell settings needed before the print server can be
detected on the network. However, there can be some mandatory settings
needed before a Novell print queue can be serviced by the NIC. These
mandatory settings are covered separately for Netware 3.x, 4.x, and 5.x under
the Host Configuration heading.
The print server setup in a Novell environment is much simpler than that
required in a TCP/IP one. No addresses, masks, or router entries are
necessary, and, in most cases, the NIC can simply be connected to the
network, turned on, and then configured for printing from a Novell station
through PCONSOLE or Netware Administrator. See Figure 21 for an example
of a Novell network which shows the use of file servers and how they relate to
the print server.
There are, however, some optional parameters you may wish to change such
as the preferred file server(s), print server password, polling time, frame type,
print server name, NDS context, and NDS preferred tree. The following
sections describe these optional parameters.
218
Chapter 12 Novell NIC Configuration (10/100Base-T)
Figure 21. Novell Integration
Preferred File Server (NDS & Bindery)
In a bindery setup, the preferred file server specifies the file server that the
print server object was created on. In an NDS setup, it specifies a file server
that the print server object resides on. Since NDS is distributed, most
administrators will not know which file server(s) the print server object is
actually stored on, so in most NDS environments this option is not used. This
feature is useful in a large Novell network so that the NIC does not ignore
important file servers. If you are setting up the NIC to work with a Bindery file
server, it is a good idea to set a preferred server on the NIC.
To view those file servers that the NIC does acknowledge at a given time, use
the
debug nest fserver
command. See Chapter 13, “Commands” for
more information.
Bridge/Router
NetWare 4.1
File Server
NetWare
Workstation
NetWare
Workstation
NetWare
Workstation
NetWare
Workstation
NetWare 4.1
File Server
Preferred File Server (NDS & Bindery)
219
Adding Preferred File Server
HTML Method
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the
print server over TCP/IP.
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://P5000LJIPaddress/networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html)
3. Look under the “Novell” section and add the name of the preferred file
server in the “File Server” field.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re-power the print
server to make the new settings take effect.
Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server. This will bring up a login screen:
telnet ipaddress
2. You should now see a prompt displayed that has the NIC’s IP address
followed by a colon then
root
.
ipaddress:root>
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver novell fserver add fservername
where
fservername
is the name of the Novell file server you want to add
as a preferred file server. This adds the specified file server as a preferred
file server on the NIC.
4. Reset the unit to ensure the changes take effect.
reset
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in
root
for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in
root
for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
220
Chapter 12 Novell NIC Configuration (10/100Base-T)
Removing Preferred File Server
HTML Method
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the
print server over TCP/IP.
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://P5000LJIPaddress/networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html)
3. Look under the Novell section and remove the name of the preferred file
server from the File Server field.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re-power the print
server to make the new settings take effect.
Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server. This will bring up a login screen:
telnet ipaddress
2. You should now see a prompt displayed that has the NIC’s IP address
followed by a colon then
root.
ipaddress:root>
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver novell fserver del fservername
where
fservername
is the name of the Novell file server you want to
remove as a preferred file server.
4. Reset the unit to ensure the changes take effect.
reset
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in
root
for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in
root
for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
Setting Password Security (NDS & Bindery)
221
Setting Password Security (NDS & Bindery)
In addition to the general security measures, a Novell setup provides further
password security. A password can be set on the NIC and within your
PCONSOLE or Netware Administrator setup so that when the NIC tries to
login to the file server, the passwords are compared.
To set the password on the Novell host for use in a PSERVER setup, you will
need to complete the steps as follows.
Netware 4.x and 5.x
1. Log in to NetWare Administrator as a user with security equal to “Admin”
on your Novell host.
2. Double click on the print server object you are using for your setup. This
will bring up the print server objects details pages.
3. Select the “Change Password...” button on the “Identification” page.
4. At the prompts, type and re-type the new password. Press OK when you
are finished.
5. Proceed to the next section to store the password on the NIC.
Netware 3.x
1. Enter PCONSOLE as
supervisor
on your Novell host.
2. Select “Print Server Information” from the main menu.
3. Select the appropriate printer and press ENTER.
4. Select “Change Password.”
5. At the prompts, type and re-type the new password. Press ENTER when
you are finished.
6. Proceed to the next section to store the password on the NIC.
Print Server Setup - HTML Method
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the
print server over TCP/IP.
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://P5000LJIPaddress/networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html)
3. Look under the “Novell” section and add the new password to the
“Pserver Password” field.
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in
root
for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
222
Chapter 12 Novell NIC Configuration (10/100Base-T)
4. Click the SUBMIT button when done and physically re-power the printer
to make the new settings take effect.
Print Server Setup - Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server. This will bring up a login screen:
telnet ipaddress
2. You should now see a prompt displayed that has the NIC’s IP address
followed by a colon then
root.
ipaddress:root>
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver novell passwd password
4. Reset the unit to ensure the changes take effect.
reset
Adjusting Polling Time (NDS & Bindery)
You can set the poll time the NIC will use when checking for new jobs under a
PSERVER setup. To do this, complete the following steps.
Netware 4.x and 5.x
1. Log in to NetWare Administrator as a user with security equal to “Admin”
on your Novell host.
2. Double click on the printer object for which you wish to change the poll
time. This will bring up the printer objects details pages.
3. Click on “Configuration” to display the configuration page.
4. Change the “Service Interval” to the desired number (in seconds).
Note The passwords entered in Netware Administrator or PCONSOLE must
match the password set on the unit.
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in
root
for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
Note The passwords entered in Netware Administrator or PCONSOLE must
match the password set on the unit.
Changing The Print Server Name (NDS & Bindery)
223
5. Re-power the NIC by turning the printer off and on to make the changes
take effect.
Netware 3.x
1. Enter PCONSOLE as
supervisor
on your Novell host.
2. Select “Print Server Information” from the main menu and press ENTER.
3. Select the print server you have been using for your PSERVER setup and
press ENTER. By default, this will be M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals
the last six digits of the print server’s Ethernet address found on the
bottom of the device (e.g., M_091C1A).
4. Select “Print Server Configuration” from the menu that displays.
5. Select “Printer Configuration” from the next menu to display a list of
configured printers.
6. Select the printer for which you wish to alter the poll time and press
ENTER.
7. Change the “Sampling Interval” to the desired number (in seconds).
8. Press ESCAPE and select “Yes” to save the changes to this new printer.
9. Re-power the NIC by turning the printer off and on to make the changes
take effect.
Changing The Print Server Name (NDS & Bindery)
When defining a new print queue on a Novell file server, a new print server
must be defined to represent the NIC. This name must match the pre-defined
name given to the print server. By default, this name is in the format
M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits of the NIC’s Ethernet
address found on the bottom of the device
(e.g., M_091C1A). You must make sure that the print server object that you
are using for your PSERVER setup has the same name as that stored on the
NIC. If you need to rename the print server object in Netware Administrator,
please delete the object and re-create it with the new name. Netware
administrator seems to have some problems with renaming objects.
Note You may also want to change the “Service mode for forms” to “Change
forms as needed.” If you do not do this, the NIC will need to poll the file
server twice as much to get all the information it needs.
Note You may also want to change the “Service mode for forms” to “Change
forms as needed.” If you do not do this, the NIC will need to poll the file
server twice as much to get all the information it needs.
224
Chapter 12 Novell NIC Configuration (10/100Base-T)
HTML Method
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the
print server over TCP/IP.
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://P5000LJIPaddress/adminConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/adminConf.html)
3. Look under the “System Information” section and enter the new name into
the “Name” field.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re-power the
printer to make the new settings take effect.
Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server. This will bring up a login screen:
telnet ipaddress
2. You should now see a prompt displayed that has the NIC’s IP address
followed by a colon then
root
.
ipaddress:root>
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver name name
4. Reset the unit to ensure the changes take effect.
reset
Note Changing the name will effect all of the protocols that are running on the
NIC.
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in
root
for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in
root
for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
Changing The Frame Type (NDS & Bindery)
225
Changing The Frame Type (NDS & Bindery)
The NIC allows the user to store a particular frame type for the unit to adhere
to in a Novell environment.
HTML Method
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the
print server over TCP/IP.
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://P5000LJIPaddress/networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html)
3. Look under the “Novell” section and go to the “Frame Type” field to select
the appropriate frame type.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re-power the
printer to make the new settings take effect.
Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server. This will bring up a login screen:
telnet ipaddress
2. You should now see a prompt displayed that has the NIC’s IP address
followed by a colon then
root
.
ipaddress:root>
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver novell frametype [ethernet2 | 802.3
|802.2 |802.2snap | autosense]
4. Reset the unit to make the changes take effect.
reset
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in
root
for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in
root
for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
226
Chapter 12 Novell NIC Configuration (10/100Base-T)
Changing The Print Server Mode (NDS & Bindery)
The NIC allows the user to store a particular mode for the unit to operate in.
This will be either NDS, Bindery, or autosense. If autosense is used, the NIC
will first attempt to log in to a NDS file server, and, if it fails, it will try to log in to
a Bindery file server.
HTML Method
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the
print server over TCP/IP.
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://P5000LJIPaddress/networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html)
3. Look under the “Novell” section and go to the “Service Type” field to
select the appropriate mode.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re-power the
printer to make the new settings take effect.
Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server. This will bring up a login screen:
telnet ipaddress
2. You should now see a prompt displayed that has the NIC’s IP address
followed by a colon then
root
.
ipaddress:root>
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver novell mode [nds | bindery | auto]
4. Reset the unit to make the changes take effect.
reset
Note If you are using both NDS and Bindery file servers in your setup, make
sure the mode is set to auto.
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in
root
for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in
root
for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
Setting The NIC Context (NDS)
227
Setting The NIC Context (NDS)
The NIC allows you to store the print server object in any context within the
NDS tree you choose. By default, the NIC will look for the print server object in
the same context as the file server object it connects to is stored in.
HTML Method
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the
print server over TCP/IP.
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://P5000LJIPaddress/networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html)
3. Look under the “Novell” section and enter the new context in the “NDS
Context” field.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re-power the
printer to make the new settings take effect.
Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server. This will bring up a login screen:
telnet ipaddress
2. You should now see a prompt displayed that has the NIC’s IP address
followed by a colon then
root
.
ipaddress:root>
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver novell context context
4. Reset the unit to make the changes take effect.
reset
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in
root
for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in
root
for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
228
Chapter 12 Novell NIC Configuration (10/100Base-T)
Setting The Print Server Preferred NDS Tree (NDS)
The NIC supports Novell environments that have multiple trees. If your
environment has more than one tree, you may want to set a preferred tree. By
default, the NIC will try to log in to each tree it finds until it is successful.
HTML Method
1. Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the
print server over TCP/IP.
2. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://P5000LJIPaddress/networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html)
3. Look under the “Novell” section and enter the preferred tree in the “NDS
Preferred Tree” field.
4. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically re-power the
printer to make the new settings take effect.
Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Telnet to the print server. This will bring up a login screen:
telnet ipaddress
2. You should now see a prompt displayed that has the NIC’s IP address
followed by a colon then
root
.
ipaddress:root>
3. At the prompt, enter:
store pserver novell tree tree
4. Reset the unit to make the changes take effect.
reset
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in
root
for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in
root
for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
NDS PSERVER Setup (Netware 4.x and 5.x)
229
Novell Host Configuration (10/100Base-T)
This section covers PSERVER and RPRINTER/NPRINTER setups on the
NIC. The NIC can handle up to eight RPRINTER/NPPRINTER setups.
Although the entire print setup is done through Netware Administrator or
PCONSOLE, you may need to communicate directly with the print server in
order to modify settings, monitor the unit, etc.
For Netware 4.x environments, you can obtain a NWAdmn3x snap-in program
called MPAdmin. This snap-in can be used to configure PSERVER setups as
well as additional settings on the NIC.
NDS PSERVER Setup (Netware 4.x and 5.x)
There are a number of ways to configure the NIC for use in a Novell NDS
PSERVER setup. These include using the MPAdmin snap-in for Netware
Administrator, using generic print server objects in Netware Administrator, or
by using PCONSOLE. The following steps describe a setup using generic
print server object in Netware Administrator. Setups using PCONSOLE are
less common and will not be discussed.
To create a printer/print queue in an NDS environment using Netware
Administrator print server objects, you need to complete the following steps:
1. Log in to NetWare Administrator as a user with security equal to “Admin”
on your Novell host.
2. Click with the right mouse button on a branch in the tree that you would
like to create a print queue object in.
3. Select “Create...” from the menu that pops up to bring up the “New
Object” dialogue.
4. Select “Print Queue” from the “Class of new object” list, and then click
“OK.”
5. Select “Directory Service Queue,” and type the name of the queue in the
“Print Queue name” field.
6. Fill in the “Print Queue Volume” field by typing in a volume or browsing for
one. Click “Create” when you are done.
7. Click with the right mouse button on a branch in the tree that you would
like to create a printer object in.
8. Select “Create...” from the menu that pops up to bring up the “New
Object” dialogue.
9. Select “Printer” from the “Class of new object” list, and then click “OK.”
Note NWAdmn3x is only included with Netware 4.11 and higher releases. If you
are using Netware 4.10, you can either upgrade to Netware 4.11 or go to
Novell’s web site and get the patches to upgrade the Nwadmin program for
Netware 4.10 to Nwadmn3x for Netware 4.11. Alternatively, you can
perform the setup without using MPAdmin.
230
Chapter 12 Novell Host Configuration (10/100Base-T)
10. Type in the name for the printer in the “Printer name” field.
In NDS, a printer object can only be attached to one print server object at a
time, as Novell is using the printer object to represent a physical printer. A
physical printer can only be attached to one parallel or serial port at a time.
Thus, if you assign a printer object to another print server object, the new print
server object will “steal” it from the old one (this also happens with non-NIC
print server objects).
To properly process print jobs sent to the NIC, the printer object created in
Novell must refer to the destination on this server and not to the actual
physical printer. On the NIC, print jobs must pass through an extra layer (a
“destination”) before being sent on to the printer. This destination allows for
further processing of the print job before sending it to the printer.
If you are using multiple print servers, you will have to either rename all your
destinations to ensure that no printer object names conflict or keep all the
printer objects for one print server in a different context than those for the
other print server.
11. Select “Define additional properties” and click “Create.”
12. Click “Assignments” in the dialogue that pops up, and then click the
“Add...” button.
13. Select the queue you defined earlier, or browse for a different one.
14. Click “OK” to assign this queue to this printer.
15. Click “OK” to close the Printers details dialogue and make the changes
permanent.
16. Click a branch in the tree (i.e., context) that you would like to create the
NIC print server object in.
17. Click with the right mouse button to bring up a submenu, and choose
“Create...” from this menu. A dialog titled “New Object” pops up.
18. Select “Print Server” in the “Class of new object” list, click “OK.”
19. Type in the name for the print server in the “Print Server name” field. By
default, the name is M_xxxxxx where xxxxxx equals the last six digits
of the print server’s Ethernet address found on the bottom of the device
(e.g., M_091C1A).
Note The Printer object name must match one of the destination names on the
NIC. Most likely, this will be d1prn.
Note If the context you choose is different than the one the file server object for
the file server you are using is in, you must set the context on the NIC. See
“Setting The NIC Context (NDS)” on page 227.
Bindery PSERVER Setup (Netware 3.x, 4.x, and 5.x)
231
20. Select the “Define additional properties” and click the “Create” button.
21. Click “Assignments” in the dialogue that pops up, and then click the
“Add...” button.
22. Select the printer you created earlier.
23. Click “OK” to assign this printer to this print server.
24. Click “OK” to close the printer servers details dialogue and make the
changes permanent.
25. Physically re-power the printer to make the new settings take effect.
Bindery PSERVER Setup (Netware 3.x, 4.x, and 5.x)
A Bindery PSERVER setup is possible under Netware 3.x, Netware 4.x and
Netware 5.x. If you are using Netware 4.x or 5.x, Bindery emulation is
required. Please consult your Novell manual on how to set up Bindery
emulation. A Bindery setup using PCONSOLE in Netware 3.x is described in
“NetWare Version 3.x RPRINTER Setup” on page 210. The setup using
PCONSOLE in Netware 4.x is described in “NetWare Version 4.x and 5.x
RPRINTER Setup” on page 213.
Referencing A Bindery Queue In NDS
(Netware 3.x, 4.x, and 5.x)
To reference a Bindery queue when you perform your PSERVER setup in
NDS, you create a PSERVER object for the NIC on the file server where the
Bindery queue resides. This is important because to service the queue, the
NIC must log on to the queue’s file server. Since the queue is not an NDS
queue, the NIC cannot log in under NDS, so it must log in under Bindery.
This only works if there is a valid PSERVER object on the file server. This
PSERVER object must have the same name that was used for the NDS
setup. By default, this will be “M_xxxxxx” where “xxxxxx” equals the last
six digits of the print server’s Ethernet address found on the bottom of the
device (e.g., M_091C1A). This PSERVER object does not need to have any
printers or queues assigned to it. Also, when referencing a Bindery queue in
NDS, the Novell Mode on the NIC must be set to “auto” so that both NDS and
Bindery logins are possible. See “Setting The NIC Context (NDS)” on page
227.
Note The name you use here must match the name stored on the NIC. This
name can be found by using the
list pserver
command. See “List
Commands” on page 254 for more information.
232
Chapter 12 Novell Host Configuration (10/100Base-T)
RPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup (Netware 3.x, 4.x, and 5.x)
This procedure associates an existing PSERVER with a remote NIC acting as
a RPRINTER/NPRINTER in a NetWare 3.x or Netware 4.x or Netware 5.x
environment. It is the PSERVER’s responsibility to get jobs from the queue
and to pass them off to the NIC acting as the remote printer. Unlike a
PSERVER setup, the NIC does not deal directly with the queues.
The following steps assume that you have created a PSERVER object in
either Netware 3.x or Netware 4.x or Netware 5.x and have assigned printers
and queues to it. If you have not already done this, do it now. The setup is
similar to creating a PSERVER setup for the NIC, except that there are no
restrictions about which names you may use for the print server and printer
objects.
HTML Method
1. Load a PSERVER on your Netware 3.x or Netware 4.x or Netware 5.x file
server (i.e., issue a
load pserver pservername
command on the file
server).
2. Load a Web browser on a network station that can communicate with the
print server over TCP/IP.
3. Direct your Web browser to URL:
http://P5000LJIPaddress/networkConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/networkConf.html)
Note As an RPRINTER/NPRINTER, the print server does not use a login ID. A
non-NIC print server such as PSERVER.NLM or PSERVER.EXE must be
running for RPRINTER to operate. Also, if the NIC loses a connection to a
PSERVER, it will automatically reconnect when that server becomes
available again.
Note Write down the printer number(s) assigned to the printer(s) you are going
to use for this setup. You will need them in a later step.
Note If it is an NDS PSERVER on a Netware 4.x or 5.x file server, you must
specify the PSERVER name and context for
pservername
. For example:
load pserver .sales_ps.sales.hp
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in
root
for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
RPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup (Netware 3.x, 4.x, and 5.x)
233
4. Look under the “Novell” section and find a row in the RPRINTER
category.
5. Click “Enabled” and enter the name used with the PSERVER.NLM started
in step 1 into the “Print Server Name” field.
6. Enter the printer number of the printer you would like serviced into the
“Printer Number” field, and then select the destination on the NIC you
would like to use for output.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each additional printer you would like to
have serviced.
8. Click the SUBMIT button when done and physically re-power the printer
to make the new settings take effect.
Manual (Telnet) Method
1. Load a PSERVER on your Netware 3.x or Netware 4.x or Netware 5.x file
server (i.e., issue a
load pserver pservername
command on the file
server).
2. Telnet to the print server. This will bring up a login screen:
telnet ipaddress
3. You should now see a prompt display that has the NIC’s IP address
followed by a colon then
root
.
ipaddress:root>
4. At the prompt,
store
the RPRINTER settings on the NIC. The
pservername
refers to the existing PSERVER.NLM on the file server
created in step 1.
Syntax:
store rprinter add pservername printernumber
P5000LJdestination
Note If it is an NDS pserver, only enter the PSERVER name and not the context
(e.g.,
sales_ps
).
Note If it is an NDS PSERVER on a Netware 4.x or 5.x file server, you must
specify the pserver name and context for
pservername
. For example:
load pserver .sales_ps.sales.hp
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in
root
for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
234
Chapter 12 NPDS Configuration (Netware 4.11 and Above)
Example for an RPRINTER servicing printer
0
of the PSERVER.NLM
called
pserver1
and sending jobs to the NIC destination
d1prn
:
store rprinter add pserver1 0 d1prn
5. Physically re-power the printer to make the new settings take effect.
Wait two minutes and then check your PSERVER to see if the appropriate
printer is being serviced. The printer should display a message such as
“Waiting for job.” At this point, the NIC knows to receive any jobs this
PSERVER.NLM has to send to it through the defined printer.
NPDS Configuration (Netware 4.11 and Above)
Overview
In 1998, Novell released a new printing system designed to make network
administration of printers easier and more fully functional. This system is
called Novell Distributed Print Services (NDPS), and can be used with Novell
Netware 4.11 and above along with the supporting software on clients. This
section gives high-level instructions to install and use NDPS with the printer.
These instructions assume that you understand NDPS architecture well
enough to be able to use these instructions along with Novell’s instructions to
install the NIC into NDPS. See Novell’s documentation to better understand
terms not defined here.
The drivers used with the P5000LJ printer can be automatically downloaded
into a Windows machine when a NDPS printer is installed, if the driver is
installed into the NDPS Broker Resource Management Service. See Novell’s
documentation for more information.
The NIC can be installed into NDPS using the Novell Printer Gateway feature
of NDPS. Within this Novell Printer Gateway, use the following various printer
connection modes to install the printer into NDPS:
•setup using Forward Jobs to a Queue Mode
•setup using LPR Mode
•setup using PPRINTER Mode
Note If it is an NDS pserver, only enter the PSERVER name and not the context
(e.g.,
sales_ps
).
RPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup (Netware 3.x, 4.x, and 5.x)
235
Setup using Forward Jobs to a Queue Mode
In this mode, an NDPS printer agent receives jobs from an NDPS client, then
forwards these jobs to an existing Netware queue. The Netware queue would
then be serviced by the NIC in some manner.
1. The P5000LJ printer must first be set up to service some Netware queue,
either by doing a PSERVER or RPRINTER mode setup from previous
chapters.
2. When setting up the NDPS printer agent, use the “Novell Printer
Gateway.”
3. For the “Novell PDS,” choose “((NONE).”
4. For the “Port Handler,” choose “Froward Jobs to a Queue,” then choose
the queue used in step 1 above, and note the Caution statement about
the Queue User Name.
5. For the “Select Printer Drivers” dialog, choose no driver unless you have
a driver into the Broker’s RMS which is to be used with the P5000LJ
printer.
Setup using LPR Mode
In this mode, an NDPS printer agent receives jobs from an NDPS client, then
forwards these jobs to a printer using the LPR protocol.
1. The NIC must first be set up with IP connectivity and be able to receive
jobs using the LPR protocol.
2. When setting up the NDPS printer agent, use the “Novell Printer
Gateway.”
3. For the “Novell PDS,” choose “((NONE)).”
4. For the “Port Handler,” choose “Remote (LPR on IP),” then enter the
hostname/ipaddress and printer name
(d1prn - d4prn by default) in the next dialog.
NOTE: When the IPDS feature is installed, queue name d4prn is not
available.
5. For the “Select Printer Drivers” dialog, choose no driver unless you have
a driver installed into the Broker’s RMS which is to be used with the
P5000LJ printer.
Setup Using RPRINTER Mode
In this mode, an NDPS printer agent receives jobs from an NDPS client, then
forwards these jobs to a printer using the RPRINTER IPX protocol.
1. The NIC must first be set up to function in RPRINTER mode, choosing
any desired Print Server Name and Printer Number.
2. When setting up the NDPS printer agent, use the “Novell Printer
Gateway.”
3. For the “Novell PDS,” choose “((NONE)).”
4. For the “Port Handler,” choose “Remote (rprinter on IPX).”
236
Chapter 12 Troubleshooting (10/100Base-T)
5. In the next dialog, for the “SAP Name” enter the Print Server Name from
step 1, and enter the Printer Number from step 1 above.
6. For the “Select Printer Drivers” dialog, choose no driver unless you have
a driver installed into the Broker’s RMS which is to be used with the
P5000LJ printer.
The P5000LJ printer will need to be rebooted to attach to the NDPS printer
agent in this mode.
Troubleshooting (10/100Base-T)
PSERVER Setup
If there is no connection with the NIC after you have completed the print
setup, there are several things to confirm.
•Have you tried repowering the NIC? Wait about a minute before checking
to see if it has logged in and attached to a queue.
•Is the network connector fastened tightly to the unit?
•Is the NIC already servicing a queue on another file server? If so, it
cannot service another file server at the same time.
•Is there an available NetWare user license for the NIC to utilize while it
acts as a PSERVER? Every PSERVER takes up one user license since it
logs in to the Novell file server.
•When going through the PSERVER setup steps, did you name the NIC
“M_xxxxxx” where “xxxxxx” equals the last six digits of the Ethernet
address? This is the default format of the unit’s name when it is acting as
a PSERVER.
•Has the NIC’s name been changed from its default of “M_xxxxxx”, and,
if so, have you incorporated this new name into your PSERVER setup?
•Is there a password set for the Print Server to utilize when it is logging in
to the file server? Make sure the NIC’s PSERVER password matches that
of the PSERVER setup or set both places to no password.
Note The debug information that is mentioned in this section can be
found by either
telnet
ing to the NIC and issuing the commands
given, or by launching a browser to the Novell status page on the
NIC
(e.g.,
http://192.168.11.9/networkNovellStatus.html
).
Note This “M_xxxxxx” name must have six digits after the “_”, so if necessary,
pad out each byte with a zero (0).
PSERVER Setup
237
•When setting the NIC up as a PSERVER, did you specify a destination on
the NIC (e.g.,
d1prn
) for the printer name, and did you remember this
name is case sensitive?
•Does the destination you used in your PSERVER setup have the Novell
service enabled? See Chapter 13, “Commands” for information on
enabling/disabling services.
•Try doing a
debug nest ipx
telnet command on the NIC (or find the
“IPX Layer” section on the Novell HTML status page). Check that a board
has been bound to the NIC and that the network number is correct for
your network. If not, you may want to set a specific frame type for the NIC
to use. You can find out what frame type is bound to which board number
using the
debug nest odi
command (or from the “ODI Layer” section
on the Novell HTML status page).
•Try a
debug nest fserver
telnet command (or find the “File Servers”
section on the Novell HTML status page). If no file servers show up, then
there is probably a problem with the network connection, or the NIC is not
on a Novell network. Try a
debug nest sap
telnet command (or find the
“SAP” section on the Novell HTML status page) to see if the NIC is seeing
any network activity.
•Try a
debug nest pserver
telnet command (or find the “PSERVER”
section on the Novell HTML status page). Look for a valid queue under
the “EPS QUEUES” section. If the printer field contains a number and
there is a valid file server but no queue, then you probably made an error
in the setup and should try again. If it is an NDS PSERVER setup, look for
a line with the following type of message “Could not login to NDS Tree
<TREE> as <PSERVER.<CONTEXT>.” This means that either the tree is
wrong; the context stored on the NIC for the print server object is wrong;
the print server object password is wrong; or the print server object name
is wrong.
Note NIC destinations are case sensitive so they will not be recognized if they
are typed incorrectly. By default, they are all in lowercase. If you are setting
up in a NetWare 4.x environment, the destination must be renamed to
uppercase to match the PCONSOLE or Netware Administrator entry.
Please see
set dest destination name newname
on page 247 for
information on changing names.
238
Chapter 12 Troubleshooting (10/100Base-T)
•Try a
debug nest rprinter
telnet command (or find the “RPRINTER”
section on the Novell HTML status page). Look for the following type of
line: “(0:ENPReadConfig):[0:213] Destination = <X>,” where <X> is
between 0 and 3. If they all say “Destination = 65536,” then the
PSERVER setup did not complete properly. If there was a valid queue
under “EPS QUEUES” in the
debug nest pserver
command, then the
printer name probably doesn’t match an existing destination name on the
NIC, or Novell has been disabled for that destination. If there is a valid
“Destination =” line, then double check that there is an entry for this
number under the “ENP INFO” section.
•Try a
debug nest logs
telnet command (or find the “General
Messages” section on the Novell HTML status page). Look for a valid
entry for the printer. It will look something like this: “(0:InitSinglePrinter):
printer=<X> name=<NAME>.” Then look for the following lines: “(0:Printf):
RemoteMonitor(<X>); printer is” and “(0:Printf): WAITING_FOR_JOB.” If
you see these lines, the NIC is setup properly and the problem points to a
setup issue on the workstation.
•If the NIC has logged in to the file server but has not attached to the
queue, there may be a permission problem. Make sure the appropriate
users have rights to this queue (they should be in the group “everyone”).
Also, you may have to assign the queue to
root
so it is available to
everyone.
•Did you rename any objects in Netware Administrator during your setup?
Netware Administrator seems to have problems renaming objects. If so,
delete everything and start over.
If none of these solutions help your situation, you may want to try the whole
setup again. Completely delete the setup that is giving you trouble and go
through the setup again following each step carefully.
Note Debug messages for the PSERVER setup are in the RPRINTER section
here because the PSERVER setup on the NIC shares some code with the
RPRINTER setup.
Note Be sure to reboot the printer before beginning a new setup and after
completing a PSERVER setup. Wait at least a minute for the Print Server
to log in and attach to a queue.
RPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup
239
RPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup
If there is no connection with the NIC after you have completed the print
setup, there are several things to confirm.
•Have you tried repowering the printer? Wait about a minute before
checking to see if it has logged in and attached to a queue.
•Is the network connector fastened tightly to the unit?
•Is the NIC already servicing a queue on another file server? If so, it
cannot service another file server at the same time.
•Is there an entry when a
list rprinter
telnet command is done on the
NIC (not found on the Novell HTML status page)? When the NIC is
configured as an RPRINTER, this command should produce the
appropriate entry.
•If the NIC has logged in to the file server but has not attached to the
queue, there may be a permission problem. Make sure the appropriate
users have rights to this queue (they should be in the group “everyone”).
Also, you may have to assign the queue to
root
so it is available to
everyone.
•Does the destination you used in your RPRINTER setup have the Novell
service enabled? Please see Chapter 13, “Commands” for information on
enabling/disabling services.
•Try doing a
debug nest ipx
telnet command on the NIC (or find the
“IPX Layer” section on the Novell HTML status page). Check that a board
has been bound to the NIC and that the network number is correct for
your network. If not, you may want to set a specific frame type for the NIC
to use. See “Changing The Frame Type (NDS & Bindery)” on page 225.
You can find out what frame type is bound to which board number using
the
debug nest odi
command (or from the “ODI Layer” section on the
Novell HTML status page).
•Try a
debug nest sap
telnet command (or find the “SAP” section on the
Novell HTML status page) to see if the NIC is seeing any network activity.
•Try a
debug nest rprinter
telnet command (or find the “RPRINTER”
section on the Novell HTML status page). Look for an entry for one of the
numbers 4 to 7 under “ENP INFO.” The “dest” field should match the
destination used on the NIC. If no entry is found, check that the
destination has the Novell service enabled. If the “ERROR-CODE” field
has an error of 308, make sure no other RPRINTER setup is servicing
this printer object at the same time. Only one RPRINTER connection is
allowed to service a PSERVER.NLM printer.
Note The debug information that is mentioned in the section can be
found by either
telnet
ing to the NIC and issuing the commands
given, or launching a browser to the Novell status page on the
NIC.
(e.g.,
http://192.168.11.9/networkNovellStatus.html
)
240
Chapter 12 Troubleshooting (10/100Base-T)
•If the NIC has logged in to the file server but has not attached to the
queue, there may be a permission problem. Make sure the appropriate
users have rights to this queue (they should be in the group “everyone”).
Also, you may have to assign the queue to
root
so it is available to
everyone.
If none of these solutions help your situation, you may want to try the whole
setup again. Completely delete the setup that is giving you trouble and go
through the setup again following each step carefully.
Printing Related
The job goes to the queue but nothing prints
If nothing is printing, make sure you have a connection to the NIC first. See
the PSERVER or RPRINTER sections above if you are having connection-
related problems. Otherwise, consider these points when trying to solve
printing problems in a Novell environment:
•Does the job leave the queue, or is it stuck there indefinitely? If it leaves
properly, the problem points to the actual printing mechanism on your
Novell system (e.g., CAPTURE, NPRINT, etc.); to the print job format; or
to the printer itself. Otherwise, review the configuration steps you have
already followed.
•Have you confirmed that you can print from the NIC to the printer ignoring
the Novell setup altogether? Please see
start fox|tts|loopb prn
on page 256 for a good test.
•Is anything happening on the printer when the print job is sent?
Sometimes, the print job may have arrived at the printer but can be
waiting for a manual form feed. If this is the case, please see “Set
Commands” on page 247 for information on trailer strings.
•Is the printing mechanism you are using (e.g., CAPTURE, NPRINT, etc.)
configured to service the appropriate queue?
•Is the NIC configured as the queue’s “Currently Attached Server”? If not,
make sure you have associated the queue and the printer. See “Novell
Host Configuration” on page 208.
•Is there a hold on the print job? If you select the job from PCONSOLE’s
CURRENT PRINT JOB ENTRIES, change the User Hold or Operator
Hold to “No.”
•If you look in PCONSOLE’s CURRENT QUEUE STATUS within the
PRINT QUEUE INFORMATION menu, is the server configured to service
entries in this queue? It is possible to turn servicing off here.
Note Be sure to reboot the printer before beginning a new setup and after
completing an RPRINTER setup. Wait at least a minute for the Print
Server to login and attach to a queue.
Printing Related
241
If you have followed the suggestions above and are still having printing
problems, try rebooting the NIC. Then either review every step you took when
configuring the NIC, or try re-doing the setup, paying special attention to each
step explained in “Novell Host Configuration” on page 208.
The job prints incorrectly
This category can be broken down into several sub-categories such as lost
characters, garbled data, extra banner pages, or blank pages at the end of the
job. However, the reason for these mishaps can generally be traced to the
printing mechanism used on your Novell system. These points should be
considered when configuring your print method (e.g., CAPTURE, NPRINT,
etc.):
•Did you include the “No Tabs” option?
•Did you specify “No Banner” with PostScript printers?
•Did you turn off banner pages and form feeds if this is already taken care
of within an application or on the NIC? Doubling up of these types of print
features is easy to do since these options are provided both on the NIC
(in a model) and within the print command.
•Are you running the latest version of PSERVER (later than 1.22)? If not,
upgrade the PSERVER software.
•In a PSERVER setup, did you ensure that the printer name (e.g.,
d1prn
)
was set up as “Defined Elsewhere”?
•Is the timeout option in the CAPTURE command set high enough so the
printer does not time out before the print processing has had a chance to
complete? This can be a problem with graphic jobs.
Some other things to consider when garbled data persists are:
•tab expansion (
xtab
) set on (in a model) with graphic jobs
•the correct driver for the printer if printing from within Windows
For additional information on these suggestions or on various Novell printing
mechanisms, please refer to your NetWare User Manuals.
242
Chapter 12 Troubleshooting (10/100Base-T)
243
13 Commands
Command Shell Overview
The NIC comes with an in-depth command shell which allows you to
manipulate objects like destinations, I/O ports, and models. Additionally, it
provides you with monitoring and troubleshooting capabilities.
Access Methods
There are many ways this command shell can be accessed:
•built-in HTML forms
•a Telnet session from a TCP/IP host to the NIC
•a single remote shell command (i.e., rsh, rcmd, remsh) from a TCP/IP
host
Main Command Shell Prefixes
All configurable commands start with either store or set. Troubleshooting
commands usually start with debug, and view commands start with list.
If the store prefix is used, the NIC must be repowered for the changes to
take effect. Since store affects flash memory settings only, the print server
must reset and read the new settings now in flash memory.
If the set prefix is used, a save command must also be executed so that the
new settings are retained after power cycles. Since set only affects the
settings in memory, they will be lost after a power cycle unless they are saved
to flash memory.
Getting Command Help
The NIC command shell provides several online help tools. These include the
following:
? Command
Typing ? when logged in to the command shell will produce a full listing of all
commands available.
244
Chapter 13 Complete Command List
Command Prefixes
Typing in the first portion of a command will produce an error message
showing the correct syntax. For example, typing in store tcpip will
produce a list of all commands that start with this prefix.
Complete Command List
This section outlines the entire NIC command set including the command
syntax, a description, and, in most cases, an example for each command
listed.
Store Commands
These commands change the settings stored in flash memory and do not
affect the current or working settings in memory. A power cycle is needed
before the stored settings become current.
store ifc ifnum utp [-]li [-]rx
store ifc 1 utp li
Modify the physical UTP interface properties where li enables link
integrity and rx enables the increased receive threshold.
store ifc from default
Set all UTP settings back to factory defaults.
store ifc from current
Store all current UTP settings to flash memory so they are retained after a
power cycle. This ensures all current settings match what is stored in
flash memory.
store pserver opts [[-]jobsecurity] [jobtimeout
seconds]
store pserver opts jobsecurity jobtimeout 5
If jobsecurity is disabled, any user can cancel queued jobs on the
NIC including guest users. If jobtimeout is set to some value other
than 0, the NIC will only wait this amount of
seconds
when getting printer
feedback. This is only used if you have a logpath port and type set on a
particular destination.
store pserver tcpsocket TCPportnumber port
newTCPportnumber
store pserver tcpsocket 4000 port 5000
Change a pre-defined
TCPportnumber
on the NIC to a
newTCPportnumber
. The default number is 9100 for prn.
Note If you see the word ifnum in any shell commands, you should substitute a
1 unless directed to do otherwise. This 1 represents the one network
interface (i.e., Ethernet) supported.
Store Commands
245
store pserver tcpsocket TCPportnumber dest destination
store pserver tcpsocket 5000 dest d1prn
Assign a pre-defined
TCPportnumber
to a particular
destination
on
the NIC. Therefore, if you are using a print method that sends jobs directly
to a TCP port number, you still have the option to process the job data
through this destination setting.
store pserver novell passwd password
store pserver novell passwd mplex
Store the
password
for the NIC to use when logging in to a Novell file
server. This
password
would have to match one set on the file server.
store pserver novell user name username
store pserver novell user name micro1
Define a
username
on the NIC to be used when it logs in to a Novell file
server to find information. This
username
must match a user pre-defined
on the Novell file server.
store pserver novell user passwd password
store pserver novell user passwd mplex2
Define a
password
on the NIC for the Novell user already defined. This
password
must match the one stored on the Novell file server.
Passwords are optional as long as there is not one defined on the file
server for the user.
store pserver novell fserver add|del fileservername
store pserver novell fserver add fs1
Add or remove a server entry on the NIC for the Novell file server it will be
servicing.
store pserver smb workgrp newworkgroupname
store pserver smb workgrp eng
Define a different Windows workgroup as defined by
newworkgroupname
for the NIC to be visible within. By default, the print
server only comes up within the group called “WORKGROUP.”
store pserver from default
Set all general print server settings back to factory defaults.
store pserver from current
Store all current general print server settings to flash memory so they are
retained after a power cycle. This ensures all current settings match what
is stored in flash memory.
store rprinter add|del printservername printernumber
destination
store rprinter add pserver1 0 d1prn
Add or delete the RPRINTER settings on the NIC for a Novell
environment. The
printservername
must be the name of an existing
PSERVER.NLM on your Novell file server. The
printernumber
is the
printer number within this PSERVER.NLM. The
destination
is the
queue on the NIC where the print jobs will be sent to.
store tcpip ifnum addr IPaddress
store tcpip 1 addr 192.75.11.9
246
Chapter 13 Complete Command List
Store the IP address for the NIC.
store tcpip ifnum mask netmask
store tcpip 1 mask 255.255.255.0
Store the subnet mask for the NIC.
store tcpip ifnum opts [[-]rarp] [[-]bootp] [[-]dhcp]
store tcpip 1 opts -rarp -bootp -dhcp
Enable or disable the automatic RARP, BOOTP, or DHCP requests for IP
addresses upon bootup. If you are storing the NIC TCP/IP network
settings within the device, you will not need to rely on RARP, BOOTP, or
DHCP for new settings.
store tcpip ifnum frametype [[-]ethernet2]
[[-]802.2snap]
store tcpip 1 frametype ethernet2 802.2snap
Control which frame type(s) is supported with the TCP/IP protocol. By
default, both
ethernet2
and
802.2snap
are enabled but normal
TCP/IP communications rely on Ethernet 2. This setting has no affect on
other supported network protocols (e.g., Novell).
store tcpip route add|del host|net IPaddress ifnum
store tcpip route add net 192.75.12.0 1
store tcpip route del net 192.75.12.9 1
Add or delete a static route to a particular TCP/IP host or subnet specified
by
IPaddress
so the NIC knows how to communicate with it. Normally
one entry for a default router/gateway is all that is needed for
communications between different subnets. Please see the next
command for details.
store tcpip route add|del default routerIPaddress
ifnum
store tcpip route add default 192.75.11.1 1
Store a default router/gateway defined by
routerIPaddress
so the NIC
knows where to direct packets destined for another subnet. It is easier to
store one default entry rather than an entry per remote host or network as
in the previous command.
store tcpip tcp rxwin packets
store tcpip tcp rxwin 2
Determine the receive window size for the NIC. Usually the
packets
value ranges from 2 to 8 with the lower number allowing for more
simultaneous TCP connections with the print server.
store tcpip tcp opts [-]keepalive [-]disbufmgmt
store tcpip tcp opts keepalive -disbufmgmt
Control whether the NIC maintains a connection with a host when data
cannot be accepted into its buffer. Normally the
keepalive
feature is
enabled so when the printer can not accept data, the print job connection
is maintained and continued once the situation clears. If
disbufmgmt
is
disabled (i.e., “-”), the NIC will not buffer any data when there is a blocked
situation with the printer. Normally it is best to have both
keepalive
and
disbufmgmt
enabled.
store tcpip tcp access [root] add|del IPaddress
Set Commands
247
store tcpip tcp access add 192.75.11.25
Add or remove an entry from the NIC TCP access list defined by
IPaddress
. If the list has an entry, only this host can print to and
remotely interact with the print server.
store tcpip from default
Set all TCP/IP network settings back to factory defaults.
store tcpip from current
Store all current TCP/IP network settings to flash memory so they are
retained after a power cycle. This ensures all current settings match what
is stored in flash memory.
Set Commands
These settings alter the current or working settings in memory only.
Therefore, they will be lost if the NIC is power cycled. To ensure this does not
happen, be sure to issue a save command so the current settings get written
to flash memory.
set date year month day
set date 1997 02 10
Set the current date noting the four-digit
year
, the two-digit
month
from
01 through 12, and the
day
being the number in the month. If the NIC is
reset, this value will be lost so you will need to set the date again.
set dest destination name newname
set dest d1prn name laser
Change the current name of the
destination
to a new name as
indicated by
newname
. This
newname
must be nine characters or less or it
will be truncated. These names are case sensitive.
set dest destination backchannel prn [prn]
set dest d1prn backchannel prn
Establish a return path for printer feedback for a given
destination
.
Since the NIC I/O port is bi-directional, however, you will most likely use
the same I/O port that the
destination
is currently sending jobs to.
set dest destination model modelname
set dest d1prn model m4
Associate a model with a destination. Jobs sent to the named
destination
are processed according to the options defined in the
named model.
set dest destination logpath logpathname
set dest d1prn logpath l4
Associate a logpath with a destination. Jobs sent to the named
destination
are logged according to the settings defined in the named
logpath.
set dest destination service [[-]socket][[-]lpd]
[[-]lpsched] [[-]rprinter] [[-]pserver] [[-]netbios]
[[-]ftpd]
set dest d1prn service -netbios
248
Chapter 13 Complete Command List
Set the
destination
to handle only certain print services. To add a
service, specify the service name. To disable a service, use “
-
” before the
name. The available services are:
socket Direct socket printing via TCP/IP.
lpd LPR printing with TCP/IP including LPR clients on any
platform.
lpsched LP or System V printing with TCP/IP.
rprinter Novell RPRINTER support.
pserver Novell PSERVER support.
netbios Windows 95 and Windows for Workgroups printing.
ftpd Printing using the File Transfer Protocol (ftp) via TCP/IP.
set dest from default
Set all destination settings back to factory defaults.
set dest from stored
Set all current destination settings to the values stored in flash memory.
set logpath logpath name newname
set logpath l1 name pagecount
Change the current name of the
logpath
to a new name as indicated by
newname
. This
newname
must be nine characters or less or it will be
truncated. These names are case sensitive.
set logpath logpath type [[-]job] [[-]user] [[-]pgcnt]
[[-]cksum] [[-]printer] [[-]ioport]
set logpath l2 type job user printer pgcnt
Establish the type of printer and print job logging to be done within this
logpath
. The options are:
job Job ID, username, etc.
user User ID along with three messages per job about start and
finish.
pgcnt For total pages printed in a job.
cksum 16-bit checksum value to confirm integrity of data printed.
printer For special printer feedback.
ioport Printer error messages determined through the parallel port
pins.
Set Commands
249
set logpath logpath port TCPportnumber| email|syslog
set logpath l3 port 2000
Determine where the log information should be sent for a print job or
attached printer. The choices are:
TCPportnumber TCP port number ranging from 1024 to 65000.
email Particular user's email address. This address is set
using the set sysinfo email
emailname@IPaddress command.
syslog A central TCP/IP host running the SYSLOG daemon.
This host is set using the set sysinfo syslog
IPaddress command.
set logpath from default
Set all logpath settings back to factory defaults.
set logpath from stored
Set all current logpath settings to the values stored in flash memory.
set model model name newname
set model m1 name landscape
Change the current name of the
model
to a new name as indicated by
newname
. This
newname
must be nine characters or less or it will be
truncated. These names are case sensitive.
set model model type raw
set model m2 type raw
Set the model
type
to
raw
so that it does not process the data passing
through it in any way.
set model model banner [ps|text|auto [after]]
set model m2 banner text
Determine whether a banner page should be added for print jobs passing
through the
model
mapped destination/queue.
auto
will determine which
type is needed depending on the type of print job data passing through.
By default, banner pages are added to the front of the job. If
after
is set,
the banner page will come at the end.
set model model stty [[-]onlcr] [[-]descramble] [xtab
tablength|none]
set model m3 stty onlcr
Control extra job processing done by the
model
. The processing options
are:
onlcr Carriage return insertion for Unix text jobs. Adds
carriage returns to text jobs with solitary linefeeds.
This will prevent stair-stepped output or output
running off the right side of the page.
descramble Automatic descrambling of print jobs passing through
which have been scrambled using the proprietary
scramble Unix utility, npscramble.
xtab Tab expansion from 1 to 16 spaces.
250
Chapter 13 Complete Command List
set model model trailer trailerstring
set model m7 trailer $FF
Set a trailer string to be sent to the printer at the end of any print jobs
passing through this
model
.
trailerstring
can consist of up to nine
elements. An example element is a hexadecimal code (e.g., 0x04) or a
pre-defined variable on the print server (e.g., $FF for a formfeed). Use
list var to see all available variables.
set model from default
Set all model settings back to factory defaults.
set model from stored
Set all current model settings to the values stored in flash memory.
set prn [-]autofd
set prn -autofd
Assert or do not assert the AUTOFD line for carriage return insertion. This
only affects printers that support this function (e.g., impact printers).
set prn flush
set prn flush
Flush the data in the parallel port input and output buffers.
set prn unlock
set prn unlock
Release the access lock on the parallel port.
set prn timeout minutes |none
set prn timeout none
Terminate the print job sent to the parallel port if it is not printed after the
timeout period in
minutes
expires. The
minutes
value ranges from 0
though 255 with 0 indicating no timing out to take place. This is the default
setting and should be fine for most print setups.
set prn [-]opost
set prn -opost
Allow or disallow output processing on the parallel port such as carriage
return insertion (i.e.,
onlcr
).
set prn [-]onlcr
set prn -onlcr
Enable or disable carriage return insertion on the parallel port. This may
be needed for Unix text jobs coming through with solitary linefeeds. This
feature is almost always set at the model level rather than the I/O port
level though.
set prn xtab tablength |none
set prn xtab none
Set the tabstop width as indicated by
tablength
. The range is 1 through
16 spaces.
set prn from default
Set all parallel port settings back to factory defaults.
set prn from stored
Set all current parallel port settings to the values stored in flash memory.
Set Commands
251
set snmp
To add a user named
snmp
with root privileges, please follow the steps
below:
1. Login to the NIC as a root user.
2. Add a user named
snmp
.
set user add snmp
3. Set the user type to
root
.
set user type snmp root
4. Set the password for the
snmp
user.
set user passwd snmp snmppassword
5. Save the changes.
save
The user
snmp
is now created and
snmppassword
is the only community
string which will allow write access.
set snmp manager index ipaddress trap-community
The Print Server continuously generates traps, but unless the trap table is
filled in, no SNMP manager will receive this information. To set the Print
Server to send traps to a particular SNMP manager, use this command to
add an SNMP manager to the trap table.
index
is the index number of the trap table.
ipaddress
is the IP
address of the SNMP manager receiving traps.
trap-community
is the
community string sent along with the trap information.
set sysinfo name newname
set sysinfo name salesprinter
Set a descriptive name defined by
newname
for NIC identification
purposes. This is not used in the operation of the print server in any way.
set sysinfo location description
set sysinfo location salesdept
Set the physical location of the NIC. This is for identification purposes and
is not used in the operation of the print server in any way.
set sysinfo contact contactname
set sysinfo contact Paul_Harris
Set a person or department to contact in case of print server trouble.
set sysinfo loginfo [-]sys | [-]tcp | [-]ipx | [-]spx
set sysinfo loginfo -sys ipx
Set the NIC debugging information type. Usually this information includes
unexpected errors or exceptions from the print server divided into these
groups:
sys General system messages.
tcp TCP stack messages.
ipx IPX stack messages.
spx SPX stack messages.
252
Chapter 13 Complete Command List
set sysinfo logport null|syslog
set sysinfo logport null
Define where the debugging information should be sent to. This can be
sent to an output device off of the NIC I/O port or to a central TCP/IP host
running a SYSLOG daemon. To set this host, use the command set
sysinfo syslog hostIPaddress.
set sysinfo email emailname@IPaddress
set sysinfo email joe@192.75.11.5
Define the user email address to receive printer and job logging
information from a particular logpath on the NIC.
emailname
is the host
or IP name of the user, and
IPaddress
is the IP address where the mail
is stored on your network.
set sysinfo syslog hostIPaddress
set sysinfo syslog 192.75.11.30
Set the IP address of the host running the SYSLOG daemon. NIC
debugging or print job and printer logging information can be sent to that
IP address.
set sysinfo dns DNSserverIPaddress
set sysinfo dns 192.75.11.2
Set your DNS server IP address so the NIC can resolve host names when
used with its built-in Telnet and Ping clients.
set sysinfo descramblekey hexvalue
set sysinfo descramblekey 1234
Set the key value used for descrambling print jobs that have passed
through the npscramble utility on a TCP/IP host. This key is a four-digit
hexadecimal value obtained from the host software, npscramble. Within
the npscramble source code, there is a variable called SR_KEY which
contains the default key value. This can be changed to any four-digit
value you would like.
set sysinfo module [[-]novell] [[-]netbios]
set sysinfo module -novell
Enable and disable certain network protocol stacks within the NIC.
Sometimes it helps to disable any protocols you are not using on your
network.
set time hours [minutes [seconds ]]
set time 10 30
Set the current time noting the
hours
based on the 24-hour system and
the
minutes
and
seconds
ranging from 0 through 59. If the NIC is reset,
this value will be lost so you will need to set the time again.
Note This is not printer or job logging information.
Set Commands
253
set user add|del username
set user add eng
Add or remove a user on the NIC defined by
username
.
set user passwd username password
set user passwd eng mplex1
Assign a
password
to a defined user on the NIC. This
password
must
be less than eleven characters.
set user type username root|guest
set user type eng root
Assign root or guest privileges to a particular user defined by
username
.
Guest permissions allow viewing of settings only. Root permissions allow
complete control of the NIC.
set user from default
Set all user settings back to factory defaults.
set user from stored
Set all current user settings to the values stored in flash memory.
set user passwd snmp com_name
Sets the new SNMP R/W community name as the
com_name
value.
set var variablename variablestring
set var LANDSCAPE 0x1b 0x26 0x6c 0x31 0x4f
set var FINISH $FF $PCL-RST
Define a new variable to be used in header, trailer, or switch strings on
the NIC and call it
variablename
.
variablestring
can be a space-
separated list of words, hexadecimal numbers
(e.g., 0x04), or references to other pre-defined variables. It is easiest to
make up the
variablestring
with hexadecimal values as shown in the
example.
One variable counts as one element within header and trailer strings.
Defined variables are referenced in strings by placing an $ before the
variable name (e.g., set model m1 trailer $FF).
set var from default
Set all variable settings back to factory defaults.
set var from stored
Set all current variable settings to the values stored in flash memory.
Note Be careful not to delete the
root
user, or you will be unable to configure
any further settings on the print server. You will have to go back to factory
defaults to correct this problem.
254
Chapter 13 Complete Command List
List Commands
These commands list the current or working settings for a particular section
within the command shell. To view stored settings in flash memory, you will
need to add in stored within the beginning of any of the following
commands. For example, list prn shows you the current prn settings but
list stored prn shows you the settings sitting in flash memory.
Normally these should match.
list arp
List the current ARP table that the NIC adheres to in a TCP/IP network.
list date
List the current date on the NIC.
list dest
List the current destination settings (e.g., names and mapped I/O ports,
models, and logpaths).
list diff
List the differences between the current settings and the stored settings in
flash memory. Normally, you want these values to match, so issue a
save command followed by a reset.
list ifc
List the current UTP interface settings (e.g., link integrity).
list key
List the license details and license key number.
list logins
List any active user logins on the NIC.
list logpath
List the current logpath settings (e.g., names and mapped destinations).
list model
List the current model settings (e.g., names and mapped destinations).
list pserver
List the current general print server settings (e.g., print server name and
Novell mode).
list prn
List the current parallel port setting (e.g., mode).
list rprinter
List any current RPRINTER definitions.
list snmp
List Trap Table containing SNMP Managers.
list sysinfo
List the current NIC system information (e.g., contact name and protocol
stacks enabled).
list tcpip
List all current TCP/IP network settings (e.g., IP address and subnet
mask).
Debug Commands
255
list test
List the status of output tests on the I/O ports.
list time
List the current time on the NIC.
list user
List the current user definitions (e.g., user names and types).
list var
List all pre-defined variables including any newly created ones. Any of
these defined variables can be referenced in a string by placing a $
before the variable name (e.g.,
set model m1 trailer $FF
).
Debug Commands
The debug set of commands help troubleshoot problems that may occur on
the NIC. Some of the output may be cryptic, but it helps when troubleshooting.
debug eeprom
List ROM contents.
debug io
List statistics from the I/O port module.
debug ip
List IP stack statistics.
debug lpd
List statistics from the lpd daemon.
debug lpq
List statistics from the queue module.
debug mem
List statistics from the NIC memory module.
debug nest fserver
View the Novell file server(s) the NIC has acknowledged and connected
to.
debug nest ipx
Determine whether a board has been bound to the NIC under Novell and
that the network number is correct for your network.
debug nest logs
View miscellaneous Novell log messages.
debug nest odi
Determine what frame type is bonded to which board number under
Novell.
debug nest pserver
View the Novell PSERVER log messages including queues attached to.
debug nest rprinter
View the Novell PSERVER and RPRINTER log messages and
destinations used on the NIC.
256
Chapter 13 Complete Command List
debug nest sap
Determine whether the NIC is seeing any Novell network activity.
debug netbios
List NetBIOS (i.e., Windows 95 and WfW) statistics.
debug nif
List network interface statistics.
debug novell
List file and print servers.
debug tcp
List TCP stack statistics.
Miscellaneous Commands
These commands do not fall under any specific section of the command shell,
but they are used quite frequently.
save [default]
Save the current settings to flash memory so they are available after
power cycles. Sysinfo, destination, model, logpath, variable, user, and I/O
port settings will be saved. If default is specified as well, factory
settings will be saved, overwriting any new settings you have configured.
reset
Perform a warm boot or hardware reset simulating a power-on reset.
Restores current settings to those stored in flash memory since the flash
memory settings will be read and loaded into memory upon bootup.
load [default]
Load the settings stored in flash memory and use them as the current or
working settings. If
default
is specified as well, factory settings will be
loaded.
lpstat [ioport] [jobID]
lpstat prn
Display active and queued jobs and I/O port status for a given
ioport
or
jobID
. Specifying one of these parameters will shorten the output
focusing on the particular I/O port or print job specified.
cancel jobID
cancel d1prn-10
Remove a job from an I/O port queue. Use lpstat to find a particular
job ID first.
Miscellaneous Commands
257
start fox|tts|loopb prn
start fox prn
Begin a debugging test on one of the I/O ports on the NIC. The tests
available are:
fox A continuous stream of text sent to the attached printer. This
is a good test for troubleshooting hardware as long as the
attached printer supports text output.
tts A continuous stream of Gandalf 400C TTS-compatible text
sent to the attached printer.
loopb Loopback test. Any input characters from the device attached
to the I/O port is echoed back.
stop prn
stop prn
Stop an output test on an I/O port.
disable ioport|destination
disable prn
Disable an
ioport
so that queued jobs are not printed, or disable a
destination
so jobs can not be queued to it.
enable ioport|destination
enable prn
Enable an
ioport
so that queued jobs are printed, or enable a
destination
so jobs can be queued to it.
close tcp TCPindexnumber
close tcp 3
Force a TCP/IP connection between a TCP/IP host and the NIC to close.
The
TCPindexnumber
can be retrieved from “debug tcp” output.
ping [-s] hostIPaddress [datasize [packetnumber]]
ping 192.75.11.30
ping another TCP/IP host specified by
hostIPaddress
on the NIC
network.
datasize
is the datagram packet size which defaults to 64
bytes if no size is included in the syntax, and
packetnumber
is the
number of requests to be sent.
telnet hostIPaddress [escapecharacter]
telnet 192.75.11.35
Start a Telnet session with another TCP/IP host specified by
hostIPaddress
on the NIC network. If
escapecharacter
is used, it
resets the key sequence used to exit the Telnet session. It will return you
to the telnet> prompt where you can execute quit. Use the keycode
command to find out exact escape characters if needed. The default
character is CTRL-].
Note To use a host or IP name instead of the address, you must have set the
DNS server on the NIC. Use the command
set sysinfo dns...
to do
this.
258
Chapter 13 Complete Command List
chr string
Echo
string
or redirect
string
to an I/O port using chr string >
ioport.
keycode
Determine the hexadecimal value for a key to be used as the escape
character with the NIC built-in telnet command.
Note To use a host or IP name instead of the address, you must have set the
DNS server on the NIC. Use the command
set sysinfo dns...
to do
this.
259
14 Extra Features
NIC Security
There are TCP access lists available to restrict host connections with the
device.
Users And Passwords
By default, the NIC supports two logical user types:
root Access to everything within the print server including all
configurable settings.
guest Ability to list settings only.
Using set commands, other users can be created.
Passwords can be set for each user type. However, most often you would just
set a password for the root user to protect the NIC configuration. Guest users
cannot alter the print server configuration in any way.
You can configure a root password on your NIC using either Telnet or a Web
browser as follows:
Telnet
Using Telnet, set a root password by entering the following commands.
Syntax:
set user passwd username password
save
Example:
set user passwd root your_password_for_root
save
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the user ID
and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
260
Chapter 14 NIC Security
Web Browser
1. Using a Web browser, direct the browser to URL
http://P5000LJIPaddress/adminConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/adminConf.html)
2. At the “Administration Configuration” HTML form that displays, scroll
down to the “Passwords” section.
3. Click within the “Old” field beside the “Root Password” heading and enter
the existing root password. By default, there is no root password so you
can go to the next step without typing anything in this field.
4. Within the “Root Password” section, click within the “New” field and enter
the new root password.
5. Within the “Root Password” section, click within the “Confirm” field and
enter the new root password again. Remember this is case sensitive.
6. Click on the SUBMIT button when done and physically repower the print
server to make the new setting takes effect.
From this point on, anytime you log in to the NIC as root, you will need to
specify this password or your login attempt will fail.
To clear this password or change it, use the same “Administration
Configuration” HTML form. Just enter the appropriate “Old” password and put
in the new one (or nothing if you do not want a root password any longer). The
commands directly on the NIC are:
set user from default
save
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the user ID
and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
Note Remember your password. If you forget it, the only way to recover your
password is as follows:
1. set Dipswitch 1 on the adapter to the “on” position
2. power up
3. set Dipswitch 1 to the “off” position
4. power up a second time.
You will also have to restore all IP values.
TCP Access Lists
261
TCP Access Lists
Within TCP/IP environments, the NIC can restrict host access to destinations/
queues and remote command (i.e., rsh, rcmd, remsh and telnet)
execution services. This is done using an access list similar in function to the
Unix .rhosts file.
To view the current access list on the print server, complete the steps below.
1. Start a Telnet session with the NIC.
Syntax:
telnet P5000LJIPaddress
2. Log in as root and press ENTER at the password prompt since there is
no password by default (or your password for your home set).
3. List the current access list.
Syntax:
List tcpip
If the TCP access table entry list is empty, all hosts have access to the
NIC services. If there are entries in the list, only those hosts specified
have access to printing and remote command execution.
To add and delete access list entries, the commands are:
Syntax:
store tcpip tcp access add|del hostIPaddress|
networkaddress
reset
where
hostIPaddress
is the IP address of a TCP/IP host on your
network and
networkaddress
is the address of a subnet on your
network.
Example:
store tcpip tcp access add 192.75.11.25
store tcpip tcp access add 192.75.12.0
store tcpip tcp access del 192.75.11.25
reset
Note Access list settings are not configurable through the HTML forms provided
with the NIC.
Note Although the maximum number of entries in the access list is 10, each
entry can refer to a network rather than a specific host. This allows all
hosts on that specified network plus any individual hosts specified in the
list to have access.
262
Chapter 14 Printer Monitoring And Logging
Printer Monitoring And Logging
One of the key aspects of maintaining a computing environment is monitoring
printer status and logging this information to useful places. The NIC allows
this through its built-in HTML forms, command set, SNMP traps, e-mail alerts,
and logpaths.
Printer And Print Job Monitoring
To view the current status of an I/O port on the NIC, you can use either Telnet
or a Web browser as follows:
Telnet
Using Telnet, enter the lpstat command directly on the print server (after
you have logged in as guest or root).
Web Browser
Using a Web browser, select the desired I/O port on the “Status” HTML form
that comes with theNIC:
http://P5000LJIPaddress/indexStatus.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/indexStatus.html).
Whether using Telnet or a Web browser, you are given a description of each
I/O port status and a list of queued jobs. Table 17 describes some of the
common terms you may encounter.
Table 17. Key Printer Logging Terms
Term Description
idle There is no job queued for the NIC I/O port.
blocked The printer is not allowing the NIC to send data to it. If this
condition persists, check that there is not a printer error and
that the printer is online and ready to go.
waiting The NIC knows about a print job but is waiting for the host to
send more data or to send an expected packet.
Printer Logging Through Logpaths
263
Printer Logging Through Logpaths
Destinations are logical queues with associated models and logpaths. Models
allow extra processing needed with the print jobs. Logpaths are used if
logging is desired for each job.
Each logpath on the NIC consists of two parts:
Type The type of log information to be captured. The choices are job
for job ID and username, user for user ID (and three messages
per job), pgcnt for total pages printed in a job, cksum for file
checksums, printer for special printer feedback, and ioport
for parallel printer status messages.
Port Where this log information will be sent to. The choices are a TCP
port number (e.g., 2000), an email address (including an alias),
or a central host running a SYSLOG daemon.
To view the current logpath settings on the print server, you can use either
Telnet or a Web browser as follows:
Telnet
Using Telnet, type the commands and your variable data as shown in the
example below:
Syntax:
list logpath
list logpath logpath
set logpath logpath port ioport
set logpath logpath type user job
save
Example:
10.221.1.25:root> list logpath
NAME LOG PORT LOG FLAGS
l1 - -
l2 - -
l3 - -
l4 - -
10.221.1.25:root> list logpath l2
log port:
log flags:
10.221.1.25:root> set logpath l2 port 9999
ok
10.221.1.25:root> set logpath l2 type user job
ok: user
ok: job
save
264
Chapter 14 NIC Naming Schemes
Web Browser
1. Using a Web browser, direct the browser to URL
http://P5000LJIPaddress/destConf.html
(e.g., http://192.75.11.9/destConf.html)
2. At the “Print Path Configuration” HTML form that displays, select a
destination link (e.g., d1prn) from the top of the page to bring up the
appropriate destination form.
3. Once the desired destination HTML form displays, scroll down to the
“Logpath Type” and “Logpath Port” sections to view the current logpath
settings for this particular destination.
Whether using Telnet or a Web browser, you can alter any of these settings at
this point and then click on the SUBMIT button to store them into the NIC.
Remember to repower the NIC to make the settings take effect.
NIC Naming Schemes
A single I/O Port destination can be configured with a variety of model and
logpath combinations. For instance, once you set the parameters for m1 and
l1, you can assign the model and logpath to more than one I/O port
destination such as d1prn, d2prn, and d8prn. You may now use the same set
of model and logpath parameters more than once without having to redefine
those parameters each time for another I/O Port destination.
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
Note If prompted for a User ID and password first, type in root for the ID and
press ENTER at the password prompt since there is no password by
default.
265
15 Interfaces
Overview
The printer interface is the point where the data line from the host computer
plugs into the printer. The interface processes all communications signals and
data to and from the host computer. It consists of a printed circuit board
assembly (PCBA) and a connector for the data cable from the host computer.
Communication signals and data may be sent over Ethernet, parallel, or serial
lines.
When data is sent through multiple interfaces, the Autoport Switching feature
forces the printer to automatically switch between the serial and parallel port
and between the Ethernet adapter and the serial port when NIC is installed.
This chapter describes the following interfaces:
•Centronics
•Bi-Tronics
•RS-232 serial
•RS-422 serial
Note To determine which interface is installed on your printer, refer to Table 1 on
page 19. If you require a parallel interface and it is not installed, contact
your authorized Printronix representative.
266
Chapter 15 Centronics Parallel Interface
Centronics Parallel Interface
The Centronics interface enables the printer to operate with controllers
designed for buffered Centronics printers. The length of the data cable from
the host computer to the printer must not exceed 15 feet (5 meters).
Table 18. Centronics Interface Connector Pin Assignments
Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous
Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin
DATA LINE 1
Return 2
20 ACKNOWLEDGE
Return 10
28 CHASSIS GROUND 17
DATA LINE 2
Return 3
21 ONLINE
Return 13
28 GROUND 30
DATA LINE 3
Return 4
22 FAULT
Return 32
29 Spares 14
DATA LINE 4
Return 5
23 PAPER EMPTY
Return 12
28 No Connection 34, 35,
36
DATA LINE 5
Return 6
24 BUSY
Return 11
29 +5 Volts 18
DATA LINE 6
Return 7
25
DATA LINE 7
Return 8
26
DATA LINE 8
Return 9
27
DATA STROBE
Return 1
19
PAPER INSTRUCTION
Return 15
29
PRIME
Return 31
30
Centronics Interface Signals
267
Centronics Interface Signals
The Centronics interface signals between the host computer and the printer
are defined as follows:
Data Lines 1 through 8. Provide eight standard or inverted levels from the
host that specify a character or function code. Data Line 8 allows access to
the extended ASCII character set. You may enable or disable this line via the
Data Bit 8 parameter on the Centronics submenu.
Data Strobe. Carries a low true, 100 ns min. pulse from the host that clocks
data into the printer.
Paper Instruction (PI). Carries a VFU control signal from the host with the
same timing as the data lines.
Acknowledge. A low true pulse from the printer indicating the character or
function code has been received and the printer is ready for the next data
transfer.
Online. A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer is ready for
data transfer and the ON LINE key on the operator panel has been activated.
When the printer is in online mode, it may accept data from the host.
Paper Empty (PE). A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer is
in a fault condition.
Busy. A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer cannot receive
data.
Centronics Parallel Interface Configuration
Your printer is configured at the factory to match the interface you specified.
By using the operator panel, you may verify and change several interface
parameters in order to meet specific application requirements.
Refer to “Centronics (Parallel) Submenu” on page 117 for Centronics
parameter descriptions and information on selecting values for the following
parameters:
•Data Bit 8 (enable or disable)
•Data Polarity (standard or inverted)
•Strobe Polarity (standard or inverted)
•Response Polarity (standard or inverted)
•Busy on Strobe (enable or disable)
•Latch Data On Leading or Trailing Edge of Strobe
•Prime Signal (enable or disable)
•TOF Action at Prime Signal (do nothing or form feed)
•I/O Buffer Size (1-6)
Some application programs require a unique configuration. If the printer is not
working properly in the configuration you have selected, contact an
authorized Printronix representative.
268
Chapter 15 Bi-Tronics Parallel Interface
Bi-Tronics Parallel Interface
Bi-Tronics is a parallel interface with bidirectional capabilities. Features
include the following:
•Timing of the signals has been reduced, thereby speeding data
transmission.
•Bidirectional communication. Both the host and the printer can send data.
•Versatility. If a device cannot send data along particular lines, the Bi-
Tronics interface can send data via other operating modes, such as
Nibble Mode which is discussed later.
•Less user interaction. The host can ask the printer about printing status
and supported features, such as fonts and internal errors. For example,
instead of having to physically check if the printer has run out of paper,
you can create a program to query this from the host. The printer will
respond and a message will display on the host.
Operating Modes
The Bi-Tronics interface supports three operating modes, which are
determined by negotiation between the printer and the host.
Compatibility Mode
This mode provides compatibility with Centronics-like host I/O. Data is
transferred from the host to the printer in 8-bit bytes over the data lines.
Compatibility mode can be combined with nibble and byte modes to provide
bidirectional communication.
Nibble Mode
Eight bits equals one byte. When a byte of data is sent to the printer, the eight
bits are sent over eight data lines.
Some devices cannot send data over their eight data lines. To bypass this,
the Bi-Tronics interface permits data to be sent as half a byte over four status
lines. (Half a byte equals one nibble.) Two sequential four-bit nibbles are sent
over the lines.
Data is transferred from printer to host in four-bit nibbles over the status lines,
and the host controls the transmission.
Byte Mode
The printer and host send data to each other along eight data lines (one bit
per line).
If bidirectional communication is supported by the printer and the host, the
host will take control of the data transfer.
The Negotiation Phase
269
The Negotiation Phase
The negotiation phase determines which operating mode will be used. At this
time, the host and the printer will sense what devices are attached, the
supported signals available, and which mode to use. The selected mode, in
turn, defines the pins on the Bi-Tronics interface connector.
There are 36 pins on the parallel interface. Each one sends a different signal.
Pin 1, for example, can send a Strobe signal or a HostClk signal, depending
on the mode selected. Table 19 shows the different definitions.
Signals
Bi-Tronics interface signals between the host and the printer are defined
below.
Host Clock / nWrite. Driven by the host. Data is transferred from host to
printer. When the printer sends data, two types are available. In Nibble mode,
the signal is set high. In Byte mode, the signal is set low.
Data 1 through Data 8. These pins are host-driven in Compatibility mode and
bidirectional in Byte mode. They are not used in Nibble mode. Data 1 is the
least significant bit; Data 8 is the most significant bit.
Printer Clock / Peripheral Clock / Interrupt. Driven by the printer. A signal
from the printer indicating the character or function code has been received
and the printer is ready for the next data transfer.
Printer Busy / Peripheral Acknowledge / nWait. Driven by the printer.
Indicates the printer cannot receive data. (Data bits 4 and 8 in Nibble Mode.)
Acknowledge Data Request / nAcknowledge Reverse. Driven by the
printer. Indicates the printer is in a fault condition. (Data bits 3 and 7 in Nibble
mode.)
Xflag. Driven by the printer. A high true level indicating the printer is ready for
data transfer and the printer is online. (Data bits 2 and 6 in Nibble mode.)
Host Busy / Host Acknowledge / NDStrobe. Driven by the host. Activates
auto-line feed mode.
Peripheral Logic High. Driven by the printer. When set high, the printer
indicates all of its signals are in a valid state. When set low, the printer
indicates its power is off or its signals are in an invalid state.
nReverse Request. Driven by the host. Resets the interface and forces a
return to Compatibility mode idle phase.
nData Available / nPeripheral Request. Driven by the printer. Indicates the
printer has encountered an error. (Data bits 1 and 5 in Nibble mode.)
1284 Active / nAStrobe. Driven by the host. A peripheral device is selected.
Host Logic High. Driven by the host. When set to high, the host indicates all
of its signals are in a valid state. When set to low, the host indicates its power
is off or its signals are in an invalid state.
nInit. Resets init interface from the host.
270
Chapter 15 Bi-Tronics Parallel Interface
Note The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer should
not exceed 10 meters (32 feet).
Table 19. Bi-Tronics Signals
Pin Source of Data Type of Mode
Compatible Nibble Byte
1 Host nStrobe HostClk Host/Clk
2 Host/Printer Data 1 (LSB)
3 Host/Printer Data 2
4 Host/Printer Data 3
5 Host/Printer Data 4
6 Host/Printer Data 5
7 Host/Printer Data 6
8 Host/Printer Data 7
9 Host/Printer Data 8 (MSB)
10 Printer nAck PtrClk PtrClk
11 Printer Busy PtrBusy PtrBusy
12 Printer PError AckDataReq AckDataReq
13 Printer Select Xflag Xflag
14 Host nAutoFd Host Busy HostAck
15 Not Defined
16 Logic Grid
17 Chassis Grid
18 Printer Peripheral Logic High
19 Signal Ground (nStrobe)
20 Signal Ground (Data 1)
21 Signal Ground (Data 2)
22 Signal Ground (Data 3)
23 Signal Ground (Data 4)
Signals
271
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interfaces
The RS-232 and RS-422 serial interfaces enable the printer to operate with bit
serial devices that are compatible with an RS-232 controller. The input serial
data transfer rate (in baud) is selectable from the printer operator panel. Baud
rates of 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19,200, and 38,400 are available for
RS-232 and RS-422.
The input format consists of a single start bit, 7 or 8 data bits, and one or two
stop bits. The number of data bits is determined by printer configuration. The
data bits are interpreted with the least significant bit first. Parity checking is
determined by printer configuration options selected from the operator panel.
24 Signal Ground (Data 5)
25 Signal Ground (Data 6)
26 Signal Ground (Data 7)
27 Signal Ground (Data 8)
28 Signal Ground (PError, Select, nAck)
29 Signal Ground (Busy, nFault)
30 Signal Ground (nAutoFd, nSelectIn, nInit)
31 Host nInit
32 Printer NFault nDataAvail aDataAvail
33 Not Defined
34 Not Defined
35 Not Defined
36 Host nSelectIn 1284 Active 1284 Active
Table 19. Bi-Tronics Signals (continued)
Pin Source of Data Type of Mode
Compatible Nibble Byte
Note The RS-232 and RS-422 serial interface circuit characteristics are
compatible with the Electronic Industry Association Specifications
EIA®-232-E and EIA-422-B.
272
Chapter 15 RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interfaces
The printer interface uses a first-in/first-out buffer. The asynchronous
interface accepts data as it is provided by the host. The length of the data
cable from the host computer to the printer must not exceed 50 feet (15
meters) for RS-232 or 4000 feet (1220 meters) for RS-422. (A copper
conductor, twisted-pair telephone cable with a shunt capacitance of 16 pF/
foot [52.5 pF/meter] terminated in a 100 ohm resistive load must be used for
the RS-422.)
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interface Signals
The RS-232/RS-422 connector mounted on the printer is a 25-pin DB-25S
type. The mating connector is a DB-25P. RS-232 and RS-422 compatible
serial interface signals are defined as follows:
RS-232
Transmitted Data (TD). Serial data stream from the printer for transmitting
status and control information to the host. Subject to protocol selection.
Received Data (RD). Serial data stream to the printer.
Request To Send (RTS). Control signal from the printer. Subject to
configuration.
Clear To Send (CTS). Status signal to the printer indicating the host is ready
to receive data/status signals from the printer.
Data Set Ready (DSR). Status signal to the printer indicating the host is in a
ready condition.
Table 20. RS-232 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments
Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous
Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin
Receive Data (RD) 3 Transmit Data (TD) 2 Chassis Ground 1
Clear To Send (CTS) 5 Request To Send (RTS) 4 Signal Ground 7
Data Set Ready (DSR) 6 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) 20
Data Carrier Detect (DCD) 8
Table 21. RS-422 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments
Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous
Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin
- Receive Data (-RD) 15 - Transmit Data (-TD) 19 Chassis Ground 1
+ Receive Data (+RD) 17 + Transmit Data (+TD) 25 Signal Ground 7
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interface Protocol
273
Data Carrier Detect (DCD). Status signal to the printer. The ON condition is
required for the printer to receive data.
Data Terminal Ready (DTR). Control signal from the printer. Subject to
configuration.
RS-422
+RD, -RD. Serial data stream differentially received by printer.
+TD, -TD. Differentially driven serial data stream for transmitting status and
control information to the host. Subject to protocol selection.
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interface Protocol
X-ON/X-OFF. The printer transmits an X-ON character (hex 11) when
entering the Online mode or when the buffer is almost empty. The printer
transmits an X-OFF character (hex 13) when entering the Offline mode or
when the buffer is almost full.
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interface Error Handling
Parity Error Handling. Parity error checking is a configuration option
selected from the operator panel.
With odd or even parity checking selected, a character with a parity error is
replaced with a question mark (?) character.
When parity checking is not selected (“NONE” on the operator panel), parity
errors are ignored and the characters are printed as received.
Framing Error Handling. Framing error checking is always in effect for the
serial interface.
When a framing error occurs, an exclamation point (!) is printed. If 20
successive errors are received, a line feed is added to force printing to occur.
Overrun Error Handling. Overrun error checking is always in effect for the
serial interface.
When a data overrun error occurs, an asterisk (*) is printed. If 20 successive
errors are received, a line feed is added to force printing to occur.
Note ±RD and ±TD form signal and return paths of a differential line signal.
Note All serial errors are treated as faults that require operator intervention.
274
Chapter 15 RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interfaces
RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interface Configuration
By using the control panel, you can verify and change several interface
parameters in order to meet specific application requirements.
Refer to “Serial Submenu” on page 119 for RS-232 and RS-422 parameter
descriptions and information on selecting values for the following parameters:
RS-232 and RS-422
•Baud Rate (data rate selected from the operator panel)
•Data Bits (7 or 8 Bits)
•Stop Bits (1 or 2 Bits)
•Parity (None, Odd, Even, Mark or Sense)
RS-232 only
•Data Terminal Ready logic
•Request to Send logic
Some application programs require a unique configuration. If the printer is not
working properly with the configuration you selected, contact an authorized
Printronix representative.
275
16 Routine Service And
Diagnostics
Routine Service
Periodic cleaning ensures efficient operation and clear print quality, and it is
the only maintenance your printer requires. If the printer is located in a dusty
area or is used for heavy duty printing, clean it more often.
If print quality does not improve even after cleaning, contact your authorized
Printronix representative.
Exterior Cleaning
Clean with a soft, lint-free cloth and mild detergent soap. (Dishwashing liquid
works well.) Do not use abrasive powders or chemical solvents. Clean the
windows with plain water or mild window cleaner. Always apply the cleaning
solution to the cloth; never pour cleaning solution directly onto the printer.
Interior Cleaning
Over time, particles of paper and ink accumulate inside impact printers. This
is normal. Paper dust and ink build-up must be removed periodically to avoid
degraded print quality. Most paper dust accumulates around the ends of the
platen and ribbon path.
To clean the interior of the printer, perform the following steps and refer to
Figure 22 for cabinet models.
1. Power off the printer and unplug the printer power cord.
2. Open the printer cover. Fully raise the forms thickness lever. Unload
paper. Refer to the P5000LJ Series Printers Quick Reference Guide.
Warning Disconnect the power source before cleaning the printer.
Vor dem Säubern des Druckers ist die Netzverbindung zu
unterbrechen.
Débranchez l’alimentation avant de nettoyer l’imprimante.
Desconecte la fuente de energía antes de limpiar la impresora.
Staccare la fonte di energia prima della pulitura della stampante.
276
Chapter 16 Routine Service
3. Unlatch both ribbon spools and carefully lift them off the hubs. Raise the
ribbon out of the ribbon path.
4. Using a soft-bristled, non-metallic brush (such as a toothbrush), brush
paper dust and ribbon lint off the tractors, shuttle cover assembly, base
casting, and ribbon guides. Vacuum up the residue.
5. Wipe the splined shaft with a soft cloth.
6. Check the ribbon mask and hammer bank cover for bits of torn paper or
ribbon lint. Check the holes in the ribbon mask surrounding each hammer
tip. Gently remove paper or lint particles with a wooden stick or pair of
tweezers. (Do not pry or apply force to the hammer tips.)
7. Using a soft cloth lightly moistened with anhydrous alcohol (no water),
remove dust and ink from the platen. (The platen is the thick silver bar
behind the hammer bank cover that rotates when the forms thickness
lever is rotated.) Clean the ribbon guides.
8. Brush and vacuum up dust or residue that has accumulated inside the
lower cabinet.
9. For cabinet models:
Wipe the lower cabinet interior with a clean, lint-free cloth dampened (not
wet) with water and mild detergent, or spray the surfaces lightly with
window cleaning solution. Dry the lower cabinet interior by wiping it with a
clean, lint-free cloth.
10. For models with a power paper stacker:
Wipe all power stacker components using a soft cloth lightly moistened
with anhydrous alcohol (no water) to remove dust.
11. Reinstall the ribbon and load paper. Refer to the P5000LJ Series Printers
Quick Reference Guide.
Caution Vacuum carefully around the hammer bank and surrounding area to
avoid damage.
Caution When cleaning the platen, be very careful not to get any alcohol in the
hammer bank, because alcohol will cause severe damage to the
hammer bank. Only a trained service technician should clean the
shuttle assembly.
Interior Cleaning
277
Figure 22. Cleaning the Print Mechanism (Cabinet Models)
Ribbon Spool
Hub Latch
Tractor Lock
Splined Shaft
Paper Supports (4)
Tractors (2)
Vertical Position
Knob
Forms
Thickness
Lever
Ribbon Guide
278
Chapter 16 Diagnosing Problems
Diagnosing Problems
This section is designed to help you recover from any problems which may
arise with normal printer operation.
Printer Self-Tests
The printer self-tests are used to check the print quality and operation of your
printer. Your authorized Printronix representative will typically run these tests.
For a description of each test, see page 129.
To activate a test, select it and press the ENTER key. To stop the test, press
ENTER again.
An example procedure for running the self-test “All E’s,” which determines
whether print quality is acceptable, is described in Table 22.
Note Whenever you run a self-test, the top-of-form setting is lost. You must reset
the top-of-form. See your P5000LJ Series Printers Quick Reference Guide.
Table 22. Sample Print Test (All E’s)
Step Key Result Notes
1. Install the ribbon. Load full-width (136-column) computer paper. Set top-of-form.
See your Quick Reference Guide.
2. The printer must be offline for
testing.
3. Allows you to make configuration
changes.
4.
5.
6.
ON LINE OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
+ENTER SWITCH
UNLOCKED
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
UNTIL OFFLINE
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS
Printer Tests
UNTIL DIAGNOSTICS
Test Width
Printer Self-Tests
279
7.
8. Cycle through the choices.
X = Full Width or 80 columns.
9. The width you have chosen will be
used for the printer test.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14. Starts the test.
15. Stops the test.
16. Locks the ENTER key.
17.
18. Examine the print quality. The characters should be fully formed and of uniform
density. If the test does not run or characters appear malformed, contact your
authorized Printronix representative.
19. If the print quality is good, set the top-of-form.
Table 22. Sample Print Test (All E’s) (continued)
Step Key Result Notes
Test Width
Full Width*
OR Test Width
X
ENTER Test Width
X*
UNTIL DIAGNOSTICS
Test Width
UNTIL DIAGNOSTICS
Printer Tests
Printer Tests
Shift Recycle*
OR Printer Tests
All E’s
ENTER Printer Tests
All E’s*
ENTER Printer Tests
All E’s*
+ENTER SWITCH
LOCKED
ON LINE ONLINE
280
Chapter 16 Diagnosing Problems
Printing A Hex Dump
Figure 23. Hex Dump Sample
A hex code printout (or hex dump) is a translation of all host interface data to
its hexadecimal or symbolic equivalent. A hex dump lists all ASCII character
data received from the host computer with their corresponding two-digit
hexadecimal codes. Hex dumps are used to troubleshoot printer data
reception problems.
Printable characters print as the assigned symbol; nonprintable characters
are indicated by a period (.).
See Appendix C for hex-to-ASCII conversion. Table 23 shows the procedure
for printing a hex dump.
Printing A Hex Dump
281
Table 23. Printing a Hex Dump
Step Key Result Notes
1. Make sure the printer is on. Raise the printer cover.
2. The printer must be offline for
testing.
3. Allows you to make configuration
changes.
4.
5.
7.
8. Cycle through the choices.
9. An asterisk (*) indicates this
choice is active.
16. Locks the ENTER key.
17.
18. Go to the host computer and send a file. The printer outputs a hex dump. Refer to the
ASCII chart in Appendix C.
19. When the hex dump is complete, change the Hex Dump Mode back to Disable by
following the steps outlined above and selecting Disable.
ON LINE OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
+ENTER SWITCH
UNLOCKED
OFFLINE
CONFIG. CONTROL
UNTIL OFFLINE
MAINT / MISC
MAINT / MISC
Hex Dump Mode
Hex Dump Mode
Disable*
OR Hex Dump Mode
Enable
ENTER Hex Dump Mode
Enable*
+ENTER SWITCH
LOCKED
ON LINE ONLINE
282
Chapter 16 Diagnosing Problems
Fault Messages
If a fault condition occurs in the printer, the status indicator on the control
panel flashes on and off, and the message display indicates the specific fault.
Fault messages are summarized in Table 24.
Displayed faults fall into one of two categories:
•Operator correctable
•Field service required
For operator correctable faults, follow the suggested corrective action in the
fault message description. After correcting the displayed fault, press the
CLEAR key to clear the error message and status indicator, and resume
printing. If the fault message reappears, contact your authorized Printronix
representative.
Fault Messages Requiring Field Service Attention
For faults that require field service, do two things to try to clear the fault before
calling your authorized Printronix representative:
1. Set the printer power switch to O (off), wait 15 seconds, then turn the
printer on again. Run your print job again. If the message does not
appear, it was a false indication and no further attention is required.
2. If the message reappears, press the CLEAR key. If the message goes
away, it was a false indication and no further attention is required. If the
message reappears, call your authorized Printronix representative.
Table 24 explains the fault messages and offers solutions where possible.
Fault Messages
283
Table 24. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table
Displayed Message Explanation Action Required
8.5V PWR FAIL* Internal power failure. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
15V PWR FAIL* Controller voltage failure. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
23.5V PWR FAIL* Controller voltage failure. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
48V PWR FAIL* Internal power failure. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
A TO D OVERUN* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
ACCESS NULL PTR* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
BUFFER OVERRUN Host sends data after the printer
buffer is full. (Serial interface.) Check your serial host
interface parameter settings; if
necessary, adjust them so
they match the settings of the
attached host.
CLEAR PAPER JAM No paper motion. Clear jam and reload paper.
(See Quick Reference Guide.)
If this message recurs, contact
your authorized Printronix
representative.1
CLEARING PROGRAM
FROM FLASH The program successfully loaded
into printer RAM and the
checksum matched. The old
program is now being deleted
from flash memory.
None
CLOSE PLATEN The forms thickness lever is open. Close the forms thickness
lever.
COIL HOT* One or more hammer coils are
overheating. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
CTL VOLT FAIL* Controller voltage failure. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
DIAGNOSTIC
PASSED The printer passed its memory
and hardware initialization tests. None
DRVR CIR BAD* Hammer coil count test failed. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
284
Chapter 16 Diagnosing Problems
ERROR: DC
PROGRAM
NOT VALID
Printer cannot find the data
controller program or the
validation checksum is corrupt.
Download the program again.
If the message occurs again,
call your authorized Printronix
representative.1
ERROR: DRAM AT
ADDRESS XXXXXXXX The printer found a defective
memory location. Call your authorized Printronix
representative.1
ERROR: EC PROGRAM
NOT VALID Printer cannot find the engine
controller program or the
validation checksum is corrupt.
Download the program again.
If the message occurs again,
call your authorized Printronix
representative.1
ERROR: EC STOPPED
AT STATE XXXX Hardware fault in the engine
controller. Call your authorized Printronix
representative.1
ERROR: FLASH
DID NOT PROGRAM The printer encountered an error
trying to program flash memory. Download the program again.
If the message occurs again,
call your authorized Printronix
representative.1
ERROR: FLASH
NOT DETECTED The printer could not find any flash
memory. Call your authorized Printronix
representative.1
ERROR: NO DRAM
DETECTED The printer could not find any
DRAM. Call your authorized Printronix
representative.1
ERROR: NVRAM
FAILURE The security PAL is not present or
the non-volatile memory has
failed.
Call your authorized Printronix
representative.1
ERROR: PROGRAM
NEEDS MORE DRAM The printer requires more DRAM
memory in order to run the
downloaded program.
Add DRAM. Call your
authorized Printronix
representative.1
ERROR: PROGRAM
NEEDS MORE FLASH The printer requires more flash
memory in order to run the
downloaded program.
Add flash memory. Call your
authorized Printronix
representative.1
ERROR: PROGRAM
NOT COMPATIBLE The printer is not compatible with
the downloaded program. Use the correct emulation
software option(s) for this
model.
ERROR: PROGRAM
NOT VALID The printer does not see a
program in flash memory. There is no program in printer
memory. Download program
again.
ERROR: SECURITY
PAL NOT DETECTED The security PAL is not present or
has failed. Call your authorized Printronix
representative.1
ERROR: SHORT AT
ADDRESS XXXX Hardware failure in DRAM or CMX
controller circuitry. Call your authorized Printronix
representative.1
Table 24. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (continued)
Displayed Message Explanation Action Required
Fault Messages
285
ERROR: WRITING
TO FLASH Hardware or software fault in flash
memory. Download the program again.
If the message occurs again,
call your authorized Printronix
representative.1
ERROR: WRONG
CHECKSUM The printer received the complete
program but the checksum did not
match. The data was corrupted
during download.
Download the program again.
If the message occurs again,
call your authorized Printronix
representative.1
ETHERNET ADAPTER
BEING INITIALIZED NIC is processing the boot
procedure. None
ETHERNET
DETECTED NIC has established
communication. None
EXHAUST FAN FLT Sensors cannot detect current in
fan circuit. Power off the printer and
remove the paper path. Check
that the fan cable connector is
connected. Check for
obstruction of vents and fan
airway, and remove any
obstructions. Check for items
beneath the printer blocking
cabinet vents. Power back on
the printer. If this message
recurs, contact your
authorized Printronix
representative.1
FIRMWARE ERROR* Application software tried to
perform an illegal printer function
or damaged memory detected on
board.
Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
FRAMING ERROR Serial framing error. (Serial
interface.) Check your serial host
interface parameter settings; if
necessary, adjust them so that
they match the settings of the
attached host.
HAM. COIL OPEN* Electrical malfunction of one or
more hammer coils. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
HAMMER COIL BAD
X, X, X,... Coil # failed current test at power-
up. Record message, clear to
continue printing, and contact
your authorized Printronix
representative.
HB NOT INSTALLD* Self-test does not detect hammer
coils. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
Table 24. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (continued)
Displayed Message Explanation Action Required
286
Chapter 16 Diagnosing Problems
HMR BANK FAN FLT Sensors cannot detect current in
fan circuit. Power off printer and remove
paper path. Check that fan
cable is connected. Check for
obstruction of vents and fan
airway; remove any
obstructions. Check for items
beneath the printer blocking
cabinet vents. Power back on
the printer. If this message
recurs, contact your
authorized Printronix
representative.1
ILL EXT BUS ACC* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
ILL INST ACCSS* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
ILLGL OPR ACCSS* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
INTAKE FAN FAULT Sensors cannot detect current in
fan circuit. See description for
HMR BANK FAN FLT.
LO DRV. SHORT * Circuit(s) on the hammer bank or
in the hammer bank power cable
shorted to ground.
Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
LOAD PAPER Printer is out of paper. Load paper. (See Quick
Reference Guide.)
LOADING PROGRAM
FROM PORT XX% The new program is loading into
printer RAM. XX indicates how
much of the program has loaded.
None
LOADING PROGRAM
INTO FLASH The printer has deleted the
previous program from flash
memory and is loading the new
program into flash memory.
None
PAP BAD TABLE* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
PAP BSY TOO LNG* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
PAP FIFO OVERFL* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
PAP FIFO UNDRFL* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
Table 24. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (continued)
Displayed Message Explanation Action Required
Fault Messages
287
PAP ILLGL ST* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
PAP INCMPL ENER* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
PAP INVLD CMD* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
PAP INVLD PARM* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
PAP NOT SCHED* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
PAP NT AT SPEED* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
PAP UNEXP INT* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
PARITY ERROR Parity error
(serial interface) Check your serial host
interface parameter settings; if
necessary, adjust them so
they match the settings of the
attached host.
PLAT INV CMD* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
PLAT INV PARM* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
PLAT INV STATE* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
POWER SAVER MODE Status message: printer is in low-
energy idle state; all fans and
higher voltages are off; only
+5Vdc logic circuits are active.
None
POWER SUPPLY HOT* Circuits are overheating on the
power supply board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
PRINTER HOT* Controller board sensors report
high temperatures on the board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
PROTECTED INSTR* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
PWR SUPP VOLT * Power supply failed. Replace power supply board.
Table 24. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (continued)
Displayed Message Explanation Action Required
288
Chapter 16 Diagnosing Problems
RESETTING . . .
PLEASE WAIT The printer finished loading the
program into flash memory and is
automatically resetting itself.
None
RESTORING
BOOT CODE Normal download initialization
message. None
RIB INVLD CMD* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
RIB INVLD STATE* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
RIBBON DRIVE* CMX controller does not detect
ribbon drive motor. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
RIBBON INK OUT
CHANGE RIBBON RibbonMinder software has
determined that the ribbon is out
of ink.
Install a new ribbon and set
ribbon life to 100%.
SECURITY CODE
VIOLATION* Security code of PAL on controller
board does not match code of
firmware on the controller board.
Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
SECURITY PAL NOT
DETECTED The security PAL is missing or has
failed. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
SENDING PROGRAM
TO EC PROCESSOR The printer is loading the engine
controller program into the engine
controller.
None
SHUTL INV CMD* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
SHUTL INV PARM* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
SHUTTLE JAM No shuttle movement or shuttle is
moving at the wrong speed. Check for obstruction to
shuttle, a twisted ribbon, or
forms thickness lever closed
too tightly. If fault source is not
apparent, contact your
authorized Printronix
representative.
SOFTWARE ERROR *
Cycle power Application software tried to
perform illegal printer function, or
damaged logic circuits were found
on controller board.
Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
STACK OVERFLOW* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
Table 24. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (continued)
Displayed Message Explanation Action Required
Fault Messages
289
STACK UNDERFLOW* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
STACKER FAULT Failed motor circuit. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
STACKER FULL Reached full capacity. Remove paper stack.
STACKER JAM Jammed paper, or foreign object,
in unit's travel path. Remove paper or foreign
object.
TABLE MISMATCH
DOWNLOAD AGAIN EC software update in progress. Download the program again.
TCB CORRUPTED* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
UNDEF INTERRUPT* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
UNDFNED OPCODE* Fatal firmware error on controller
board. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
UP DRV. SHORT * Hammer driver circuits on the
boards shorted to ground. Contact your authorized
Printronix representative.1
WAITING FOR
ETHERNET ADAPTER This status message appears
when the printer is first powered
on if the optional NIC is installed.
None
1 Before contacting an authorized Printronix representative, power off the printer, wait 15
seconds, then power it back on and rerun your print job. If the message reappears, press
CLEAR. If the fault message still displays, then contact your authorized Printronix
representative.
Table 24. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table (continued)
Displayed Message Explanation Action Required
290
Chapter 16 Diagnosing Problems
291
APrinter Specifications And
Regulatory Information
Ribbon Specifications
Use only these Hewlett-Packard ribbons in LP Series and LineJet printers:
Printronix
Part Number
HP
Product
Reference Quanity Ribbon Type Yield Compatibility
High Yield Gold Series Ribbons for Increased Productivity
172293-001 N/A 6 pack Text/Barcode/OCR 30 Million Characters
3400 Shipping Labels All Printronix line
matrix printers
All HP LineJet and
LP Series printers
175006-001 N/A 6 pack Text/Barcode/OCR 50 million characters
4800 shipping labels All Printronix line
matrix printers
All HP LineJet and
LP Series printers
179006-001 N/A 6 pack Text/Barcode/OCR 90 million characters
7400 shipping labels All Printronix cabinet
model line matrix
printers
HP LineJet 500Q,
1000Q, 1500LQ
HP LPQ500k,
LPQ1000, LPQ1500,
LPQ475
292
Appendix A Ribbon Specifications
Standard Ribbons
107675-001 C3207A 6 pack Text 30 million characters All Printronix line
matrix printers
All HP LineJet and
LP Series printers
107675-007 C3208A 6 pack Text 50 million characters All Printronix cabinet
model line matrix
printers
HP LineJet 500Q,
1000Q, 1500Q
HP LPQ500,
LPQ1000, LPQ1500,
LPQ475, LPQ800,
LPQ1200, LPQ1400
107675-005 C3209A 6 pack Barcode/OCR 27 million characters
2800 shipping labels All Printronix line
matrix printers
All HP LineJet and
LP Series printers
107675-008 C3210A 6 pack Barcode/OCR 45 million characters
4667 shipping labels All Printronix cabinet
model line matrix
printers
HP LineJet 500Q,
1000Q, 1500Q
HP LPQ500,
LPQ1000, LPQ1500,
LPQ475, LPQ800,
LPQ1200, LPQ1400
140768-001 C3212A 6 pack Non-inked, security 30 million characters All Printronix line
matrix printers
All HP LineJet and
LP Series printers
Printronix
Part Number
HP
Product
Reference Quanity Ribbon Type Yield Compatibility
Note Genuine Printronix ribbons can be used in all HP LineJt and LP-Series
printers.
293
Genuine Printronix P5000LJ Supplies
For additional information or to locate the Genuine PRINTRONIX Supplies
distributor in your area, e-mail p5000lj@printronix.com or contact:
United States
Phone: 800.733.1900
Fax: 714.368.2600
Europe, the Middle East, and Africa
Phone: 33.1.46.25.1900
Fax: 33.1.46.25.1919
Asia Pacific
Phone: 65.6548.4116
Fax: 65.6546.1588
294
Appendix A Printer Dimensions
Printer Dimensions
Environmental Characteristics
Temperature
Operating:
41° to 104° F (5° to 40° C) up to 5000 feet (1524 meters)
41° to 90° F (5° to 32° C) up to 8000 feet (2438 meters)
Storage:
- 40° to 158° F (- 40° to 70° C)
Relative Humidity
Operating: 15% to 80% (non-condensing)
Storage: 10% to 90% (non-condensing)
Cabinet Model:
Height: 42.5 inches (108 cm)
Width: 27 inches (68.6 cm)
Depth: 29 inches (73.7 cm)
Weight: 225 lbs. (102.1 kg) unpackaged
285 lbs. (129.3 kg) packaged
Cabinet Model with Power Stacker Option
Height: 42.5 inches (108 cm)
Width 27 inches (68.6 cm)
Depth: 32.5 inches (82.5 cm)
Weight: 246 lbs. (112 kg) unpackaged
306 lbs. (139 kg) packaged
Pedestal Model:
Height: 35 inches (88.9 cm)
Width: 24.6 inches (62.5 cm)
Depth: 20.7 inches (52.6 cm)
Weight: 105 lbs. (47.6 kg) unpackaged
115 lbs. (52.2 kg) packaged
295
E
NERGY
S
TAR®
P5000LJ printers comply with the requirements of the ENERGY STAR®
Office Equipment Program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
When in the reduced power state, the printer displays “Power Saver Mode,”
and is activated at the control panel.
Electrical Characteristics
1 Printing, Typical = 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Shift Recycle (ASCII Swirl), High
Speed Mode
2 Printing, Maximum = 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, All Black, High Speed Mode
3 Non-Printing = 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Standby Mode
Current
LJ500P LJ500Q LJ1000Q LJ1500Q
LJ1500QS LJ1500P
Printing, Typical12.15A 2.43A 3.28A 4.37A 3.72A
Printing, Maximum23.60A 3.05A 4.39A 6.06A 5.19A
Non-Printing30.90A 1.17A 1.19A 1.16A 1.10A
Power
Printing, Typical1190W 191W 271W 364W 310W
Printing, Maximum2320W 244W 380W 514W 440W
Non-Printing390W 84W 86W 84W 80W
Heat
Printing, Typical1648 BTU/hr 652 BTU/hr 925 BTU/hr 1342 BTU/hr 1058BTU/hr
Printing, Maximum21092 BTU/hr 833 BTU/hr 1297 BTU/hr 1754 BTU/hr 1502BTU/hr
Non-Printing3307 BTU/hr 287 BTU/hr 294 BTU/hr 287 BTU/hr 273BTU/hr
296
Appendix A Material Safety Data Sheets
Material Safety Data Sheets
If the customer site needs a Material Safety Data Sheet, provide the following
information:
•Printronix P5000LJ Model
•Chemical substance description
•Customer name
•Customer address
•Customer telephone number
•Customer FAX number
297
Communication Notices
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement: This equipment
has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provided reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user
will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order
to meet FCC emission limits. Printronix is not responsible for any radio or
television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and
connectors or by any unauthorized changes or modifications to this
equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement: This
Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Avis de conformite aux normes du ministere des Communcations du
Canada: Cet appareil numerique de la classe A est conform á norme NMB-
003 du Canada.
European Community (EC) Conformity Statement:
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council
Directive 89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Printronix cannot accept
responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting
from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of
non-Printronix option cards.
German Conformity Statement:
Zulassungsbescheinigung Gesetz über die elektromagnetische
Verträglichkeit von Geraten (EMVG) vom 30. August 1995
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt in Übereinstimmung mit dem deutschen das EG-
Konformitätszelchen - CE - zu führen.
Der Außteller der Konformitätserklärung ist die Printronix......(1)
Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraph 3 Abs. (2) 2:
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 50082-1 und
EN 55022 Klasse A.
298
Appendix A Communication Notices
EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte bedürfen folgender Hinweise:
Nach dem EMVG: “Geräte dürfen an Orten, für die sie nicht asreichend
entstört sind, nur mit besonderer Genehmigung des Bundesminesters für
Post und Telekommunikation oder des Bundesamtes für Post und
Telekommunikation betrieben werden. Die Genehmigung wird erteilt, wenn
keine elektromagnetischen Störungen zu erwarten sind.” (Auszug aus dem
EMVG, Paragraph 3, Abs. 4) Dieses Genehmigungsverfahren ist nach
Paragraph 9 EMVG in Verbindung mit der entsprechenden Kostenverordnung
(Amtsblatt 14/93) kostenpflichtig.
Nach der EN 55022: “Dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese
Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich Funkstörungen verursachen; in diesem Fall
kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen
durchzuführen und dafür aufzkommen.”
Anmerkung: Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Geräte,
wie in den Handbüchern angegeben, zu installieren und zu betreiben.
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A
Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN
55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and
industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference
with licensed communication equipment.
This is a Class A product. In a domestic
environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be
required to take adequate measures.
Warning
299
300
Appendix A Communication Notices
301
BPaper Specifications And
Forms Design
Introduction
P5000LJ Series printers use dot matrix line printing technology, which permits
a high degree of printing flexibility. Dot matrix technology enables the user to
print graphic images, line drawn characters, special characters, and multiple
alphabets.
The first section of this appendix lists general specifications for continuous
form paper. (Specific brands or types of paper are not recommended.)
Adherence to these specifications will ensure the best print quality and
reliable operation.
The second section goes into more detail, providing definitions, guidelines,
and a checklist to use for designing forms that will run smoothly through the
print station of the P5000LJ Series printer.
General Paper Specifications
This section describes the minimum paper specifications that must be met to
ensure the best printer performance.
Always test paper and forms before buying large quantities. Make all
measurements at 20° to 26° Celsius (68° to 78° Fahrenheit) and 45% to 55%
relative humidity. P500LJ printers perform well with forms that meet the
specifications listed in Table 25 and Table 26 below.
Note Printronix conforms to ANSI® Standard X3.96-1983, “American National
Forms Information Systems for Continuous Business Forms,” and ISO
Recommendation No. 2784, which cover common form widths and depths,
standards for sprocket feed holes and margins, and other basic tolerances.
302
Appendix B General Paper Specifications
Test the paper first if you plan to use it in environments with humidity of less
than 20% or greater than 80%. Also test paper that you plan to use at high
humidity to ensure satisfactory feeding and handling, and test paper to be
used at low humidity to determine if static buildup must be eliminated for
proper paper stacking.
Table 25. Paper Sizes
Maximum form width 17.0 inches (43.18 cm) edge to edge
Minimum form width 3.0 inches (7.62 cm) edge to edge
Maximum Printing Width 13.6 inches (34.54 cm)
Maximum Right Margin 1 to 13.6 inches (2.54 to 34.54 cm)
Maximum Left Margin 0 to 13.5 inches (0 to 34.29 cm)
Maximum Form Length 16 inches (40.64 cm)
Minimum Form Length 2 inches (5.08 cm)
Table 26. Paper Weights
Single-Part Forms
Standard 15 to 100 pound (57 to 380 gm/meter2)
Best Print Quality 18 to 60 pound (68 to 227 gm/meter2)
Multipart Forms
Carbon Paper 12 pounds (46 gm/meter2) up to 6 total pages
Carbons 8 pounds (30 gm/meter2) up to 6 total pages
Pack Thickness Maximum 0.025 inch (0.635 mm) total
Carbonless Up to 4-part forms
Terms And Definitions
303
Paper Guidelines
The terms below describe continuous form paper.
Terms And Definitions
Chaff Residual bits of paper not completely removed after the
punch process that creates tractor pin holes, major and
minor perforations, etc.
Cut Point The area along a perforation where a cut has been made
that extends through the entire form.
Cut-to-Tie Ratio The ratio of cut points to tie points occurring along a
perforation.
Evenness The amount of variation between the thickest and thinnest
points measured across the print area (i.e., between the
side perforations).
Form Thickness Thickness measured at the thickest point of the entire form.
This includes glue lines, compressed staples, perforations,
etc., and is not limited to the printed region of the form.
Margin The region outside the print area of the form. The margin is
typically bounded by the outermost vertical perforations
(i.e., where the tractor holes are located) and the edge of
the form.
Print Area The region where printing occurs, and which is always
between the side perforations.
Print Station The area in the printer where the actual impacts of printing
occur.
Staple A punch-cut fastening stitch located along the vertical edge
and within the side perforation region of a multipart form.
(Note that this is not a metal staple.)
Tenting The measured thickness between the print area of the form
and the peak thickness of a major perforation. Tenting is
typically caused by overly stiff perforations or incorrect
registration of the inner parts of multipart forms.
Tie Point The area along a perforation between the cut points (see
above).
304
Appendix B Paper Guidelines
The figures below illustrate the terms used in this appendix.
Figure 24. Basic Forms Terminology
Figure 25. Inward and Outward Perforations
Figure 26. Cut Points and Tie Points
Side Perforation
Margin Area
Major Perforation
Form Span
Print Area
Tractor Pin Hole
Side View of Form
Printed Side of Form
Outward Perforation
Inward Perforation
Cut Point Tie Point
Perforation
Environmental Considerations
305
Environmental Considerations
Before they are used, forms should be stored for at least 24 hours—
preferably 48 hours—in the environment in which they will be used. This
stabilizes the moisture content of the paper, resulting in better feeding and
stacking. Forms should never be stored in environments that result in damage
such as delamination of glues, creasing, folding, etc.
Form Types
Three kinds of continuous form paper are specified for use with the printer:
•Edge-perforated, fanfolded, single-part forms
•2- to 6-part multipart carbon forms
•2- to 4-part multipart carbonless forms
For all forms, the width range is from 3 to 17 inches, and the length range is
from 2 to 12 inches.
Form Weight
Use 15 to 100 pound (6.80 to 45.36 kg) stock. Light weight and recycled
forms must be strong enough to assure that tractor holes and perforations do
not tear or detach during form feed, skipping, and ejecting operations.
Form Thickness
Forms must be no thicker than 0.025 inches (0.0635 cm). This figure is for the
thickest point of the form—including glue lines, staples, perforations, etc.—
and is not restricted to just the print area.
Form Evenness
The evenness of forms must not exceed 0.003 inches (0.00762 cm) across
the print area (between the side perforations).
Tenting caused by buildup of perforation thickness must be minimized. A
perforation thickness measured at the major perforation that exceeds 1.25
times the forms thickness measured in the print area will result in an
unpredictable and unreliable form. The perforation thickness must never
exceed the maximum forms thickness of 0.025 inches (0.0635 cm).
Tractor Pin Engagement
The printer uses tractors with 6-pin engagement. Detailed engagement
specifications are given in ISO-2784, but are summarized in the table below.
306
Appendix B Paper Guidelines
Methods Of Forms Attachment
Any method of attachment (staples, crimps, gluing, etc.) must be designed in
a way that does not permit air to be trapped between copies of a form. Hard or
wire brads and staples must not be used.
Any attachment must not coincide with the major perforation or any horizontal
perforation.
Gluing
Gluing must be controlled and uniform, since it is a major contributor to the
maximum form thickness. A form that meets the maximum forms thickness
requirement in the print area but which exceeds the maximum thickness at a
glue line is considered an unreliable and unpredictable form.
Staples
Staples must be used only in the margin area of the form and must not be in
line with the path of the tractor holes. Ideally, staples are placed in the
margins so that they coincide with areas of the form where printing does not
occur.
The figure below shows acceptable and unacceptable ways of fabricating
staples.
Specification Inches Millimeters
Hole centerline (CL) to edge of form 0.236 ± 0.028 6.0 ± 0.10
Hole Diameter (Serrations or any
occlusion due to incorrect registration
of multipart forms cannot exceed this
dimension.)
0.156 ± 0.004 4.0 ± 0.10
Distance between centers of two
consecutive holes 0.500 ± 0.002 12.7 ± 0.05
Maximum deviation of holes from their
centerline 0.004 0.10
Maximum deviation of lefthand hole to
adjacent righthand hole (CL to CL) 0.006 0.15
Maximum parallel deviation of lefthand
hole CL to righthand hole CL 0.006 0.15
Chaff Content
307
Cut-To-Tie Ratio
A common cut-to-tie ratio for bond forms is 4:1 (that is, 80% cut to 20% ties).
This value is dictated chiefly by the application program under which the form
runs. Lower cut-to-tie ratios will yield better form handling, but stacking may
suffer due to increased stiffness of the perforations. Some level of
experimentation is required to determine the best cut-to-tie ratio. But
remember that a cut-to-tie ratio that causes a thickness buildup of greater
than 0.025 inch (0.635 mm) or that creates an evenness variation of greater
than 0.003 inch (0.0762 mm) will result in an unreliable and unpredictable
form.
Perforation Intersections
Whenever a horizontal perforation intersects with a vertical perforation, the
point of intersection must be a tie point. Cut points at such intersections make
the form unacceptable.
Chaff Content
Tractors holes should be clear of chaff. As much as possible, there should not
be loose chaff in the box in which the paper is packed.
Preferred Unacceptable
Cut Point
Tie Point
Cut Point
Tie Point
Direction of
Forms
Movement
308
Appendix B Form Design Checklist
Form Design Checklist
Use this checklist to help you remember key areas of consideration when
designing and ordering forms and paper stocks.
Environment
________ Before they are used, forms are given at least 24 hours of
condensing time in the environment in which they will be used.
________ Forms are not stored in environments that result in damage such
as delamination of glue lines, creasing, folding, etc.
Type Of Form
Recycled Paper? Yes _______ No _______ If yes, assure adequate form
strength to prevent tractor holes and perforations from tearing or detaching
during form feeds and page ejects.
Security Form? Yes _______ No _______ If yes, the last page of the form
should have a minimum 50% reflectance, and, if possible, the stippled page
faces inward to the form.
Form Weight
Form weight = ________
(Minimum = 15 lb. / 6.8 kg ; Maximum = 100 lb / 45.36 kg)
Form Thickness
Form thickness = ________
(0.025 inches / 0.0635 cm maximum measured at the thickest point of the
form, which includes perforations, compressed staples, glue lines, etc.)
Form Type (Check One)
1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 Part 5 Part 6 Part
<--------- Carbonless Range --------->
<---------------------------- Carbon Range ------------------------------>
Chaff Content
309
Form Evenness
The evenness of the form = ________
(Not to exceed 0.003 in. / 0.00762 cm)
Tenting due to buildup of perforation thickness must be minimized. A
perforation thickness measured at the major perforation that exceeds 1.25
times the forms thickness measured in the print area will result in an
unreliable and unpredictable form. Perforation thickness must not exceed the
maximum form thickness of 0.025 in. / 0.0635 cm.
Tractor Pin Holes
The holes which engage the tractor pins must conform to the following
specifications:
Methods Of Forms Attachment
________ Must not allow air entrapment between copies of the form
________ Must not use hard brads or staples
________ Must not coincide with major perforation or any horizontal
perforation
________ Gluing lines must not result in a form that exceeds 0.025 in. /
0.0635 cm thickness
________ Staples must be used only in margin area of form
________ Staple cuts must not be in the direction of form movement
through the tractors
________ Staples must not occur in-line with the path of the tractor holes
________ Staples should be placed in the margins so that they coincide
with areas of the form where printing will not occur
Specification Inches Millimeters
Hole centerline (CL) to edge of form 0.236 ± 0.028 6.0 ± 0.1
Hole Diameter (Serrations or any
occlusion due to incorrect registration
of multipart forms cannot exceed this
dimension.)
0.156 ± 0.004 4.0 ± 0.1
Distance between centers of two
consecutive holes 0.500 ± 0.002 12.7 ± 0.05
Maximum deviation of holes from their
centerline 0.004 0.1
Maximum deviation of lefthand hole to
adjacent righthand hole (CL to CL) 0.006 0.15
Maximum parallel deviation of lefthand
hole CL to righthand hole CL 0.006 0.15
310
Appendix B Summary
Cut-To-Tie Ratio
____:____ (Typical ratio is 4:1, or 80% cut to 20% tie)
Thickness Buildup = ________ in. / cm
Perforation Intersections
________ Horizontal-vertical perforations are tie points. Cut points at such
intersections are unacceptable.
Chaff Content
________ Tractor holes are clear of chaff.
________ There is no loose chaff in the box the paper is packed in.
Summary
Because it is impossible to test all possible forms available for use in the
printer, Printronix recommends that paper conform to the specifications
outlined in this appendix for the best printer performance.
But the guidelines in this appendix are not a substitute for actual testing.
Always test forms—including special single-part paper, multipart forms, forms
with glue strips, carbonless forms, card stock, and labels—for satisfactory
feeding, registration, and print quality prior to purchase. For best results in
selecting standard or specialty forms, consult a forms vendor who can ensure
conformance to the guidelines in this appendix and who can recommend cost-
effective purchases.
Storage And Handling
The performance of the printer depends to a large degree on the condition of
the paper used; therefore, the following principles for packaging, handling,
and storage are recommended.
Packaging
To avoid damage during handling, use top and bottom fillers in continuous
form cartons to hold the paper stack firmly in place. Proper packaging
ensures that the paper remains flat and is not damaged along the edges.
Note A cut-to-tie ratio that causes a thickness buildup greater than
0.025 in. / 0.0635 cm, or that creates an evenness variation greater than
0.003 in. / 0.00762 cm, will result in an unreliable and unpredictable form.
Storage And Handling
311
Storage
Do not store cartons directly on the floor, and do not stack them more than six
high. Set each carton upright and squarely on the one underneath. Do not
place anything else on the stack of paper, because this can damage the
paper.
Preconditioning Forms
Protect paper from temperature and humidity extremes. Store paper in the
same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before using the paper.
This allows the moisture content of the paper to stabilize.
LP Series and LineJet printers are used at temperatures from 5° to 40° C
(41° to 104° F) up to 1524 meters (5000 feet), from 5° to 32° C (41° to 90° F)
up to 2438 meters (8000 feet), with a non-condensing relative humidity of
10% to 90%. For best results, however, store the printer paper at 18° to 24° C
(65° to 75° F), with a relative humidity of 40% to 50%.
If the printer is in an environment subject to extremes of temperature or
humidity, store the printer paper in a better environment and move it to the
printer as needed.
312
Appendix B Summary
313
CStandard ASCII Character
Set
KEY
ASCII CHARACTER
ESC 33
27
1B
OCTAL
DECIMAL
HEX
B7 00 0011 1 1
B6 0
B5 0 01101100011011
COLUMN
01234567
BITS
ROW
B4 B2B3 B1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0000
00 10
00 1 0
00 1 1
01 0 0
01 0 1
01 1 0
01 1 1
1000
10 0 1
10 1 0
10 1 1
11 0 0
11 0 1
11 1 0
11 1 1
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
0
0
0
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
10
8
8
11
9
9
12
10
A
13
11
B
14
12
C
15
13
D
16
14
E
17
15
F
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
(XON)
(XOFF)
20
16
10
21
17
11
22
18
12
23
19
13
24
20
14
25
21
15
26
22
16
27
23
17
30
18
24
31
25
19
32
26
1A
33
27
1B
34
28
1C
35
29
1D
36
30
1E
37
31
1F
SP
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
(
)
+
,
-
.
/
40
32
20
41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29
52
42
2A
53
43
2B
54
44
2C
55
45
2D
56
46
2E
57
47
2F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71
57
39
72
58
3A
73
59
3B
74
60
3C
75
61
3D
76
62
3E
77
63
3F
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47
110
72
48
111
73
49
112
74
4A
113
75
4B
114
76
4C
115
77
4D
116
78
4E
117
79
4F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
_
120
80
50
121
81
51
122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
89
59
132
90
5A
133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
95
5F
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
69
152
106
6A
153
107
6B
154
108
6C
155
109
6D
156
110
6E
157
111
6F
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
DEL
160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B
174
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F
10 1 1
B4 B2B3 B1
B7 B6 B5
001
BITS
0
0
0
0
0
0
^
*
314
Appendix C
315
DMonitoring Printers
Implementing Remote Management Software (RMS)
Remote printer management includes the following tasks:
•Monitoring the status of network printers
•Responding to alarms
•Gathering statistics on printer operations
The three elements of network printer monitoring and management are:
•Agent/manager model
•MIB, the management information database
•SNMP, the protocol used to get management information
Agent/Manager Model
The elements of a monitoring system, MIB and SNMP, are implemented in an
agent/manager model:
•The manager is a console, workstation, or server on working hubs or
routers which has a global knowledge of NIC and printers. OpenView is a
management console.
•Agents are utilities that reside on devices, such as a NIC, that respond
through SNMP to management requests for information. The information
is stored in a MIB (Management Information Base).
MIB
A MIB is a Management Information Base that contains information a device
makes available to SNMP. The MIB describes information about actual
objects to be managed, controlled, and viewed. There are many different
MIBs defined.
Standards of Network Printer MIBs
The Printer MIB contained in the NIC is based on the following standards:
•System and Interfaces Group MIB (RFC 1213 of March 1991)
•Host Resource MIB (RFC 1514 of September 1993)
•Printer MIB (RFC 1759 of March 1995)
316
Appendix D Implementing Remote Management Software (RMS)
Components of the Printer MIB
The printer MIB gives the network manager access to most of the information
that is normally accessible through the NIC command set for configuring the
server with SNMP. Some objects identified by this MIB are not applicable to
the NIC.
The complete definition of the Printer MIB is provided in the Printer MIBs in
DOS Format and Printer MIBs in TAR Format, which are shipped with the
NIC. The MIB is provided in a subset of the ASN.1 syntax. The Printer MIB is
composed of the following sections:
•General
•Cover
•Localization
•Input
•Output
•Marker
•Media Path
•Channel
•Interpreter
•Console
•Alert
Information Provided by the MIB
The Printer MIB contains the following types of information about network
printers:
Descriptions. Printer configuration, location, and contact.
Status. Current operating status of printers.
Alerts. Reportable events from printers.
SNMP
SNMP is the network protocol used to communicate between manager and
agent. Managers request information, usually through automated polling at
specified intervals, and agents respond. Though used primarily on TCP/IP
networks, SNMP can be implemented on other protocols, for example, IPX.
SNMP is a standard by which a network manager can get statistics and
configuration information from the NICs and other devices on the network.
This is done through a Network Management Station (NMS), such as
OpenView and NetView .
Monitoring With AIX NetView/6000
317
Monitoring Tools
Many tools can be used to monitor printers with SNMP agents. One of these
tools is NetView. There are also other MIB browsers, which are not described
here.
Monitoring With AIX NetView/6000
The AIX NetView/6000 program can manage any IP-addressable device with
an SNMP agent.
NetView/6000 can be used to set a network topology, monitor a network,
diagnose problems, and measure network performance.
Through its MIB Browser, information about the resources affecting an event
(such as an alarm) can be obtained.
Monitoring With Web JetAdmin
Web JetAdmin (version 6.x) can monitor IP addressable devices containing
the printer MIB.
OS/2 TCP/IP
To get SNMP.EXE to work correctly to browse MIB items, you may need to
delete the following file:
d:\mptn\etc\mib2.tbl
Setting The SNMP Community Name
The default SNMP read-only community name is “public” and cannot be
changed.
Change the SNMP R/W community name with the command:
set user passwd snmp com_name
save
where
com_name
is the new SNMP R/W community name.
The default is no R/W community name.
Note Changing SNMP community names or access rights may hinder or disable
applications that are monitoring your printers.
318
Appendix D Monitoring Tools
Reference
For further information on SNMP and MIB, refer to the following:
•RFC 1155 — Structure and Identification of Management Information for
TCP/IP-based Internets (SMI)
•RFC 1156 — Management Information Base for Management of TCP/IP
Internets (MIB)
•RFC 1157 — A Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
•The Simple Book: An Introduction to Management of TCP/IP-based
Internets
Getting the Latest MIB Information
To obtain the latest copy of these and other RFCs, FTP the files from one of
the following two sources:
Internet:
ftp.isi.edu
World Wide Web:
http://www.ietf.org/rfc.html
319
Index
Symbols
? Command, 243
Numerics
10/100Base-T
Novell Host configuration, 229
Troubleshooting, 236
15V PWR FAIL * message, 283
20 CPI Condensed, 94, 96
23.5V PWR FAIL * message, 283
48V PWR FAIL * message, 283
8.5V PWR FAIL * message, 283
A
A TO D OVERUN * message, 283
Absorb After ^PN, 111
Absorb after ^PY, 110
Access Lists, TCP, 261
Access Methods, Command Shell, 243
ACCESS NULL PTR * message, 283
Acknowledge signal, 267
Active Emulation Menu, 79
Administration, configuration, 154
AIX NetView/6000, 317
Alert groups, 151
Aliases, 158
All Black, 130
All E’s, 130
All H’s, 130
All Underlines, 130
Alt. Set 80-9F, 92
Alternate Character Set, 94
Alternate Set 80-9F, 97, 98
Append Rotated, 109
ASCII Character Set, 313
Auto LF, 91, 94, 96, 98, 100
Auto Switching, 123
Auto Switching Submenu, 123
Auto Switching, 123
Port Type, 123
Report Status, 124
Timeout, 124
Trickle Time, 124
Auto Uppercase, 104
Autoport Switching, 265
Autowrap, 103
B
Banner Page, 147
Banner Page, Print Path, 146
Barcode Errors, 112
Baud Rate, 120
Bindery PSERVER Setup (Netware 3.x, 4.x and
5.x), 231
Bi-Tronics interface, 268
Negotiation phase, 269
operating modes, 268
signals, 269
Bi-Tronics submenu, 116
Buffer Size in K, 117
Prime Signal, 116
TOF Action, 117
BSD Systems, LPR/LPD print setup, 200
BUFFER OVERRUN message, 283
Buffer Size in K, 117, 119, 121, 122
Burnin Test, 131
Busy on Strobe, 118
Busy signal, 267
Byte mode, 268
320
C
Cautions, 17
Centronics
configuration, 267
interface signals, 267
Parallel Interface, 266
Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 117
Buffer Size in K, 119
Busy on Strobe, 118
Data Bit 8, 118
Data Polarity, 118
Latch Data On, 118
PI Ignored, 118
Prime Signal, 118
Resp. Polarity, 118
TOF Action, 119
Chaff content, 307
Changing parameter settings, 49
Changing parameters, 54
Character Set, 92, 94, 96, 98
ASCII, 313
Cleaning
exterior, 275
interior, 275
Clear Error Log, 131
CLEAR PAPER JAM message, 283
Clear to send (CTS) signal
RS-232 serial interface, 272
CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH, 42, 44,
283, 286
CLOSE PLATEN message, 283
COIL HOT, 283
Command Help, 243
?, 243
Command Prefixes, 244
Command Shell
Access Methods, 243
Getting Command Help, 243
Main Command Shell Prefixes, 243
overview, 243
Command, complete list, 244
Commands
debug, 255
list, 254
miscellaneous, 256
set, 247
Store, 244
Communicating, Windows, 177
Compatibility mode, 268
Compress CPI, 105
Compressed Print, 101
Configuration
administration, 154
Centronics parallel interface, 267
deleting, 64
HP e3000/NIC, 165
I/O Port, 149
loading values, 60
Log Path, 148
NPDS, 234
power-up, 62
print, 58
Print Model, 147
protecting, 66
RS-232 serial interface, 274
RS-422 serial interface, 274
save, 56
SNMP, 150
System, 155
TCP/IP NIC, 157
Configuration Control Menu, 77
Delete Configuration, 78
Load Configuration, 77
Power-Up Configuration, 78
Print Configuration, 78
Protect Configuration, 78
Save Configuration, 78
Configuration Main Menu, 74
Configuration Menus, overview, 73
Configuration network, 143
Configuration Print Path, 145
Destination settings, 145
Configuration Printout, 84
Configuration setup, NIC, 67
321
Configurations, 48
Configuring printer, 45
Configuring the printer, 45
Connection to network, 67
Control Code 06, 91, 97, 100
Control Code 08, 91
Control panel, 45
Control panel configuration
gateway address, 68
IP Address, 68
subnet mask, 68
Convert to U/C, 111
CPI/LPI Select, 87
CR Edit, 103
CTL VOLT FAIL * message, 283
D
Data Bit 8, 112, 118
Data carrier detect (DCD) signal, RS-232 serial
interface, 273
Data lines 1 through 8 signal, 267
Data Polarity, 118
Data Protocol, 120
Data set ready (DSR) signal, RS-232 serial
interface, 272
Data strobe signal, 267
Data Term Ready, 121
Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal, RS-232 serial
interface, 273
Debug Commands, 255
Default configuration values, factory, 50
Define CR Code, 91, 93, 96, 97, 100, 103
Define LF Code, 91, 94, 96, 98, 101, 103
Definitions, 303
Delete Configuration, 78
Deleting configurations, 64
Destination names, changing, 178
Destination settings
Back Channel, 145
Name, 145
Services, 145
Diagnosing problems, 278
Diagnostic tools, 22
Diagnostic, tests, 278
Diagnostics Menu, 129
Paper Out Dots, 131
Print Statistics, 132
Printer Tests, 130
System Memory, 131
Test Width, 131
DIAGNOSTICS PASSED, 42, 283
Dimensions, printer, 294
Display Function, 83
Display Language, 114
Downloading
function code, 29
optional font files, 39
preparation, 30
to flash memory, 39
DRVR CIR BAD * message, 283
E
E’s + TOF, 130
Electrical characteristics, 295
Elong/Alt. Font, 101
E-mail alert posting, 150
Emulation Menu, 80
LP Plus Emulations, 80
Optional Emulations, 80
PCL -ll Emulation, 81
PCL-II Emulation, 80
Emulations, 23
downloading software through serial or parallel
port, 33
installing, 32
printer, 21
Energy Star, 295
E-Net Test Page, 131
ENTER key
locking, 48
unlocking, 48
Environment Description, Windows, 175
Environmental characteristics, 294
Energy Star, 295
relative humidity, 294
Environmental considerations, 305
322
Epson FX Emulation, 95
20 CPI Condensed, 96
Alternate Set 80-9F, 97
Auto LF, 96
Character Set, 96
Define CR Code, 96
Define LF Code, 96
Printer Select, 96
ERROR
DC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 42, 284
DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXX, 284
EC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 42, 284
EC STOPPED AT STATE XXXX, 42, 284
FLASH NOT DETECTED, 42, 284
NO DRAM DETECTED, 42
NVRAM FAILURE, 42, 284
PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM, 42
PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH, 43
PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE, 43
PROGRAM NOT VALID, 43
SECURITY PAL NOT DETECTED, 43
SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX, 43
WRITING TO FLASH, 42, 43
WRONG CHECKSUM, 43
Error handling, 111
RS-232 serial interface, 273
RS-422 serial interface, 273
Error Markers, 111
Error messages See Fault messages, 282
Error Msgs, 111
ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED, 284
ERROR OCCURRED / FLUSHING QUEUES*, 43
ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM, 284
ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH, 284
ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE, 284
ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID, 284
Error Report, 106
ERROR SECURITY PAL NOT DETECTED, 284
ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX, 284
ERROR WRITING TO FLASH, 284, 285
ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM, 285
ESC d Command, 98
ETHERNET ADAPTER BEING INITIALIZED
message, 285
ETHERNET DETECTED message, 285
ETHERNET PARAMETERS menu
Ethernet speed, 127
Gateway address, 126
IP address, 125
MAC address, 126
NetBIOS protocol, 126
Novell frame, 126
Novell protocol, 126
Subnet mask, 126
Ethernet Params Menu, 125
Ethernet speed, Ethernet Parameters menu, 127
Ethernet Submenu, 122
Buffer Size in K, 122
EVFU Select, 92, 101
EXHAUST FAN FLT message, 285
Exterior cleaning, 275
F
Face, CPI Delay, 83
Factory default configuration values, 50
Fault messages, 282
15V PWR FAIL *, 283
23.5V PWR FAIL *, 283
48V PWR FAIL *, 283
8.5V PWR FAIL *, 283
A TO D OVERUN *, 283
ACCESS NULL PTR *, 283
BUFFER OVERRUN, 283
CLEAR PAPER JAM, 283
CLOSE PLATEN, 283
COIL HOT, 283
CTL VOLT FAIL *, 283
DRVR CIR BAD *, 283
ETHERNET ADAPTER BEING
INITIALIZED, 285
ETHERNET DETECTED, 285
EXHAUST FAN FLT, 285
FIRMWARE ERROR, 285
FRAMING ERROR, 285
HAM. COIL OPEN *, 285
323
HAMMER COIL BAD X, X, X, 285
HB NOT INSTALLD *, 285
ILL EXT BUS ACC *, 286
ILL INST ACCSS *, 286
ILLGL OPR ACCSS *, 286
INTAKE FAN FAULT, 286
LO DRV. SHORT *, 286
LOAD PAPER, 286
PAP BAD TABLE *, 286
PAP BSY TOO LNG *, 286
PAP FIFO OVERFL *, 286
PAP FIFO UNDRFL *, 286
PAP ILLGL ST *, 287
PAP INCMPL ENER *, 287
PAP INVLD CMD *, 287
PAP INVLD PARM *, 287
PAP NOT SCHED *, 287
PAP NT AT SPEED *, 287
PAP UNEXP INT *, 287
PARITY ERROR, 287
PLAT INV CMD *, 287
PLAT INV PARM *, 287
PLAT INV STATE *, 287
POWER SAVER MODE, 287
POWERSUPPLY HOT *, 287
PRINTER HOT *, 287
PROTECTED INSTR *, 287
PWRSUPP VOLT *, 287
RIB INVLD CMD *, 288
RIB INVLD STAT *, 288
RIBBON DRIVE, 288
RIBBON INK OUT CHANGE RIBBON, 288
SECURITY CODE VIOLATION, 288
SHUTL INV CMD *, 288
SHUTL INV PARM *, 288
SHUTTLE JAM, 288
SOFTWARE ERROR *, 288
STACK OVERFLOW *, 288
STACK UNDERFLOW *, 289
STACKER FAULT, 289
STACKER FULL, 289
STACKER JAM, 289
TCB CORRUPTED *, 289
UNDEF INTERRUPT *, 289
UNDFNED OPCODE *, 289
UP DRV. SHORT *, 289
WAITING FOR ETHERNET ADAPTER, 289
FF Valid at TOF, 94
File Server, Novell Network, 144
Filter, Print Model, 147
Filter, Print Path, 146
FIRMWARE ERROR message, 285
Flash messages
CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH, 42,
44, 283, 286
DIAGNOSTICS PASSED, 42, 283
ERROR
DC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 42, 284
DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXX, 284
EC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 42, 284
EC STOPPED AT STATE XXXX, 42, 284
FLASH NOT DETECTED, 42, 284
NO DRAM DETECTED, 42
NVRAM FAILURE, 42, 284
PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM, 42
PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH, 43
PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE, 43
PROGRAM NOT VALID, 43
WRITING TO FLASH, 42
ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED, 284
ERROR OCCURRED / FLUSHING
QUEUES*, 43
ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE
DRAM, 284
ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE
FLASH, 284
ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE, 284
ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID, 284
ERROR SECURITY PAL NOT
DETECTED, 284
ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX, 284
ERROR WRITING TO FLASH, 284, 285
ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM, 285
ERROR, DRAM AT ADDRESS
XXXXXXXX, 42
324
ERROR, SECURITY PAL NOT
DETECTED, 43
ERROR, SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX, 43
ERROR, WRITING TO FLASH, 43
ERROR, WRONG CHECKSUM, 43
LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT
XX%, 43, 286
PLEASE WAIT... RESET IN PROGRESS, 44
RESETTING . . . / PLEASE WAIT, 288
RESTORING BOOT CODE, 44, 288
SECURITY CODE VIOLATION, 44
SENDING PROGRAM TO EC
PROCESSOR, 44, 288
TABLE MISMATCH / DOWNLOAD AGAIN, 44
TABLE MISMATCH DOWNLOAD AGAIN, 289
Font Attributes, 87
Form design checklist, 308
chaff content, 310
Cut-To-Tie Ratio, 310
environment, 308
form evenness, 309
form thickness, 308
form weight, 308
methods of forms attachment, 309
perforation intersections, 310
tractor pin holes, 309
type of form, 308
Form evenness, 305
Form thickness, 305
Form types, 305
Form weight, 305
Forms attachment, methods, 306
Frame Type, changing, 225
FrameType, Novell Network, 144
FRAMING ERROR message, 285
Free Format, 109
FTP Printing, 201
Function code
copy to computer, 31
downloading, 29
loading to flash memory, 32
G
Gateway Address, control panel configuration, 68
Gateway address, Ethernet Parameters menu, 126
Graphics Density, 83
Graphics formatting, 22
Graphics Options, 109
Graphics options, 23
Guidelines, paper, 303
H
HAM. COIL OPEN * message, 285
HAMMER COIL BAD X, X, X message, 285
Handling, 310
HB NOT INSTALLD * message, 285
Header String, Print Model, 147
Header String, Print Path, 146
Help, Command, 243
Hex code printout, 280
Hex Dump Mode, 114
High Speed Print, 101
Host configuration
Novell, 208
Unix, 196
Host Interface Menu, 115
Host Setup, Windows 3.1, 187
HP e3000 / MPE-XL / MPE / iX
DTC Configuration, 173
Host Configuration, 165
HP e3000/NIC Configuration, 165
HP-UX, Print setup, 196
HTML forms, 207
I
I/O Port
configuration, 149
Parallel port (PRN), 149
status, 155
Ignore Char, 105
Ignore Dots, 109
Ignore Mode, 108
Ignore Nulls, 112
Ignore Spaces, 110
Ignore/DB8 Setup, 112
325
IGP/PGL Emulation, 102
Auto Uppercase, 104
Autowrap, 103
Compressed CPI, 105
CR Edit, 103
Define CR Code, 103
Define LF Code, 103
Error Report, 106
Ext Execute Copy, 105
Ignore Char, 105
IGP100 Compatibility, 106
Optimized Ratio, 106
PI Slew Range, 103
Power on IGP/PGL, 104
Select Font, 104
Select LPI, 104
Select SFCC, 103
Skip Cmd Prefix, 104
UPC Descenders, 105
IGP/VGL Emulation, 107
Absorb After ^PN, 111
Absorb after ^PY, 110
Append Rotated, 109
Barcode Errors, 112
Convert to U/C, 111
Data Bit 8, 112
Error Handling, 111
Error Markers, 111
Error Msgs, 111
Free Format, 109
Graphics Options, 109
Ignore Dots, 109
Ignore Mode, 108
Ignore Nulls, 112
Ignore Spaces, 110
Ignore/DB8 Setup, 112
IGP110 Compatbl., 111
ISO Character Set, 113
LPI, 109
Mgnum Conversion, 109
Midline PY, 111
Offpage Errors, 112
PI Control, 113
Rot. Char Size, 110
SFCC, 108
SFCC & Pwrup, 108
Slashes in Zeros, 109
Truncate Alpha, 110
UPC Descenders, 110
IGP100 Compatibility, 106
IGP110 Compatbl., 111
ILL EXT BUS ACC * message, 286
ILL INST ACCSS * message, 286
ILLGL OPR ACCSS * message, 286
INTAKE FAN FAULT message, 286
Interface
Bi-Tronics, 268
Centronics, 266
RS-232 serial, 271
specifications, 296
type, 120
Interface, overview, 265
Interfaces, 21
Interior cleaning, 275
IP Address, control panel configuration, 68
IP address, Ethernet Parameters menu, 125
ISO Character Set, 113
L
Latch Data On, 118
Line matrix printing, 24
Line Terminator, 83
LinePrinter Plus Emulation, 86
CPI/LPI Select, 87
Font Attributes, 87
Page Format, 88
Print Character Set, 87
Printer Protocol, 87
Reset Cmd CFG Ld, 89
List Commands, 254
LO DRV. SHORT * message, 286
Load Configuration, 77
LOAD PAPER message, 286
Loading configuration values, 60
LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX%, 43, 286
326
Log Path
configuration, 148
Logpath Port, 149
Logpath Type, 148
Name, 148
Log Path Port, Print Path, 147
Log Path Type, Print Path, 147
Logging, printer, 262
Logical Printer Architecture, 138
Destinations/Queues, 139
Models, 140
Logpath Port, Log Path, 149
Logpath Type, Log Path, 148
Logpaths, logging printer, 263
LP Plus Emulations, 80
LPI, 109
LPI Adjust, 84
LPR/LPD, Print setup on BSD Systems, 200
M
MAC address, Ethernet Parameters menu, 126
Maint/Misc Menu, 114
Display Language, 114
Hex Dump Mode, 114
Power Stacker, 115
Power-up State, 114
Maintenance, 275
Manual
cautions, 17
notes, 17
printing conventions, 17
related documents, 18
warnings, 17
Maximum Line Width, 83
Menu
Configuration Control, 77
Diagnostics, 129
Epson FX Emulation, 95
Ethernet Params, 125
Host Interface, 115
IGP/PGL Emulation, 102
IGP/VGL Emulation, 107
LinePrinter Plus Emulation, 86
Main, 74
Maint/Misc, 114
Printer Control, 127
P-Series Emulation, 90
P-Series XQ Emulation, 100
RibbonMinder, 132
Serial Matrix Emulation, 97
Mgnum Conversion, 109
MIB, 315
Midline PY, 111
Miscellaneous Commands, 256
Model Type, Print Model, 147
Model Type, Print Path, 146
models, setting onlcr, 203
Monitoring tools, 317
AIX NetView/6000, 317
OS/2 TCP/IP, 317
setting SNMP community name, 317
Web JetAdmin, 317
Monitoring, printer, 262
N
Name, Log Path, 148
Name, Print Model, 147
Naming scheme, 264
NDS
setting NIC content, 227
setting print server preferred NDS tree, 228
NDS & Bindery
change print server mode, 226
changing Frame Type, 225
changing print server name, 223
password security, 221
Polling time, 222
Preferred File Server, 218
NDS PSERVER Setup (Netware 4.x and 5.x), 229
NDS, Novell Network, 144
Negotiation phase, 269
NetBIOS protocol, Ethernet Parameters menu, 126
NetBIOS TCP/IP
Windows Network, 144
Workgroup Name, 144
327
Netware 3.x, 4.x, and 5.x
Bindery PSERVER Setup, 231
Bindery Queue in NDS, 231
PPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup, 232
Netware 4.x and 5.x, NDS PSERVER Setup, 229
NetWare Version 4.x and 5.x
Novell, 211, 213
Network
configuration, 143
status, 155
TCP/IP, 143
Network connection, 67
Network Interface Card (NIC), 26
Network printing overview, 137
New Rib. Detect, 136
New Ribbon, 133
Nibble mode, 268
NIC
configuration setup, 67
downloading software, 37
naming scheme, 264
Reset mode, 27
Run mode, 27
setting content, 227
Windows configuration, 176
NIC Configuration Verification, 168
NIC Security, 259
guest, 259
passwords, 259
root, 259
users, 259
NIC Web page
configuration, 142
overview, 141
Notes, 17
Novell
Environment description, 206
Host configuration, 208
Host configuration (10/100Base-T), 229
HTML forms, 207
NetWare Version 3.x PSERVER Setup, 208
NetWare Version 3.x RPRINTER Setup, 210
NetWare Version 4.x and 5.x, 211, 213
NIC configuration, 206
NIC Configuration (10/100Base-T), 217
Troubleshooting Tips, 215
Novell 4.x and 5.x, troubleshooting, 216
Novell Configuration for 10/100Base-T,
overview, 217
Novell configuration, overview, 205
Novell frame, Ethernet Parameters menu, 126
Novell Network, 144
File Server, 144
FrameType, 144
NDS, 144
Protocol, 144
Pserver, 145
Rprinter, 145
Service Type, 144
Novell protocol, Ethernet Parameters menu, 126
NPDS configuration, 234
O
Offpage Errors, 112
onlcr, 203
Online signal, 267
Open Platen @ BOF, 128
Operating modes, 48
Optimized Ratio, 106
Optional Emulations, 80
Optional Fonts, downloading to flash memory, 39
OS/2 TCP/IP, 317
Output control, 22
Overrun error handling, 273
Overstrike, 91, 98
P
P5000LJ Series Printer Family, 19
Page level recovery, 171
supplies, 293
Page Format, 88
Page Length Adjust/Inches, 84
Page Length Adjust/Lines, 84
Page Length Representation, 83
Page level recovery, 171
PAP BAD TABLE * message, 286
PAP BSY TOO LNG * message, 286
328
PAP FIFO OVERFL * message, 286
PAP FIFO UNDRFL * message, 286
PAP ILLGL ST * message, 287
PAP INCMPL ENER * message, 287
PAP INVLD CMD * message, 287
PAP INVLD PARM * message, 287
PAP NOT SCHED * message, 287
PAP NT AT SPEED * message, 287
PAP UNEXP INT * message, 287
Paper
adjusting position, 170
guidelines, 303
specifications, 301
Paper empty (PE) signal, 267
Paper instruction (PI) signal, 267
Paper Out Dots, 131
Paperout Adj., 131
Parallel port (PRN), I/O Port, 149
Parameter settings
changing, 49
saving, 49
Parameters, changing, 54
Parity, 121
PARITY ERROR message, 287
Parity, error handling, 273
Password security, setting, 221
Passwords, 154
PCL -ll Emulation, 80
Configuration Printout, 84
Display Functions, 83
Face, CPI Delay, 83
Graphics Density, 83
Line Terminator, 83
LPI Adjust, 84
Maximum Line Width, 83
Page Length Adjust/Inches, 84
Page Length Adjust/Lines, 84
Page Length Representation, 83
Perforation Skip, 83
Primary Character Set, 82
PTX Linefeed, 84
Reset Cmd CFG Ld, 85
Secondary Character Set, 82
Symbol Set Print, 85
Peer to peer networks, 137
Perforation Skip, 83
Phase Printer, 130
PI Control, 113
PI Ignored, 118
PI Slew Range, 103
Pin assignments
RS-232 serial interface, 272
RS-422 serial interface, 272
PLAT INV CMD * message, 287
PLAT INV PARM * message, 287
PLAT INV STATE * message, 287
PLEASE WAIT... RESET IN PROGRESS, 44
PMD (Paper Motion Detection) Fault, 128
Polling time, adjusting, 222
Port Type, 123
Power on IGP/PGL, 104
POWER SAVER MODE message, 287
Power Saver Time, 129
Power Stacker, 115
POWERSUPPLY HOT * message, 287
Power-Up Configuration, 78
Power-up configuration, 62
Power-up State, 114
Preferred File Server, 218
Prefixes, Command, 244
Primary Character Set, 82
Prime Signal, 116, 118
Print Character Set, 87
Print Configuration, 78
Print current configuration, 58
Print Error Log, 131
Print job servers, 138
Print Model, 147
Banner Page, 147
configuration, 147
Filter, 147
Header String, 147
Model Type, 147
Name, 147
329
Printer Configuration, 148
Trailer String, 148
Print Path
Banner Page, 146
Filter, 146
Header String, 146
Log Path Port, 147
Log Path Type, 147
Model Type, 146
Printer Configuration, 146
Selected Log Path, 146
Selected Model, 146
Trailer String, 146
Print Path, configuration, 145
Print server
change mode, 226
changing name, 223
setting preferred NDS tree, 228
Print setup
HP-UX, 196
Sys V, 198
Print Statistics, 132
Printer
architecture, 19
built-in diagnostic tools, 22
cleaning, 21
configuration, 45
dimensions, 294
emulations, 21, 23
features, 21
graphics formatting, 22
graphics options, 23
handling, 310
installing printer emulations, 32
interfaces, 21
line matrix printing, 24
loading function code to flash memory, 32
locking the ENTER key, 48
logging, 262
logging through logpaths, 263
monitoring, 262
monitoring tools, 317
operating modes, 48
output control, 22
predefined configurations, 48
protocols, 23
Remote Management Software, 315
ribbon specifications, 291
SNMP, 316
storage, 310
unlocking the ENTER key, 48
vertical formatting, 22
Printer Configuration, Print Model, 148
Printer Configuration, Print Path, 146
Printer Control Menu, 127
Open Platen @ BOF, 128
PMD (Paper Motion Detection) Fault, 128
Power Saver Time, 129
Slow Paper Slew, 128
Unidirectional, 128
PRINTER HOT * message, 287
Printer Protocol, 87
Printer Select, 96, 98
Printer settings, changing, 45
Printer Tests, 130
All Black, 130
All E’s, 130
All H’s, 130
All Underlines, 130
Burnin Test, 131
Clear Error Log, 131
E’s + TOF, 130
E-Net Test Page, 131
Paperout Adj., 131
Phase Printer, 130
Print Error Log, 131
Shift Recycle, 130
Shuttle Fast, 130
Shuttle Only, 130
Shuttle Slow, 130
Printing conventions, 17
Printing speed, 25
Printouts, hex code, 280
Problems, diagnosing, 278
330
Proprinter XL Emulation, 93
20 CPI Condensed, 94
Alternate Character Set, 94
Auto LF, 94
Character Set, 94
Define CR Code, 93
Define LF Code, 94
FF Valid at TOF, 94
Protect Configuration, 78
PROTECTED INSTR * message, 287
Protecting configurations, 66
Protocol, Novell Network, 144
Protocols, 23
RS-232 serial interface, 273
RS-422 serial interface, 273
P-Series Emulation, 90
Alt. Set 80-9F, 92
Auto LF, 91
Character Set, 92
Control Code 06, 91
Control Code 08, 91
Define CR Code, 91
Define LF Code, 91
EVFU Select, 92
Overstrike, 91
Select SFCC, 92
SFCC d Command, 92
P-Series XQ Emulation, 100
Auto LF, 100
Compressed Print, 101
Control Code 06, 100
Define CR Code, 100
Define LF Code, 101
Elong/Alt. Font, 101
EVFU Select, 101
High Speed Print, 101
Slew Relative, 102
Upper Case Select, 101
Pserver, Novell Network, 145
PTX Linefeed, 84
PWRSUPP VOLT * message, 287
R
Received data (RD) signal
RS-232 serial interface, 272
RS-422 serial interface, 273
Referencing A Bindery Queue In NDS (Netware
3.x, 4.x, and 5.x), 231
Related documents, 18
Relative humidity, 294
Remote Management Software, 315
Agent/Manager Model, 315
MIB, 315
Remote shell printing, 201
Report Status, 124
Request to Send, 121
Request To Send (RTS) signal, RS-232 serial
interface, 272
Reset Cmd CFG Ld, 85, 89
Reset mode, 27
RESETTING . . . / PLEASE WAIT, 288
Resp. Polarity, 118
RESTORING BOOT CODE, 44, 288
RIB INVLD CMD * message, 288
RIB INVLD STATE * message, 288
Ribbon Action, 133
RIBBON DRIVE message, 288
Ribbon End Point, 135
RIBBON INK OUT CHANGE RIBBON
message, 288
Ribbon specifications, 291
Ribbon Type, 135
RibbonMinder Menu, 132
New Rib. Detect, 136
New Ribbon, 133
Ribbon Action, 133
Ribbon End Point, 135
Ribbon Type, 135
Rot. Char Size, 110
Routers
Unix, 195
Windows, 177
Rprinter, Novell Network, 145
331
RPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup (Netware 3.x, 4.x,
and 5.x), 232
RS-232 serial interface, 271
clear to send (CTS), 272
configuration, 274
data carrier detect (DCD), 273
data set ready (DSR), 272
error handling, 273
framing error handling, 273
overrun error handling, 273
parity error handling, 273
pin assignments, 272
protocol, 273
request to send (RTS), 272
X-ON/X-OFF signal, 273
RS-232 serial interface signals
data terminal ready (DTR), 273
received data (RD), 272
transmitted data (TD), 272
RS-422 serial interface
configuration, 274
error handling, 273
framing error handling, 273
overrun error handling, 273
parity error handling, 273
pin assignments, 272
X-ON/X-OFF signal, 273
RS-422 serial interface signals, 272
received data (RD), 273
transmitted data (TD), 273
Run mode, 27
S
Save Configuration, 78
Save current configuration, 56
Saving parameter settings, 49
Secondary Character Set, 82
SECURITY CODE VIOLATION, 44
SECURITY CODE VIOLATION message, 288
Security, NIC, 259
Select Font, 104
Select LPI, 104
Select SFCC, 92, 103
Selected Log Path, Print Path, 146
Selected Model, Print Path, 146
Self-tests, running, 278
SENDING PROGRAM TO EC
PROCESSOR, 44, 288
Serial interface, RS-232, 271
Serial Matrix Character Set Menu, 99
Serial Matrix Emulation, 97
Alternate Set 80-9F, 98
Auto LF, 98
Character Set, 98
Control Code 06, 97
Define CR Code, 97
Define LF Code, 98
ESC d Command, 98
Overstrike, 98
Printer Select, 98
Serial Submenu, 119
Baud Rate, 120
Buffer Size in K, 121
Data Protocol, 120
Data Term Ready, 121
Interface Type, 120
Parity, 121
Request to Send, 121
Stop Bits, 121
Word Length, 121
Service Type, Novell Network, 144
Service, routine, 275
Set Commands, 247
SFCC, 108
SFCC & Pwrup, 108
SFCC d Command, 92
Shell commands, 243
Shift Recycle, 130
SHUTL INV CMD * message, 288
SHUTL INV PARM * message, 288
Shuttle Fast, 130
SHUTTLE JAM message, 288
Shuttle Only, 130
Shuttle Slow, 130
332
Signals
Bi-Tronics interface, 269
Centronics parallel interface, 267
RS-232 serial interface, 272
RS-422 serial interface, 272
Slashes in Zeros, 109
Slew Relative, 102
Slow Paper Slew, 128
SNMP, 316
configuration, 150
manager alert posting, 150
setting community name, 317
SOFTWARE ERROR * message, 288
Software, downloading through the NIC, 37
Specifications
electrical, 295
environmental, 294
interfaces, 296
paper, 301
ribbon, 291
Speed, printing, 25
STACK OVERFLOW * message, 288
STACK UNDERFLOW * message, 289
STACKER FAULT message, 289
STACKER FULL message, 289
STACKER JAM message, 289
Standard printer features, 21
Status
I/O Port, 155
menu, 155
Network, 155
Stop Bits, 121
Storage, 310
Store Commands, 244
Subnet Mask, control panel configuration, 68
Subnet mask, Ethernet Parameters menu, 126
Supplies, P5000LJ, 293
Symbol Set Print, 85
Sys V, Print setup, 198
Syslog alert posting, 150
System
configuration, 155
information, 154
System Memory, 131
T
TABLE MISMATCH / DOWNLOAD AGAIN, 44
TABLE MISMATCH DOWNLOAD AGAIN, 289
TCB CORRUPTED * message, 289
TCP Access Lists, 261
TCP/IP Access Problem, Windows, 189
TCP/IP Network, 143
Interface, 143
Routing, 143
TCP/IP NIC
Aliases, 158
assign values, 160
setting values, 159
setting values using a Network, 161
TCP/IP NIC configuration, 157
Temperature, 294
Terms, 303
Test Width, 131
Testing the printer, 278
Timeout, 124
TOF Action, 117, 119
Tractor pin engagement, 305
Trailer String, Print Model, 148
Trailer String, Print Path, 146
Transmitted data (TD) signal
RS-232 serial interface, 272
RS-422 serial interface, 273
Trickle Time, 124
Troubleshooting
10/100Base-T, 236
Novell 4.x and 5.x, 216
printing related, 240
RPRINTER/NPRINTER Setup, 239
Troubleshooting Tips
Unix, 202
Windows, 187
Truncate Alpha, 110
333
U
UNDEF INTERRUPT * message, 289
UNDFNED OPCODE * message, 289
Unidirectional, 128
Unix
Host configuration, 196
NIC configuration, 195
Routers, 195
Troubleshooting Tips, 202
using BOOTP, 163
UP DRV. SHORT * message, 289
UPC Descenders, 105, 110
Upper Case Select, 101
URL, home page, 70
Using BOOTP, Unix, 163
V
Vertical formatting, 22
W
WAITING FOR ETHERNET ADAPTER
message, 289
Warnings, 17
Web JetAdmin, 317
Windows
communicating, 177
environment description, 175
mandatory configuration, 176
NIC configuration, 176
NT 3.51configuration, 179
optional configuration, 176
routers, 177
TCP/IP access problem, 189
Windows 3.1, host setup, 187
Windows 95/98/ME Host Setup, 186
Windows Configuration overview, 175
Windows Network (NetBIOS TCP/IP), 144
Windows NT 4.0 Host Setup, 180
Windows Troubleshooting Tips, 187
Word Length, 121
Workgroup Names, changing, 177
X
X-ON/X-OFF signal, RS-232 serial interface, 273
334
Printronix, Inc.
14600 Myford Road
Irvine, CA 92606-1005
Phone: 714 / 368-2300
Fax: 714 / 368-2600
Customer Solutions Center: 714 / 368-2686
173952-001D
Printronix
Nederland BV
P.O. Box 163, Nieuweweg 283
NL-6600 Ad Wijchen
The Netherlands
Phone: (31) 24 6489489
Fax: (31) 24 6489499
Printronix Schweiz GmbH
42 Changi South Street 1
Changi South Industrial Estate
Singapore 486763
Phone: (65) 6542-0110
Fax: (65) 6543-0220
Visit our web site at:
www.p5000lj.com
*173952-001*

Navigation menu